all | frequencies |
|
|
exhibits | applications |
---|---|---|---|---|---|
manuals |
app s | submitted / available | |||||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
1 |
|
User Manual Part One | Users Manual | 2.50 MiB | May 02 2008 | |||
1 |
|
User Manual Part Two | Users Manual | 3.07 MiB | May 02 2008 | |||
1 | Cover Letter(s) | May 02 2008 | ||||||
1 | External Photos | May 02 2008 | ||||||
1 | ID Label/Location Info | May 02 2008 | ||||||
1 | Internal Photos | May 02 2008 | ||||||
1 | RF Exposure Info | May 02 2008 | ||||||
1 | Test Report | May 02 2008 | ||||||
1 | Test Setup Photos | May 02 2008 |
1 | User Manual Part One | Users Manual | 2.50 MiB | May 02 2008 |
Administrators Handbook Embedded Software Version 7.7.4 Motorola Netopia Series Gateways 2200, 3300 and 7000 Administrators Handbook Copyright Copyright 2007 by Motorola, Inc. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced in any form or by any means or used to make any derivative work (such as translation, transformation or adaptation) without written permission from Motorola, Inc. Motorola reserves the right to revise this publication and to make changes in content from time to time without obligation on the part of Motorola to provide notification of such revision or change. Motorola provides this guide without warranty of any kind, either implied or expressed, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. Motorola may make improvements or changes in the product(s) described in this manual at any time. MOTOROLA and the Stylized M Logo are registered in the US Patent & Trademark Office. Microsoft, Windows, Windows Me, and Windows NT are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S and/or other countries. Macintosh is a registered trademark of Apple, Inc. Firefox is a registered trademark of the Mozilla Foundation. All other product or service names are the property of their respective owners. Motorola, Inc. 6001 Shellmound Street Emeryville, CA 94608 U.S.A. Part Number 6161244-00-01 Copyright Acknowledgments Because Motorola has included certain software source code in this product, Motorola includes the following text required by the respective copyright holders:
Portions of this software are based in part on the work of the following:
Copyright (c) 1998-2005 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment:
This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit.
(http://www.openssl.org/) 4. The names OpenSSL Toolkit and OpenSSL Project must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior written permission. For written permission, please contact openssl-
core@openssl.org. 5. Products derived from this software may not be called OpenSSL nor may OpenSSL appear in their names without prior written permission of the OpenSSL Project. 6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment:
This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/) THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com). This product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com). Original SSLeay License
/Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com) All rights reserved. This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com). The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL. This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as the following conditions are adhered to. The following conditions apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA, lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. The SSL documentation included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com). Copyright remains Eric Young's, and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed. If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library used. This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in documentation (online or textual) provided with the package. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement:
This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com) The word 'cryptographic' can be left out if the routines from the library being used are not cryptographic related :-). 4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from the apps directory (application code) you must include an acknowledgement:
This product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com) THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. The licence and distribution terms for any publicly available version or derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e. this code cannot simply be copied and put under another distribution licence [including the GNU Public Licence.]
Portions of this software are based in part on the work of the following:
Copyright (C) 1995, 1996, 1997, and 1998 WIDE Project. All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. 3. Neither the name of the project nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE PROJECT AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE PROJECT OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. Portions of this software are based in part on the work of the following:
Copyright (C) 1990, RSA Data Security, Inc. All rights reserved.
<<RSA Data Security, Inc. MD5 Message-Digest Algorithm>>
License to copy and use this software is granted provided that it is identified as the RSA Data Security, Inc. MD5 Message Digest Algorithm in all material mentioning or referencing this software or this function. License is also granted to make and use derivative works provided that such works are identified as derived from the RSA Data Security, Inc. MD5 Message-Digest Algorithm in all material mentioning or referencing the derived work.
<<RSA Data Security, Inc. MD4 Message-Digest Algorithm>>
License to copy and use this software is granted provided that it is identified as the RSA Data Security, Inc. MD4 Message Digest Algorithm in all material mentioning or referencing this software or this function. License is also granted to make and use derivative works provided that such works are identified as derived from the RSA Data Security, Inc. MD4 Message-Digest Algorithm in all material mentioning or referencing the derived work. Administrators Handbook RSA Data Security, Inc. makes no representations concerning either the merchantability of this software or the suitability of this software for any particular purpose. It is provided as is without express or implied warranty of any kind. These notices must be retained in any copies of any part of this documentation and/or software. Portions of this software are based in part on the work of the following:
Copyright (c) 1989 Carnegie Mellon University. All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms are permitted provided that the above copyright notice and this paragraph are duplicated in all such forms and that any documentation, advertising materials, and other materials related to such distribution and use acknowledge that the software was developed by Carnegie Mellon University. The name of the University may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED ``AS IS'' AND WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Portions of this software are based in part on the work of the following:
Copyright 2000, 2001 Shane Kerr. All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR(S) ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. Table of Contents CHAPTER 1 Introduction . 13 Whats New in 7.7.4 About Motorola Netopia Documentation Intended Audience Documentation Conventions
. 13
. 15
. 15
. 15 General. 15 Internal Web Interface . 16 Command Line Interface . 16
. 17
. 17 Organization A Word About Example Screens CHAPTER 2 Basic Mode Setup . 19 Important Safety Instructions Wichtige Sicherheitshinweise Setting up the Motorola Netopia Gateway Configuring the Motorola Netopia Gateway
. 20 POWER SUPPLY INSTALLATION. 20 TELECOMMUNICATION INSTALLATION . 20 PRODUCT VENTILATION . 20
. 21 NETZTEIL INSTALLIEREN . 21 INSTALLATION DER TELEKOMMUNIKATION . 21
. 22 Microsoft Windows: . 22 Macintosh MacOS 8 or higher or Mac OS X: . 24
. 25 MiAVo VDSL and Ethernet WAN models Quickstart . 25 PPPoE Quickstart. 27 Set up the Motorola Netopia Pocket Gateway. 28
. 30
. 31 Manage My Account. 33 Status Details . 34 Enable Remote Management . 35 Expert Mode . 36 Update Firmware . 37 Factory Reset . 38 Motorola Netopia Gateway Status Indicator Lights Home Page - Basic Mode CHAPTER 3 Expert Mode . 39 Accessing the Expert Web Interface
. 39 Open the Web Connection . 39 Home Page - Expert Mode. 41 5 Administrators Handbook Restart Help Configure Toolbar Navigating the Web Interface Home Page - Information . 41
. 43
. 43 Breadcrumb Trail . 43
. 44 Alert Symbol . 45
. 46
. 47 Quickstart . 47 How to Use the Quickstart Page . 47 Setup Your Gateway using a PPP Connection . 47 LAN . 49 Wireless . 53 Privacy . 54 Advanced . 56 About Closed System Mode . 57 WPA Version Allowed . 59 Multiple SSIDs . 59 WiFi Multimedia . 62 Wireless MAC Authorization. 63 Use RADIUS Server . 65 WAN . 67 PPP over Ethernet interface. 67 Advanced: . 69 Ethernet WAN interface . 70 WAN Ethernet and VDSL Gateways. 73 ADSL Gateways . 73 Advanced . 78 IP Static Routes . 79 IP Static ARP . 81 Pinholes . 82 Configure Specific Pinholes . 82 Planning for Your Pinholes . 82 Example: A LAN Requiring Three Pinholes . 82 Pinhole Configuration Procedure . 84 IPMaps . 87 Configure the IPMaps Feature . 87 FAQs for the IPMaps Feature . 87 What are IPMaps and how are they used? . 87 What types of servers are supported by IPMaps? . 87 Can I use IPMaps with my PPPoE or PPPoA connection? . 87 Will IPMaps allow IP addresses from different subnets to be assigned to my Gate-
way? . 87 IPMaps Block Diagram . 88 Default Server . 89 Configure a Default Server . 89 Typical Network Diagram . 89 NAT Combination Application . 90 IP-Passthrough . 90 A restriction . 91 Differentiated Services . 92 DNS . 95 DHCP Server . 96 RADIUS Server . 97 6 Security SNMP . 98 IGMP (Internet Group Management Protocol) . 100 UPnP . 102 LAN Management . 103 Ethernet Bridge . 104 Configuring for Bridge Mode . 105 VLAN . 107 Overview . 107 Ethernet Switching/Policy Setup . 108 Example . 116 VoIP . 120 System . 124 Syslog Parameters . 125 Log Event Messages . 126 Internal Servers . 129 Software Hosting . 130 List of Supported Games and Software . 131 Rename a User(PC). 132 Backup . 133 Manual options . 133 Automatic options . 134 Ethernet MAC Override . 136 Clear Options . 137 Time Zone . 138
. 139 Passwords . 140 Create and Change Passwords . 140 Firewall . 142 Use a Motorola Netopia Firewall . 142 BreakWater Basic Firewall . 142 Configuring for a BreakWater Setting . 142 TIPS for making your BreakWater Basic Firewall Selection . 143 Basic Firewall Background . 143 IPSec . 146 SafeHarbour IPSec VPN . 147 Configuring a SafeHarbour VPN. 148 Parameter Descriptions. 151 Stateful Inspection . 154 Stateful Inspection Firewall installation procedure . 154 Exposed Addresses . 155 Stateful Inspection Options . 157 Open Ports in Default Stateful Inspection Installation . 157
. 158 General firewall terms . 158 Basic IP packet components . 158 Basic protocol types . 158 Firewall design rules. 159 Firewall Logic . 159 Implied rules . 160 Example filter set page . 160 Filter basics . 161 Example network. 161 Example filters . 161 Example 1 . 161 Example 2 . 162 Firewall Tutorial 7 Administrators Handbook Working with IP Filters and Filter Sets Example 3 . 162 Example 4 . 162 Example 5 . 162 Packet Filter . 163 Whats a filter and whats a filter set?. 163 How filter sets work . 164 Filter priority . 164 How individual filters work . 165 A filtering rule . 165 Parts of a filter . 165 Port numbers. 165 Port number comparisons . 166 Other filter attributes . 166 Putting the parts together . 167 Filtering example #1 . 167 Filtering example #2 . 169 Design guidelines. 169 An approach to using filters. 170
. 171 Adding a filter set . 171 Adding filters to a filter set . 172 Viewing filters . 175 Modifying filters . 175 Deleting filters . 175 Moving filters . 175 Deleting a filter set . 175
. 176
. 177 TOS field matching. 177 Security Log . 179 Using the Security Monitoring Log . 179 Timestamp Background . 181
. 182 Install Software. 183 Updating Your Gateways Motorola Netopia Firmware Version 183 Step 1: Required Files . 183 Step 2: Motorola Netopia firmware Image File . 184 Install Key. 187 Use Motorola Netopia Software Feature Keys . 187 Obtaining Software Feature Keys . 187 Procedure - Install a New Feature Key File . 187 To check your installed features: . 189 Install Certificate. 190 Associating a Filter Set with an Interface Policy-based Routing using Filtersets Install CHAPTER 4 Basic Troubleshooting . 193 Status Indicator Lights
. 194 LED Function Summary Matrix . 204
. 206 Factory Reset Switch 8 CHAPTER 5 Advanced Troubleshooting . 207 Home Page . 208 Expert Mode . 210 System Status . 211 Ports: Ethernet . 212 Ports: DSL . 213 IP: Interfaces . 214 DSL: Circuit Configuration . 215 System Log: Entire . 216 Diagnostics. 217 Network Tools . 218 CHAPTER 6 Command Line Interface . 223 SHELL Commands About CONFIG Commands Using the CLI Help Facility About SHELL Commands Overview Starting and Ending a CLI Session
. 224
. 226 Logging In. 226 Ending a CLI Session. 226 Saving Settings . 226
. 226
. 227 SHELL Prompt . 227 SHELL Command Shortcuts . 227
. 228 Common Commands . 228 WAN Commands . 239
. 240 CONFIG Mode Prompt. 240 Navigating the CONFIG Hierarchy . 240 Entering Commands in CONFIG Mode . 241 Guidelines: CONFIG Commands . 241 Displaying Current Gateway Settings. 242 Step Mode: A CLI Configuration Technique . 242 Validating Your Configuration . 242
. 243 Remote ATA Configuration Commands . 243 DSL Commands . 245 ATM Settings . 245 Bridging Settings . 246 Common Commands . 247 DHCP Settings . 248 Common Commands . 248 DHCP Generic Options . 249 DHCP Option Filtering. 252 Example . 253 DMT Settings . 254 DSL Commands . 254 Domain Name System Settings . 255 Common Commands . 255 Dynamic DNS Settings . 256 IGMP Settings . 257 CONFIG Commands 9 Administrators Handbook IP Settings . 259 Common Settings . 259 ARP Timeout Settings. 259 DSL Settings . 259 Ethernet LAN Settings. 261 Additional subnets. 262 Default IP Gateway Settings . 263 IP-over-PPP Settings . 263 Static ARP Settings. 266 IGMP Forwarding . 266 IPsec Passthrough . 266 IP Prioritization . 266 Differentiated Services (DiffServ) . 267 Packet Mapping Configuration . 269 Queue Configuration . 271 Basic Queue . 272 Weighted Fair Queue . 273 Priority Queue . 274 Funnel Queue . 275 Interface Queue Assignment. 275 SIP Passthrough . 276 RTSP Passthrough . 276 Static Route Settings. 276 IPMaps Settings . 277 Network Address Translation (NAT) Default Settings. 278 Network Address Translation (NAT) Pinhole Settings . 278 PPPoE /PPPoA Settings . 279 Configuring Basic PPP Settings . 279 Configuring Port Authentication . 281 PPPoE with IPoE Settings . 282 Ethernet WAN platforms . 282 ADSL platforms . 283 Ethernet Port Settings . 283 802.3ah Ethernet OAM Settings . 284 Command Line Interface Preference Settings . 285 Port Renumbering Settings . 286 Security Settings . 287 Firewall Settings (for BreakWater Firewall). 287 SafeHarbour IPSec Settings . 287 Internet Key Exchange (IKE) Settings . 291 Stateful Inspection. 292 Example: . 293 Packet Filtering Settings . 294 Example: . 296 SNMP Settings . 297 SNMP Notify Type Settings. 297 System Settings . 298 Syslog. 301 Default syslog installation procedure . 302 Wireless Settings (supported models) . 303 Wireless Multi-media (WMM) Settings . 306 Wireless Privacy Settings . 308 Wireless MAC Address Authorization Settings . 309 RADIUS Server Settings . 310 VLAN Settings . 311 Example 1: . 312 10 Example 2: . 313 VoIP settings . 316 Example . 320 UPnP settings. 321 DSL Forum settings . 321 TR-064 . 321 TR-069 . 322 Backup IP Gateway Settings . 323 VDSL Settings . 325 VDSL Parameter Defaults. 325 VDSL Parameters Accepted Values . 327 CHAPTER 7 Glossary . 331
-----A----- . 331
-----B----- . 332
-----C----- . 332
-----D----- . 333
-----E----- . 334
-----F----- . 335
-----H----- . 335
-----I----- . 336
-----K----- . 336
-----L----- . 336
-----M----- . 337
-----N----- . 337
-----P----- . 338
-----Q----- . 338
-----R----- . 339
-----S----- . 339
-----T----- . 340
-----U----- . 341
-----V----- . 341
-----W-----. 341
-----X----- . 341 CHAPTER 8 Technical Specifications and Safety Information . 343 Description
. 343 Dimensions: . 343 Communications interfaces: . 343 Power requirements . 343 Environment . 343 Operating temperature: . 343 Storage temperature: . 343 Relative storage humidity: . 343 Software and protocols. 343 Software media: . 343 Routing: . 343 WAN support: . 343 Security: . 343 Management/configuration methods: . 344 Diagnostics: . 344
. 344 Agency approvals 11 Administrators Handbook Manufacturers Declaration of Conformance North America . 344 International . 344 Regulatory notices . 344 European Community. . 344
. 344 United States . 345 Service requirements . 345 Canada . 345 Declaration for Canadian users. 345 Caution . 346
. 346 Australian Safety Information . 346 Caution . 346 Caution . 346 Telecommunication installation cautions . 346
. 347 FCC Requirements. 347 FCC Statements. 347
. 348
. 348 Electrical Safety Advisory Copyright Acknowledgments Important Safety Instructions 47 CFR Part 68 Information CHAPTER 9 Overview of Major Capabilities . 351 Security Management Wide Area Network Termination Simplified Local Area Network Setup
. 351 PPPoE/PPPoA (Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet/ATM) . 351 Instant-On PPP . 352
. 352 DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) Server . 352 DNS Proxy . 353
. 353 Embedded Web Server . 353 Diagnostics . 353
. 354 Remote Access Control . 354 Password Protection . 354 Network Address Translation (NAT) . 354 Motorola Netopia Advanced Features for NAT . 355 Internal Servers. 355 Pinholes . 356 Default Server . 356 Combination NAT Bypass Configuration . 356 IP-Passthrough . 356 VPN IPSec Pass Through. 357 VPN IPSec Tunnel Termination . 357 Stateful Inspection Firewall . 358 SSL Certificate Support. 358 VLANs . 358 Index . 359 12 CHAPTER 1 Introduction Whats New in 7.7.4 New in Motorola Netopia Embedded Software Version 7.7.4 are the following features:
0.0.0.0 is used as the source address for IGMP packets. Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) Version 3 support. See IGMP (Internet Group Management Protocol) on page 100. TR-101 Support:
Concurrent support for PPPoE and IPoE connections on the WAN. See WAN on page 67. Multiple LAN IP Subnet support. See LAN on page 49. Additional DHCP range support. These ranges are associated with the additional LAN subnets on a 1-to-1 basis. DHCP option ltering support. Allows DHCP option data to be used to determine the desired DHCP address range. See DHCP Option Filtering on page 252. Support for additional WAN settings to control multicast forwarding as well as if See Advanced: on page 69. Support for unnumbered interfaces. For IP interfaces, this allows the address to be set to PPPoE/DHCP Autosensing. See WAN on page 67. Wireless Multimedia Mode (WMM) support. See WiFi Multimedia on page 62. Firewall: ClearSailing is automatically enabled on all 2200-Series ADSL2+ platforms. (Explicit excep-
tions: bonded and VDSL2, 3341, and 3387WG.) See Firewall on page 142. TR-069 Remote device management is automatically enabled by default for 2200-Series Gateways.
(Explicit exceptions: bonded and VDSL2, 3341, 3387WG). See TR-069 on page 322. Voice-over-IP (VoIP) Support using Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) for supported models. See VoIP on page 120 and VoIP CLI VoIP settings on page 316. Support of VLAN ID 0 on the Ethernet WAN and support for setting p-bits on a segment/port basis; inter-
VLAN groups. See VLAN on page 107 and CLI VLAN Settings on page 311. Backup IP Gateway Support. See Backup on page 133 and CLI Backup IP Gateway Settings on page 323. and the DHCP client also to be disabled. See page 71. 0 Corresponding commands have been added to the Command Line Interface (CLI). See Command Line Interface on page 223. Reset WAN port and wireless counter and CLI command to display individual Ethernet port statistics. See reset enet [ all ] on page 231 and show enet [ all ] on page 233. CLI for Motorola Netopia ATA Remote Management. See Remote ATA Conguration Commands on page 243. 13 Administrators Handbook Provide Bandwidth Management using Weighted Fair Queueing. See Queue Conguration on page 271. New CLI command for disabling Dying Gasp. See DMT Settings on page 254. Ethernet in the First Mile Operations Administration and Maintenance (802.3ah EFM OAM) Support. See 802.3ah Ethernet OAM Settings on page 284. IP multicast to layer 2 unicast mapping. See IGMP Settings on page 257. Real Time Streaming Protocol (RTSP) ALG support for Video-on-Demand (VoD) Services. See RTSP Passthrough on page 276. 14 About Motorola Netopia Documentation NOTE:
This guide describes the wide variety of features and functionality of the Motorola Netopia Gateway, when used in Router mode. The Motorola Netopia Gateway may also be delivered in Bridge mode. In Bridge mode, the Gateway acts as a pass-through device and allows the work-
stations on your LAN to have public addresses directly on the Internet. Motorola, Inc. provides a suite of technical information for its 2200-, 3300- and 7000-series family of intel-
ligent enterprise and consumer Gateways. It consists of:
Administrators Handbook Dedicated Quickstart guides Specic White Papers The documents are available in electronic form as Portable Document Format (PDF) les. They are viewed
(and printed) from Adobe Acrobat Reader, Exchange, or any other application that supports PDF les. They are downloadable from Motorolas Netopia website:
http://www.netopia.com/
Intended Audience This guide is targeted primarily to residential service subscribers. Expert Mode sections may also be of use to the support staffs of broadband service providers and advanced residential service subscribers. See Expert Mode on page 39. Documentation Conventions General This manual uses the following conventions to present information:
Convention (Typeface) bold italic monospaced bold italic sans serif Description Menu commands Web GUI page links and button names 15 Administrators Handbook terminal bold terminal Italic Computer display text User-entered text Italic type indicates the complete titles of manuals. Internal Web Interface Convention (Graphics) blue rectangle or line solid rounded rectangle with an arrow Command Line Interface Description Denotes an excerpt from a Web page or the visual truncation of a Web page Denotes an area of emphasis on a Web page Syntax conventions for the Netopia Gateway command line interface are as follows:
Convention straight ([ ]) brackets in cmd line curly ({ }) brackets, with values sep-
arated with vertical bars (|). bold terminal type face italic terminal type face Description Optional command arguments Alternative values for an argument are presented in curly ({ }) brackets, with values separated with vertical bars (|). User-entered text Variables for which you supply your own values 16 Organization This guide consists of nine chapters, including a glossary, and an index. It is organized as follows:
Chapter 1, Introduction Describes the Motorola Netopia document suite, the purpose of, the audience for, and structure of this guide. It gives a table of conventions. Chapter 2, Basic Mode Setup Describes how to get up and running with your Motorola Netopia Gateway. Chapter 3, Expert Mode Focuses on the Expert Mode Web-based user interface for advanced users. It is organized in the same way as the Web UI is organized. As you go through each section, func-
tions and procedures are discussed in detail. Chapter 4, Basic Troubleshooting Gives some simple suggestions for troubleshooting problems with your Gateways initial conguration. Chapter 5, Advanced Troubleshooting Gives suggestions and descriptions of expert tools to use to troubleshoot your Gateways conguration. Chapter 6, Command Line Interface Describes all the current text-based commands for both the SHELL and CONFIG modes. A summary table and individual command examples for each mode is pro-
vided. Chapter 7, Glossary Chapter 8, Technical Specications and Safety Information Chapter 9, Overview of Major Capabilities Presents a product description summary. Index A Word About Example Screens This manual contains many example screen illustrations. Since Motorola Netopia 2200-, 3300- and 7000-Series Gateways offer a wide variety of features and functionality, the example screens shown may not appear exactly the same for your particular Gateway or setup as they appear in this manual. The exam-
ple screens are for illustrative and explanatory purposes, and should not be construed to represent your own unique environment. 17 Administrators Handbook 18 CHAPTER 2 Basic Mode Setup Most users will nd that the basic Quickstart conguration is all that they ever need to use. This section may be all that you ever need to congure and use your Motorola Netopia Gateway. The following instruc-
tions cover installation in Router Mode. This section covers:
Important Safety Instructions on page 20 Wichtige Sicherheitshinweise on page 21 (German) Setting up the Motorola Netopia Gateway on page 22 Conguring the Motorola Netopia Gateway on page 25 Motorola Netopia Gateway Status Indicator Lights on page 30 Home Page - Basic Mode on page 31 19 Administrators Handbook Important Safety Instructions POWER SUPPLY INSTALLATION Connect the power supply cord to the power jack on the Motorola Netopia Gateway. Plug the power supply into an appropriate electrical outlet. CAUTION:
Depending on the power supply provided with the product, either the direct plug-in power sup-
ply blades, power supply cord plug or the appliance coupler serves as the mains power discon-
nect. It is important that the direct plug-in power supply, socket-outlet or appliance coupler be located so it is readily accessible.
(Sweden) Apparaten skall anslutas till jordat uttag nr den ansluts till ett ntverk
(Norway) Apparatet m kun tilkoples jordet stikkontakt. USB-powered models: For Use with Listed I.T.E. Only TELECOMMUNICATION INSTALLATION When using your telephone equipment, basic safety precautions should always be followed to reduce the risk of re, electric shock and injury to persons, including the following:
Do not use this product near water, for example, near a bathtub, wash bowl, kitchen sink or laundry tub, in a wet basement or near a swimming pool. Avoid using a telephone (other than a cordless type) during an electrical storm. There may be a remote risk of electrical shock from lightning. Do not use the telephone to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak. PRODUCT VENTILATION The Motorola Netopia Gateway is intended for use in a consumer's home. Ambient temperatures around this product should not exceed 104F (40C). It should not be used in locations exposed to outside heat radiation or trapping of its own heat. The product should have at least one inch of clearance on all sides except the bottom when properly installed and should not be placed inside tightly enclosed spaces unless proper ventilation is provided. SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS 20 Wichtige Sicherheitshinweise NETZTEIL INSTALLIEREN Verbinden Sie das Kabel vom Netzteil mit dem Power-Anschluss an dem Motorola Netopia Gateway. Stecken Sie dann das Netzteil in eine Netzsteckdose. Achtung:
Abhngig von dem mit dem Produkt gelieferten Netzteil, entweder die direkten Stecker-
netzgerte, Stecker vom Netzkabel oder der Gertekoppler dienen als Hauptspannungsunter-
brechung. Es ist wichtig, dass das Steckernetzgert, Steckdose oder Gertekoppler frei zugnglich sind.
(Sweden) Apparaten skall anslutas till jordat uttag nr den ansluts till ett ntverk
(Norway) Apparatet m kun tilkoples jordet stikkontakt. USB-powered models: For Use with Listed I.T.E. Only INSTALLATION DER TELEKOMMUNIKATION Wenn Ihre Telefonausrstung verwendet wird, sollten grundlegende Sicherheitsanweisungen immer befolgt werden, um die Gefahr eines Feuers, eines elektrischen Schlages und die Verletzung von Personen, zu ver-
ringern. Beachten Sie diese weiteren Hinweise:
Benutzen Sie dieses Produkt nicht in Wassernhe wie z.B. nahe einer Badewanne, Waschschssel, Kchensple, in einem nassen Keller oder an einem Swimmingpool. Vermeiden Sie das Telefonieren (gilt nicht fr schnurlose Telefone) whrend eines Gewitters. Es besteht die Gefahr eines elektrischen Schlages durch einen Blitz. Nicht das Telefon benutzen um eine Gasleckstelle zu Melden, wenn Sie sich in der Nhe der Leckstelle benden. Bewahren Sie diese Anweisungen auf 21 Administrators Handbook Setting up the Motorola Netopia Gateway Refer to your Quickstart Guide for instructions on how to connect your Motorola Netopia gateway to your power source, PC or local area network, and your Internet access point, whether it is a dedicated DSL outlet or a DSL or cable modem. Different Motorola Netopia Gateway models are supplied for any of these con-
nections. Be sure to enable Dynamic Addressing on your PC. Perform the following:
Microsoft Windows:
Step 1. Navigate to the TCP/IP Properties Control Panel. a. Some Windows versions follow a path like this:
Start menu -> Settings ->
Control Panel -> Network
(or Network and Dial-up Connections -> Local Area Connection -> Properties) -
> TCP/IP
[your_network_card] or Internet Protocol [TCP/IP]
-> Properties b. Some Windows versions follow a path like this:
Start menu -> Con-
trol Panel -> Net-
work and Internet Connections -> Net-
work Connections ->
Local Area Connec-
tion -> Properties ->
Internet Protocol
[TCP/IP] -> Proper-
ties 22 c. Windows Vista is set to obtain an IP address automatically by default. You may not need to congure it at all. To check, open the Networking Control Panel and select Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4). Click the Properties button. The Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Properties window should appear as shown. If not, select the radio buttons shown above, and click the OK button. 23 Administrators Handbook Macintosh MacOS 8 or higher or Mac OS X:
Step 1. Access the TCP/IP or Network control panel. a. MacOS follows a path like this:
Apple Menu ->
Control Pan-
els -> TCP/IP Control Panel b. Mac OS X follows a path like this:
Apple Menu -> System Preferences -> Network Then go to Step 2. Step 2. Select Built-in Ethernet Step 3. Select Congure Using DHCP Step 4. Close and Save, if prompted. Proceed to Conguring the Motorola Netopia Gateway on page 25. 24 Conguring the Motorola Netopia Gateway 1. Run your Web browser application, such as Firefox or Microsoft Internet Explorer, from the computer connected to the Motorola Netopia Gateway. Enter http://192.168.1.254 in the Location text box. The Admin Password page appears. Access to your Motorola Netopia device can be controlled through two access control accounts, Admin or User. The Admin, or administrative user, performs all conguration, management or maintenance operations on the Gateway. The User account provides monitor capability only. A user may NOT change the conguration, perform upgrades or invoke maintenance functions. For the security of your connection, an Admin password must be set on the Motorola Netopia unit. MiAVo VDSL and Ethernet WAN models Quickstart The browser then displays the Quickstart page. 2. Click the Connect to the Internet button. 25 Administrators Handbook Once a connection is established, your browser is redirected to your service providers home page or a registration page on the Internet. NOTE:
For MiAVo Series (3397GP) models, skip the rest of this section. Congratulations! Your conguration is complete. You can skip to Home Page - Basic Mode on page 31. 26 PPPoE Quickstart For a PPPoE connection, your browser will display a different series of web pages:
The browser then displays the Quickstart web page. 3. Enter the username and password supplied by your Internet Service Provider. Click the Connect to the Internet button. Once you enter your username and password here, you will no longer need to enter them whenever you access the Internet. The Motorola Netopia Gateway stores this information and automatically connects you to the Internet. The Gateway displays a message while it congures itself. 4. When the connection succeeds, your browser will display a success message. Once a connection is established, your browser is redirected to your service providers home page or a registration page on the Internet. 5. Congratulations! Your installation is complete. You can now surf to your favorite Web sites by typing an URL in your browsers location box or by selecting one of your favor-
ite Internet bookmarks. 27 Administrators Handbook Set up the Motorola Netopia Pocket Gateway Your Motorola Netopia 3342N/3352N Pocket Gateway comes with its own installation wizard. If you are using Windows 98, insert the CD. If you are using Windows XP, Windows 2000, Windows NT or Windows Vista, you dont even need the CD. Follow these easy setup steps:
1. Plug the Motorola Netopia Pocket Gateway into a USB port on your PC. 2. Whether you use the CD (Windows 98) or not (all other Windows versions), on Windows-based PCs, the Motorola Netopia Installation Wizard will launch automatically. The Motorola Netopia Installation Wizard will assist you to congure your PC to work with the Motorola Netopia pocket Gateway. Follow the on-screen instructions. To proceed, click the Next button. The Motorola Netopia Installation Wizard performs a series of checks on your system and then will install USB drivers for your connection. 3. Place the Motorola Netopia Pocket Gateway near your PC so you can see it easily. Make sure any cables are kept away from power cords, uorescent lighting xtures, and other sources of electrical interference. 4. When the wizard prompts you, connect the RJ-11 Telephone Cable from the DSL port on the Motorola Netopia Pocket Gateway to the ADSL phone jack. The DSL indicator light should blink for up to two minutes and then come on solid green once the device is connected to your computer. phone jack USB port Netopia Pocket Gateway/
RJ-11 phone cable 28 The Wizard displays a success message when the settings are congured. 5. The Motorola Netopia Installation Wizard will then launch your web browser and display the Welcome page where you congure your Motorola Netopia Pocket Gateway. 29 Administrators Handbook Motorola Netopia Gateway Status Indicator Lights Colored LEDs on your Motorola Netopia Gateway indicate the status of various port activity. Different Gateway models have different ports for your connections and different indicator LEDs. The Quickstart Guide accompanying your Motorola Netopia Gateway describes the behavior of the various indicator LEDs. Example status indicator lights Status Indicator Lights (LEDs) pia eto n 30 Home Page - Basic Mode After you have performed the basic Quickstart conguration, any time you log in to your Motorola Netopia Gateway you will access the Motorola Netopia Gateway Home Page. You access the Home Page by typing http://192.168.1.254 in your Web browsers location box. The Basic Mode Home Page appears. VoIP-enabled Gateways also display VoIP phone information, as well. 31 Administrators Handbook The Home Page displays the following information in the center section:
Item Description Serial Number This is the unique serial number of your Gateway. Software Release Warranty Date Status of DSL Status of Connection Local WAN IP Address Remote Gateway Address Primary DNS Secondary DNS ISP Username Ethernet Status USB Status Line 1/2 Registration Date & Time This is the version number of the current embedded software in your Gate-
way. This is the date that your Gateway was installed and enabled. DSL connection (Internet) is either Up or Down Waiting for DSL is displayed while the Gateway is training. This should change to Up within two minutes. Up is displayed when the ADSL line is synched and the PPPoE session is established. Down indicates inability to establish a connection; possible line failure. This is the negotiated address of the Gateways WAN interface. This address is usually dynamically assigned. This is the negotiated address of the remote router to which this Gateway is connected. These are the negotiated DNS addresses. This is your PPPoE username as assigned by your service provider.
(if so equipped) Local Area Network (Ethernet) is either Up or Down If your Gateway is so equipped, Local Area Network (USB) is either Up or Down If your Gateway is so equipped, voice Line 1 and/or 2 is either Idle or Con-
nected This is the current UTC time; blank if this is not available due to lack of a network connection. The links in the left-hand column on this page allow you to manage or congure several features of your Gateway. Each link is described in its own section. 32 Link: Manage My Account You can change your ISP account information for the Motorola Netopia Gateway. You can also manage other aspects of your account on your service providers account management Web site. Click on the Manage My Account link. The Manage My Account page appears. If you have a PPPoE account, enter your username, and then your new password. Conrm your new pass-
word. For security, your actual passwords are not displayed on the screen as you type. You must enter the new password twice to be sure you have typed it correctly. Click the Submit button. If you have a non-PPPoE account, click the OK button. You will be taken to your service providers Web site account management page. 33 Administrators Handbook Link: Status Details If you need to diagnose any problems with your Motorola Netopia Gateway or its connection to the Inter-
net, you can run a sophisticated diagnostic tool. It checks several aspects of your physical and electronic connection and reports its results on-screen. This can be useful for troubleshooting, or when speaking with a technical support technician. Click on the Status Details link. The Diagnostics page appears. Click the Run Diagnostics button to run your diagnostic tests. For a detailed description of these tests, see Diagnostics on page 217. 34 Link: Enable Remote Management This link allows you to authorize a remotely-located person, such as a support technician, to directly access your Motorola Netopia Gateway. This is useful for xing conguration problems when you need expert help. You can limit the amount of time such a person will have access to your Gateway. This will prevent unauthorized individuals from gaining access after the time limit has expired. Click the Enable Rmt Mgmt link. The Enable Remote Management page appears. Since youve already has entered an Admin password, you can use that Admin password or enter a new password. If you enter a new password, it becomes the temporary Admin password. After the time-out period has expired, the Admin password reverts to the original Admin password you entered. Enter a temporary password for the person you want to authorize, and conrm it by typing it again. You can select a time-out period for this password, from 5 to 30 minutes, from the pull-down menu. Be sure to tell the authorized person what the password is, and for how long the time-out is set. Click the OK button. 35 Administrators Handbook Link: Expert Mode Most users will nd that the basic Quickstart conguration is all that they ever need to use. Some users, however, may want to do more advanced conguration. The Motorola Netopia Gateway has many advanced features that can be accessed and congured through the Expert Mode pages. Click the Expert Mode link to display the Expert Mode Conrmation page. You should carefully consider any conguration changes you want to make, and be sure that your service provider supports them. Once you click the OK button you will be taken to the Expert Mode Home Page. The Expert Mode Home Page is the main access point for conguring and managing the advanced features of your Gateway. See Expert Mode on page 39 for information. 36 Link: Update Firmware NOTE:
(This link is not available on the 3342/3352 models, since rmware updates must be upgraded via the USB host driver. 3342N/3352N models do support this feature.) Periodically, the embedded rmware in your Gateway may be updated to improve the operation or add new features. Your gateway includes its own onboard installation capability. Your service provider may inform you when new rmware is available, or you can check for yourself. Click the Update Firmware link. The Firmware Update Conrmation page appears. If you click the Continue button, the Gateway will check a remote Firmware Server for the latest rmware revision. If a newer version is found, your rmware will be automatically updated once you conrm the installation. 37 Administrators Handbook Link: Factory Reset In some cases, you may need to clear all the conguration settings and start over again to program the Motorola Netopia Gateway. You can perform a factory reset to do this. Click on Factory Reset to reset the Gateway back to its original factory default settings. NOTE:
Exercise caution before performing a Factory Reset. This will erase any conguration changes that you may have made and allow you to reprogram your Gateway. 38 CHAPTER 3 Expert Mode Using the Expert Mode Web-based user interface for the Motorola Netopia 2200-, 3300- and 7000-series Gateway you can congure, troubleshoot, and monitor the status of your Gateway. Accessing the Expert Web Interface Open the Web Connection Once your Gateway is powered up, you can use any recent version of the best-known web browsers such as Netscape Navigator or Microsoft Internet Explorer from any LAN-attached PC or workstation. The procedure is:
1. Enter the name or IP address of your Motorola Netopia Gateway in the Web browser's window and press Return. For example, you would enter http://192.168.1.254. If an administrator or user password has been assigned to the Motorola Netopia Gate-
way, enter Admin or User as the username and the appropriate password and click OK. The Basic Mode Home Page opens. 2. 3. Click on the Expert Mode link in the left-hand column of links. 39 Administrators Handbook You are challenged to conrm your choice. Click OK. The Home Page opens in Expert Mode. 40 Home Page - Expert Mode The Home Page is the summary page for your Motorola Netopia Gateway. The toolbar at the top provides links to controlling, conguring, and monitoring pages. Critical conguration and operational status is dis-
played in the center section. Home Page - Information The Home pages center section contains a summary of the Gateways conguration settings and opera-
tional status. Field Status and/or Description Summary Information Hardware Serial Number Software Version Product ID Date & Time Breakwater Firewall Safe Harbour General Information Model number and summary specication Unique serial number, located on label attached to bottom of unit Release and build number of running Motorola Netopia Operating System. Refers to internal circuit board series; useful in determining which software upgrade applies to your hardware type. This is the current UTC time; blank if this is not available due to lack of a network connection. If the optional feature key is installed: Status of the Breakwater Firewall:
ClearSailing, SilentRunning, or LANdLocked. If the optional feature key is installed: SafeHarbour VPN IPsec Tunnel option
(if installed): either On or Off. WAN 41 Administrators Handbook Status Data Rate (Kbps) Local Address Peer Address Connection Type NAT WAN Users IP Address Netmask DHCP Server DHCP Leases Ethernet (or USB) Status Wide Area Network may be Waiting for DSL (or other waiting status), Up or Down Once connected, displays DSL speed rate, Downstream and Upstream IP address assigned to the WAN port. The IP address of the gateway to which the connection defaults. If doing DHCP, this info will be acquired. If doing PPP, this info will be negotiated. May be either Instant On or Always On. On or Off. ON if using Network Address Translation to share the IP address across many LAN users. Displays the number of users allotted and the total number available for use. LAN Internal IP address of the Motorola Netopia Gateway. Denes the IP subnet for the LAN Default is 255.255.255.0 for a Class C device On or Off. ON if using DHCP to get IP addresses for your LAN client machines. A lease is held by each LAN client that has obtained an IP address through DHCP. Status of your Ethernet network connection (if supported). Up or Down. Line 1/2 Registration If your Gateway is so equipped, voice Line 1 and/or 2 is either Idle or Reg-
istered VoIP 42 Toolbar The toolbar is the dark blue bar at the top of the page containing the major navigation buttons. These but-
tons are available from almost every page, allowing you to move freely about the site. Install Restart Help Install Certicate Install Key Install Software Security Passwords Firewall IPSec Stateful Inspection Packet Filter Security Log Home Congure Troubleshoot Quickstart LAN WAN Advanced System Status Network Tools Diagnostics Navigating the Web Interface Link: Breadcrumb Trail The breadcrumb trail is built in the light brown area beneath the toolbar. As you navigate down a path within the site, the trail is built from left to right. To return anywhere along the path from which you came, click on one of the links. 43 Administrators Handbook Restart Button: Restart The Restart button on the toolbar allows you to restart the Gateway at any time. You will be prompted to conrm the restart before any action is taken. The Restart Conrmation message explains the conse-
quences of and reasons for restarting the Gateway. 44 Link: Alert Symbol The Alert symbol appears in the upper right corner if you make a database change; one in which a change is made to the Gateways conguration. The Alert serves as a reminder that you must Save the changes and Restart the Gateway before the change will take effect. You can make many changes on various pages, and even leave the browser for up to 5 minutes, but if the Gateway is restarted before the changes are applied, they will be lost. When you click on the Alert symbol, the Save Changes page appears. Here you can select various options to save or discard these changes. If more than one Alert is triggered, you will need to take action to clear the rst Alert before you can see the second Alert. 45 Administrators Handbook Help Button: Help Context-sensitive Help is provided in your Gateway. The page shown here is displayed when you are on the Home page or other transitional pages. To see a context help page example, go to Security -> Pass-
words, then click Help. 46 Congure Button: Congure The Conguration options are presented in the order of likelihood you will need to use them. Quickstart is typically accessed during the hardware installation and initial conguration phase. Often, these settings should be changed only in accordance with information from your Service Provider. LAN and WAN settings are available to ne-tune your system. Advanced provides some special capabilities typically used for gaming or small ofce environments, or where LAN-side servers are involved. This button will not be available if you log on as User. Link: Quickstart How to Use the Quickstart Page. Quickstart is normally used immediately after the new hardware is installed. When you are rst conguring your Gateway, Quickstart appears rst.
(Once you have congured your Gateway, logging on displays the Home page. Thereafter, if you need to use Quickstart, choose it from the Expert Mode Congure menu.) Setup Your Gateway using a PPP Connection. This example screen is the for a PPP Quickstart conguration. Your gateway authenticates with the Ser-
vice Provider equipment using the ISP Username and Password. These values are given to you by your Ser-
vice Provider. 1. Enter your ISP Username and ISP Password. 2. Click Connect to the Internet. 47 Administrators Handbook A brief message is displayed while the Gateway attempts to establish a connection. 3. When the connection succeeds, your browser will display your Service Providers home page. If you encounter any problems connecting, refer to the chapters Basic Troubleshooting on page 193 or Advanced Troubleshooting on page 207. 48 Link: LAN
* Enable Interface: Enables all LAN-connected computers to share resources and to connect to the WAN. The Interface should always be enabled unless you are instructed to disable it by your Service Provider dur-
ing troubleshooting.
* IP Address: The LAN IP Address of the Gateway. The IP Address you assign to your LAN interface must not be used by another device on your LAN network.
* IP Netmask: Species the subnet mask for the TCP/IP network connected to the virtual circuit. The sub-
net mask species which bits of the 32-bit binary IP address represent network information. The default subnet mask for most networks is 255.255.255.0 (Class C subnet mask.)
* Restrictions: Species whether an administrator can open a Web Administrator or Telnet connection to the Gateway over the LAN interface in order to monitor and congure the Gateway. On the LAN Interface, you can enable or disable administrator access. By default, administrative restrictions are turned off, meaning an administrator can open a Web Administrator or Telnet connection through the LAN Interface. Advanced: Clicking on the Advanced link displays the Advanced LAN IP Interface page. 49 Administrators Handbook IGMP Forwarding: The default setting is Disabled. If you check this option, it will enable Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) multicast forwarding. IGMP allows a router to determine which host groups have members on a given network segment. See IGMP (Internet Group Management Protocol) on page 100 for more information. RIP Send Mode: Species whether the gateway should use Routing Information Protocol (RIP) broad-
casts to advertise its routing tables to other routers on your network. You may choose from the following protocols:
RIP-1: Routing Information Protocol version 1 RIP-2: RIP Version 2 is an extension of the original Routing Information Protocol (RIP-1) that expands the amount of useful information in the RIP packets. While RIP-1 and RIP-2 share the same basic algo-
rithms, RIP-2 supports several new features, including inclusion of subnet masks in RIP packets and implementation of multicasting instead of broadcasting (which reduces the load on hosts which do not support routing protocols. RIP-1 compatibility: Compatible with RIP version 1 RIP-2 with MD5: MD5 authentication is an extension of RIP-2 that increases security by requiring an authentication key when routes are advertised. RIP MD5 Key: Secret password when using RIP-2 with MD5. RIP Receive Mode: Species whether the Gateway should use Routing Information Protocol (RIP) broadcasts to update its routing tables with information received from other routers on your network. The protocol choices are the same as for the RIP send mode. Proxy ARP: Species whether you want the Gateway to respond when it receives an address resolution protocol for devices behind it. This is a way to make a computer that is physically located on one net-
work appear to be part of a different physical network connected to the same Gateway. It allows you to hide a computer with a public IP address on a private network behind your Gateway, and still have the computer appear to be on the public network in front of the Gateway. Static Client Address Translation: If you check this checkbox, this feature allows a statically addressed computer whose IP address falls outside of the LAN subnet(s) to simply plug in and get online without any manual conguration on either the host or the Motorola Netopia Gateway. If enabled, statically addressed LAN hosts that have an address outside of LAN subnets will be able to communicate via the Routers WAN interface to the Internet. Supported static IP address values must fall outside of the Router's LAN subnet(s). IP Subnets: The IP Subnets screen allows you to congure up to seven secondary subnets and their DHCP ranges, by entering IP address/subnet mask pairs:
50 Note:
You need not use this screen if you have only a single Ethernet IP subnet. This screen displays seven rows of editable columns. All seven row labels are always visible, regardless of the number of subnets congured. To add an IP subnet, select one of the rows, and click the Edit button. Check the Enabled checkbox and click the Submit button. The screen expands to allow you to enter subnet information. If DHCP Server (see below) is not enabled, the DHCP Start Address and DHCP End Address elds do not appear. Enter the Routers IP address on the subnet in the IP Address eld and the subnet mask for the subnet in the Netmask eld. Enter the DHCP Start Address and End Address of the subnet range in their respective elds. Ranges cannot overlap and there may be only one range per subnet. Click the Submit button. When you are nished adding subnets, click the Alert icon at the upper right, and in the resulting page, click the Save and Restart link. To delete a congured subnet, set both the IP address and subnet mask values to 0.0.0.0, either explicitly or by clearing each eld and clicking the Submit button to commit the change. NOTE:
All additional DHCP ranges use the global lease period value. See page 52. 51 Administrators Handbook DHCP Server: Your Gateway can provide network conguration information to computers on your LAN, using the Dynamic Host Conguration Protocol (DHCP). If you already have a DHCP server on your LAN, you should turn this service off. If you want the Gateway to provide this service, click the Server Mode pull-down menu, choose Server, then con-
gure the range of IP addresses that you would like the Gateway to hand out to your computers. You can also specify the length of time the computers can use the conguration information; DHCP calls this period the lease time. Your Service Provider may, for certain services, want to provide conguration from its DHCP servers to the computers on your LANs. In this case, the Gateway will relay the DHCP requests from your computers to a DHCP server in the Service Provider's network. Click the relay-agent and enter the IP address of the Service Provider's DHCP server in the Server Address eld. This address is furnished by the Service Provider. NOTE:
The Relay-agent option only works when NAT is off and the Gateway is in router mode. 52 Wireless
(supported models) If your Gateway is a wireless model (such as a 3347W) you can enable or disable the wireless LAN (WLAN) by clicking the Wireless link. Wireless functionality is enabled by default. If you uncheck the Enable Wireless checkbox, the Wireless Options are disabled, and the Gateway will not provide or broadcast any wireless LAN services. SSID (Network ID): The SSID is preset to a number that is unique to your unit. You can either leave it as is, or change it by entering a freeform name of up to 32 characters, for example Eds Wireless LAN. On client PCs software, this might also be called the Network Name. The SSID is used to identify this particular wire-
less LAN. Depending on their operating system or client wireless card, users must either:
select from a list of available wireless LANs that appear in a scanned list on their client or, if you are in Closed System Mode (see Enable Closed System Mode below), enter this name on their clients in order to join this wireless LAN. The pull-down menu for enabling Privacy offers four settings: WPA-802.1x, WPA-PSK, WEP - Automatic, and Off - No Privacy. WEP-Manual is also available on the Advanced Conguration Options page. See Pri-
vacy on page 54. NOTE:
On the 2200-Series Gateways, WEP-Manual privacy is enabled by default. Use the Motorola Netopia Installation Wizard on the accompanying Motorola Netopia CD to generate WEP keys for connecting wireless client computers. 53 Administrators Handbook Privacy Off - No Privacy provides no encryption on your wireless LAN data. WPA-802.1x provides RADIUS server authentication support. WPA-PSK provides Wireless Protected Access, the most secure option for your wireless network. This mechanism provides the best data protection and access control. The Pre Shared Key is a passphrase shared between the Router and the clients and is used to gener-
ate dynamically changing keys. The passphrase can be 8-63 characters or up to 64 hex characters. It is recommended to use at least 20 characters for best security. WEP - Automatic is a passphrase generator. You enter a passphrase that you choose in the Pass-
phrase eld. The passphrase can be any string of words or numbers. You can provide a level of data security by enabling WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) for encryption of net-
work data. You can enable 40-, 128-, or 256-bit WEP Encryption (depending on the capability of your cli-
ent wireless card) for IP trafc on your LAN. 54 You select a single key for encryption of outbound trafc. The WEP-enabled client must have an identical key of the same length, in the identical slot (1 4) as the Gateway, in order to successfully receive and decrypt the trafc. Similarly, the client also has a default key that it uses to encrypt its transmissions. In order for the Gateway to receive the clients data, it must likewise have the identical key of the same length, in the same slot. For simplicity, a Gateway and its clients need only enter, share, and use the rst key. Click the Submit button. The Alert icon appears. Click the Alert icon, and then the Save and Restart link. 55 Administrators Handbook Advanced If you click the Advanced link, the advanced 802.11 Wireless Settings page appears. Note: This page displays different options depending on which form of Privacy or other options you have enabled. You can then congure:
Operating Mode: The pull-down menu allows you to select and lock the Gateway into the wireless trans-
mission mode you want. For compatibility with clients using 802.11b (up to 11 Mbps transmission) and 802.11g (up to 20+ Mbps), select Normal (802.11b + g). To limit your wireless LAN to one mode or the other, select 802.11b Only, or 802.11g Only. NOTE:
If you choose to limit the operating mode to 802.11b or 802.11g only, clients using the mode you excluded will not be able to connect. Default Channel: on which the network will broadcast. This is a frequency range within the 2.4Ghz band. Channel selection depends on government regulated radio frequencies that vary from region to region. The widest range available is from 1 to 14. However, in North America only 1 to 11 may be selected. Europe, 56 France, Spain and Japan will differ. Channel selection can have a signicant impact on performance, depending on other wireless activity close to this Gateway. Channel selection is not necessary at the client computers; the clients will scan the available channels seeking access points using the same SSID as the client. AutoChannel Setting: For 802.11G models, AutoChannel is a feature that allows the Motorola Netopia Gateway to determine the best channel to broadcast automatically. Three settings are available from the pull-down menu: Off-Use default, At Startup, and Continuous. Off-Use default is the default setting; the Motorola Netopia Gateway will use the congured default channel selected from the previous pull-down menu. At Startup causes the Motorola Netopia Gateway at startup to briey initialize on the default channel, then perform a full two- to three-second scan, and switch to the best channel it can nd, remaining on that channel until the next reboot. Continuous performs the at-startup scan, and will continuously monitor the current channel for any other Access Point beacons. If an Access Point beacon is detected on the same channel, the Motorola Netopia Gateway will initiate a three- to four-minute scan of the channels, locate a better one, and switch. Once it has switched, it will remain on this channel for at least 30 minutes before switching again if another Access Point is detected. Enable Closed System Mode: If enabled, Closed System Mode hides the wireless network from the scan-
ning features of wireless client computers. Unless both the wireless clients and the Router share the same SSID in Closed System mode, the Routers wireless LAN will not appear as an available network when scanned for by wireless-enabled computers. Members of the Closed System WLAN must log onto the Routers wireless network with the identical SSID as that congured in the router. Closed System mode is an ideal way to increase wireless security and to prevent casual detection by unwanted neighbors, ofce users, or malicious users such as hackers. If you do not enable Closed System Mode, it is more convenient, but potentially less secure, for clients to access your WLAN by scanning available access points. You must decide based on your own network requirements. About Closed System Mode Enabling Closed System Mode on your wireless Gateway provides another level of security, since your wire-
less LAN will no longer appear as an available access point to client PCs that are casually scanning for one. Your own wireless network clients, however, must log into the wireless LAN by using the exact SSID of the Motorola Netopia Gateway. In addition, if you have enabled WEP encryption on the Motorola Netopia Gateway, your network clients must also have WEP encryption enabled, and must have the same WEP encryption key as the Motorola Netopia Gateway. Once the Motorola Netopia Gateway is located by a client computer, by setting the client to a matching SSID, the client can connect immediately if WEP is not enabled. If WEP is enabled then the client must also have WEP enabled and a matching WEP key. Wireless client cards from different manufacturers and different operating systems accomplish connecting to a wireless LAN and enabling WEP in a variety of ways. Consult the documentation for your particular wire-
less card and/or operating system. 57 Administrators Handbook NOTE:
While clients may also have a passphrase feature, these are vendor-specic and may not nec-
essarily create the same keys. You can passphrase generate a set of keys on one, and manu-
ally enter them on the other to get around this. Block Wireless Bridging: Check the checkbox to block wireless clients from communicating with other wireless clients on the LAN side of the Gateway. WEP - Manual allows you to enter your own encryption keys manually. This is a difcult process, but only needs to be done once. Avoid the temptation to enter all the same characters. Encryption Key Size #1 #4: Selects the length of each encryption key. The longer the key, the stronger the encryption and the more difcult it is to break the encryption. 58 Encryption Key #1 #4: The encryption keys. You enter keys using hexadecimal digits. For 40/64bit encryption, you need ten digits; 26 digits for 128bit, and 58 digits for 256bit WEP. Hexadecimal characters are 0 9, and a f. Examples:
40bit: 02468ACE02 128bit: 0123456789ABCDEF0123456789 256bit: 592CA140F0A238B0C61AE162F592CA140F0A238B0C61AE162F21A09C Use WEP encryption key (1 4) #: Species which key the Gateway will use to encrypt transmitted trafc. The default is key #1. You disable the wireless LAN by unchecking the Enable Wireless checkbox, clicking the Submit button, fol-
lowed by the Save and Restart link. WPA Version Allowed If you select either WPA-802.1x or WPA-PSK as your privacy setting, the WPA Version Allowed pull-down menu appears to allow you to select the WPA version(s) that will be required for client connections. Choices are:
WPA Version 1 and 2, for maximum interoperability, WPA Version 1 Only, for backward compatibility, WPA Version 2 Only, for maximum security. All clients must support the version(s) selected in order to successfully connect. Multiple SSIDs The Multiple Wireless SSIDs feature allows you to add additional network identiers (SSIDs or Network Names) for your wireless network. To enable Multiple Wireless SSIDs, click the Multiple SSIDs link. When the Multiple Wireless SSIDs screen appears, check the Enable SSID checkbox for each SSID you want to enable. 59 Administrators Handbook The screen expands to allow you to name each additional Wireless ID, and specify a Privacy mode for each one. 60 Privacy modes available from the pull-down menu for the multiple SSIDs are: WPA-PSK, WPA-802.1x, or Off-No Privacy. WEP can also be selected on the additional SSIDs as long as it is not used on the primary SSID. WEP can only be used on one SSID, so any others will not have WEP available. These additional Wireless IDs are Closed System Mode Wireless IDs that will not be shown by a client scan, and therefore must be manually congured at the client. In addition, wireless bridging between clients is disabled for all members of these additional network IDs. Click the Submit button. After your rst entry, the Alert icon nished adding SSIDs, click the Alert icon, and Save your changes and restart the Gateway. will appear in the upper right corner of your screen. When you are 61 Administrators Handbook WiFi Multimedia WiFi Multimedia is an advanced feature that allows you to prioritize various types of data travelling over the wireless network. Certain types of data that are sensitive to delays, such as voice or video, must be priori-
tized ahead of other, less delay-sensitive types, such as email. WiFi Multimedia currently implements wireless Quality of Service (QoS) by transmitting data depending on Diffserv priority settings. These priorities are mapped into four Access Categories (AC), in increasing order of priority:
Background (BK), Best Effort (BE), Video (VI), and Voice (VO). It requires WiFi Multimedia (WMM)-capable clients, usually a separate feature enabled at the client network settings, and client PC software that makes use of Differentiated Services (Diffserv). Refer to your operat-
ing system instructions for enabling Diffserv QoS.. When you click the WiFi Multimedia link the WiFi Multimedia page appears. To enable the WiFi Multimedia custom settings, select Diffserv from the pull-down menu. 62 The screen expands. Router EDCA Parameters (Enhanced Distributed Channel Access) govern wireless data from your Gate-
way to the client; Client EDCA Parameters govern wireless data from the client to your Gateway. NOTE:
It is not recommended that you modify these settings without direct knowledge or instructions to do so. Modifying these settings inappropriately could seriously degrade network perfor-
mance. AIFs: (Arbitration Interframe Spacing) the wait time in milliseconds for data frames. cwMin: (Minimum Contention Window) upper limit in milliseconds of the range for determining initial ran-
dom backoff. The value you choose must be lower than cwMax. cwMax: (Maximum Contention Window) upper limit in milliseconds of the range of determining nal ran-
dom backoff. The value you choose must be higher than cwMin. TXOP Limit: Time interval in microseconds that clients may initiate transmissions.
(When Operating Mode is B-only, default values are used and this eld is not congurable.) Wireless MAC Authorization Wireless MAC Authorization allows you to specify which client PCs are allowed to join the wireless LAN by specic hardware address. Once it is enabled, only entered MAC addresses that have been set to Allow will 63 Administrators Handbook be accepted onto the wireless LAN. All unlisted addresses will be blocked, in addition to the listed addresses with Allow disabled. To enable Wireless MAC Authentication, click the MAC Authorization link. When the Wireless MAC Authentication screen appears, check the Enable Wireless MAC Authorization checkbox:
The screen expands as follows:
Click the Add button. The Authorized Wireless MAC Address Entry screen appears. Enter the MAC (hardware) address of the client PC you want to authorize for access to your wireless LAN. The Allow Access? checkbox is enabled by default. Unchecking this checkbox specically denies access from this MAC address. Click the Submit button. Note:
When MAC Authorization is enabled, all wireless clients are blocked until their MAC addresses 64 are added to the Authorized list. Your entry will be added to a list of up to 32 authorized addresses as shown:
You can continue to Add, Edit, or Delete addresses to the list by clicking the respective buttons. After your rst entry, the Alert icon will appear in the upper right corner of your screen. When you are nished adding addresses to the list, click the Alert icon, and Save your changes and restart the Gate-
way. Use RADIUS Server RADIUS servers allow external authentication of users by means of a remote authentication database. The remote authentication database is maintained by a Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service (RADIUS) server. In conjunction with Wireless User Authentication, you can use a RADIUS server database to authen-
ticate users seeking access to the wireless services, as well as the authorized user list maintained locally within the Gateway. If you click the RADIUS link, the screen expands to allow you to enter your RADIUS server information. 65 Administrators Handbook RADIUS Server Addr/Name: The default RADIUS server name or IP address that you want to use. RADIUS Server Secret: The RADIUS secret key used by this server. The shared secret should have the same characteristics as a normal password. RADIUS Server Port: The port on which the RADIUS server is listening, typically, the default 1812. Click the Submit button. You can also congure alternate RADIUS servers from the Advanced Network Conguration page, by clicking the Advanced link. The Advanced Network Conguration page appears. You access the RADIUS Server conguration screen from the Advanced Network Conguration web page, by clicking the RADIUS Server link. 66 Link: WAN When you click the WAN link, the WAN IP conguration page appears. This page varies depending on the WAN interface of your Motorola Netopia Gateway. WAN IP Interfaces: Your IP interfaces are listed. PPP over Ethernet interface Click the PPP over Ethernet link to congure it. The WAN IP Interface page appears. Enable Interface: You can disable the interface by unchecking the checkbox. However, doing so will dis-
able all ability for your LAN users to connect to the WAN using the Gateway. Address Mapping (NAT): Species whether you want the Gateway to use network address translation
(NAT) when communicating with remote routers. NAT lets you conceal details of your network from remote routers. By default, address mapping is enabled. 67 Administrators Handbook Restrictions: This setting determines the types of trafc the Gateway accepts from the WAN. Admin Dis-
abled means that Gateway trafc is accepted but administrative commands are ignored. None means that all trafc is accepted. When PPP is enabled, Admin Disabled is the default. DHCP/PPPoE/PPPoA Autosensing:
The pull-down menu allows you to select an autosens-
ing feature, or to disable it. Selecting between PPPoE/
DHCP or PPPoE/PPPoA enables automatic sensing of your WAN connection type. If you select PPPoE/
DHCP, the gateway attempts to connect using PPPoE rst. If the Gateway fails to connect after 60 seconds, it switches to DHCP. As soon as it can connect via DHCP, the Gateway chooses and sets DHCP as its default. Otherwise, after attempting to connect via DHCP for 60 seconds, the Gateway switches back to PPPoE. The Gateway will continue to switch back and forth in this manner until it successfully connects. Similarly, selecting PPPoE/PPPoA causes the Gateway to attempt to con-
nect by trying these protocols in parallel, and using the rst one that is successful. If you choose to disable the feature, select Off. ISP Username: This is the username used to authenticate your Gateway with the Service Provider's net-
work. This value is given to you by your Service Provider. ISP Password: This is the password used to authenticate your Gateway with the Service Provider's net-
work. This value is given to you by your Service Provider. Connection Type: The pull-down menu allows you to choose to have either an uninterrupted connection or an as-needed connection. Always On: This setting provides convenience, but it leaves your network permanently connected to the Internet. Instant On furnishes almost all the benets of an Always On connection, but has additional security benets:
- Your network cannot be attacked when it is not connected.
- Your network may change address with each connection, making it more difcult to attack. Timeout: (only appears if Instant-On Connection Type is selected) Species the time in seconds before dis-
connect if there is no trafc over the Internet link. 68 Advanced:
If you click the Advanced link, the Advanced WAN IP Interface conguration page appears. Local Address: If this value is 0.0.0.0, the Gateway will acquire its IP address from your ISP. Otherwise this address is assigned to the virtual PPP interface. Peer Address: Address of the server on the Service Provider side of the ppp link. This peer will attempt to negotiate the local IP address if IP Address =
0.0.0.0. If the remote peer does not accept the IP address, the link will not come up. RIP Receive Mode: Routing Information Protocol
(RIP) is needed if there are IP routers on other seg-
ments of your Ethernet network that the Motorola Netopia Gateway needs to recognize. Set to Off, Netopia Embedded Software Version 7.7.4 will not accept information from either RIP-1 nor RIP-2 rout-
ers. With Receive RIP Mode set to RIP-1, the Motor-
ola Netopia Gateway will accept routing information provided by RIP packets from other routers that use the same subnet mask. Set to RIP-2, Netopia Embedded Software Version 7.7.4 will accept routing information provided by RIP packets from other rout-
ers that use different subnet masks. From the pull-down menu, choose Off, RIP-1, RIP-2, RIP-1 compatibility, or RIP-2 with MD5. RIP Receive MD5 Key: (Only appears if RIP-2 with MD5 RIP Receive Mode is selected) The purpose of MD5 authentication is to provide an additional level of condence that a RIP packet received was generated by a reliable source. In other words, MD5 authentica-
tion provides an enhanced level of security that information that your PC receives does not originate from a malicious source posing as part of your network. This eld allows you to enter an MD5 encryption key of from 1 16 ASCII characters for authenticating RIP receipts. Multicast Forward: If you check this checkbox, this interface acts as an IGMP proxy host, and IGMP pack-
ets are transmitted and received on this interface on behalf of IGMP hosts on the LAN interface. IGMP Null Source Address: If you check this checkbox, the source IP address of every IGMP packet trans-
mitted from this interface is set to 0.0.0.0. This complies with the requirements of TR-101, and removes the need for a publicly advertised IP address on the WAN interface. This checkbox is only available if Mul-
ticast Forward is checked. 69 Administrators Handbook LCP Settings:
Authentication: Select Off, PAP and/or CHAP, PAP only, or CHAP only from the pull-down menu. The settings for port authentication on the Gateway must match the authentication expected by the remote sys-
tem. The username and passwords are available on the WAN IP Interfaces page. MRU: Species the Maximum Receive Unit for the PPP Interface. Magic Number: Enables or disables LCP magic number negotiation. Protocol Compression: Species whether you want the Gateway to compress the PPP Protocol eld when it transmits datagrams over the PPP link. LCP Echo Requests: Species whether you want your Gateway to send LCP echo requests. You should turn off LCP echoing if you do not want the Gateway to drop a PPP link to a nonresponsive peer. Max Failures: Species the maximum number of Congure-NAK messages the PPP module can send with-
out having sent a Congure-ACK message. Max Congures: Species the maximum number of unacknowledged conguration requests that your Gateway will send. Max Terminates: Species the maximum number of unacknowledged termination requests that your Gate-
way will send before terminating the PPP link. Restart Timer: The number of seconds the Gateway should wait before retransmitting a conguration or termination request. Click the Submit button when you are nished. Ethernet WAN interface Click the Ethernet WAN link to congure it. 70 The WAN IP Interface page appears. Enable Interface: You can disable the interface by unchecking the checkbox. However, doing so will dis-
able all ability for your LAN users to connect to the WAN using the Gateway. Obtain IP Address Automatically: Your service provider may tell you that the WAN IP Address for your Gateway is static. In this case, disable this checkbox and enter the IP Address and IP Netmask from your Service Provider in the appropriate elds. IP Address: This is the IP Address from your Service Provider when using static IP addressing. IP Netmask: This is the Netmask from your Service Provider when using static IP addressing. NOTE:
Beginning with Firmware Version 7.7, you can now run an IPoE interface without an IP address
(unnumbered interface), if you un-check Obtain IP Address Automatically and set the IP Address to 0. 71 Administrators Handbook Address Mapping (NAT): Species whether you want the Gateway to use network address translation
(NAT) when communicating with remote routers. NAT lets you conceal details of your network from remote routers. By default, address mapping is enabled. Restrictions: This setting determines the types of trafc the Gateway accepts from the WAN. Admin Dis-
abled means that Gateway trafc is accepted but administrative commands are ignored. None means that all trafc is accepted. Admin Disabled is the default. Advanced:
If you click the Advanced link the Advanced WAN IP Interface conguration page appears. RIP Receive Mode: Routing Information Protocol (RIP) is needed if there are IP routers on other segments of your Ethernet network that the Motorola Netopia Gate-
way needs to recognize. Set to Off, Netopia Embedded Software Version 7.7.4 will not accept information from either RIP-1 nor RIP-2 routers. With Receive RIP Mode set to RIP-1, the Motorola Netopia Gateway will accept routing information provided by RIP packets from other routers that use the same subnet mask. Set to RIP-2, Netopia Embedded Software Version 7.7.4 will accept routing information provided by RIP packets from other routers that use different subnet masks. From the pull-down menu, choose Off, RIP-1, RIP-2, RIP-1 compatibility, or RIP-2 with MD5. Enable Proxy ARP: Checking the checkbox will enable the Gateway to respond when it receives an Address Resolution Protocol message for devices behind it. Multicast Forward: If you check this checkbox, this interface acts as an IGMP proxy host, and IGMP pack-
ets are transmitted and received on this interface on behalf of IGMP hosts on the LAN interface. IGMP Null Source Address: If you check this checkbox, the source IP address of every IGMP packet trans-
mitted from this interface is set to 0.0.0.0. This complies with the requirements of TR-101, and removes the need for a publicly advertised IP address on the WAN interface. This checkbox is only available if Mul-
ticast Forward is checked. IP Gateway Enable Gateway Option: You can congure the Gateway to send packets to a default gateway if it does not know how to reach the destination host. Interface Type: If you have PPPoE enabled, you can specify that packets destined for unknown hosts will be sent to the gateway being used by the remote PPP peer. If you select ip-address, you must enter the IP address of a host on a local or remote network to receive the trafc. Default Gateway: The IP Address of the default gateway. Other WAN Options PPPoE: You can enable or disable PPPoE. This link also allows conguration of NAT, admin restrictions, PPPoE username/password, and connection type. 72 WAN Ethernet and VDSL Gateways To allow for concurrent PPPoE and IPoE support on WAN Ethernet Gateways, including VDSL units, PPPoE with IPoE is available on the PPPoE conguration page. Checking the checkbox will provide this concurrent support. When you enable PPPoE with IPoE, the additional WAN interface becomes available for conguration. NOTE:
Enabling pppoe-with-ipoe disables support for multiple PPPoE sessions. ADSL Gateways ATM Circuits: You can congure the ATM circuits and the number of Sessions. The IP Interface(s) should be recongured after making changes here. Available Encapsulation types:
Available Multiplexing types:
PPP over Ethernet (PPPoE) PPP over ATM (PPPoA) RFC-1483 Bridged Ethernet RFC-1483 Routed IP None LLC/SNAP VC muxed 73 Administrators Handbook Your Motorola Netopia ADSL Gateway supports VPI/VCI autodetection by default. If VPI/VCI autodetec-
tion is enabled, the ATM Circuits page displays VPI/VCI = 0. If you congure a new ATM VPI/VCI pair, upon saving and restarting, autodetection is disabled and only the new VPI/VCI pair conguration will be enabled. VPI/VCI Autodetection consists of eight static VPI/VCI pair congurations. These are 0/35, 8/35, 0/32, 8/32, 1/35, 1/1, 1/32, 2/32. These eight VPI/VCI pairs will be created if the Gateway is congured for autodetection. the Gateway does not establish a circuit using any of these precongured VPI/VCI pairs, then you can manually enter a VPI/VCI pair in the ATM Circuits page. PPPoE with IPoE: For ADSL Gateways, you must congure two VCCs with the same VPI/VCI settings to provide concurrent PPPoE with IPoE support. You must use xed VPI/VCI values for PPPoE with IPoE. You cannot have both VPI/VCI values set to 0/0;
autodetection does not work in this mode. 74 Once the VCCs have been congured, the WAN IP Interfaces screen displays the additional interface which you can then congure as required. 75 Administrators Handbook ATM Trafc Shaping: You can prioritize delay-sensitive data by conguring the Quality of Service (QoS) characteristics of the virtual circuit. Click the ATM Trafc Shaping link. You can choose UBR (Unspecied Bit Rate), CBR (Constant Bit Rate), or VBR (Variable Bit Rate) from the pull-down menu and set the Peak Cell Rate (PCR) in the editable eld. UBR (Unspecied Bit Rate) guarantees no minimum transmission rate. Cells are transmitted on a best effort basis. However, there is a cap on the maximum transmission rate for UBR VCs. In a practi-
cal situation:
UBR VCs should be transmitted at a priority lower than CBR. Bandwidth should be shared equally among UBR VCs. UBR applications are non-real-time trafc such as IP data trafc. CBR (Constant Bit Rate) guarantees a certain transmission rate (although the application may underutilize this bandwidth). A Peak Cell Rate (PCR) characterizes CBR. CBR is most suited for real time applications such as real time voice / video, although it can be used for other applications. VBR (Variable Bit Rate) This class is characterized by:
a Peak Cell Rate (PCR), which is a temporary burst, not a sustained rate, and a Sustained Cell Rate (SCR), a Burst Tolerance (BT), specied in terms of Maximum Burst Size (MBS). The MBS is the maximum number of cells that can be transmitted at the peak cell rate and should be less than, or equal to the Peak Cell Rate, which should be less than, or equal to the line rate. VBR has two sub-classes:
a. VBR non-real-time (VBR-nrt): Typical applications are non-real-time trafc, such as IP data trafc. This class yields a fair amount of Cell Delay Variation (CDV). b. VBR real time (VBR-rt): Typical applications are real-time trafc, such as compressed voice over IP and video conferencing. This class transmits cells with a more tightly bounded Cell Delay Variation. The applications follow CBR. Note:
The difference between VBR-rt and VBR-nrt is the tolerated Cell Delay Variation range and the provisioned Maximum Burst Size. 76 Class PCR SCR MBS Transmit Priority Comments UBR CBR VBR X X X N/A N/A X N/A N/A X Low High High PCR is a cap PCR is a guaranteed rate PCR > SCR. SCR is a guaranteed rate. PCR is a cap. 77 Administrators Handbook Link: Advanced Selected Advanced options are discussed in the pages that follow. Many are self-explanatory or are dic-
tated by your service provider. The following are typical links under Congure -> Advanced (some models offer other links):
78 Link: IP Static Routes A static route identies a manually congured pathway to a remote network. Unlike dynamic routes, which are acquired and conrmed periodically from other routers, static routes do not time out. Consequently, static routes are useful when working with PPP, since an intermittent PPP link may make maintenance of dynamic routes problematic. When you click the Static Routes link, the IP Static Routes page appears. You can congure as many as 32 static IP routes for the Gateway. To add a static route, click the Add but-
ton. The IP Static Route Entry page appears. Destination Network: Enter the IP address of the static route. It may not be 0.0.0.0. Netmask: Enter the subnet mask for the IP network at the other end of the static route. The subnet mask associated with the destination network must represent the same network class (A, B, or C) or a lower class (such as a class C subnet mask or class B network number) to be valid. Interface Type: Choose PPP (vcc1) depending on the interface; typically vcc1 for DSL or IP Address from the pull-down menu to specify whether the static route is accessible through PPP or IP address. Gateway: Enter the IP address of the gateway for the static route. The default gateway must be located on a network connected to your Motorola Netopia Gateway congured interface. Metric: Species the hop count for the static route. Enter a number from 1 to 15 to indicate the number of routes (actual or best guess) a packet must traverse to reach the remote network. Some metric or a value of 1 will be used to indicate:
The remote network is one router away and the static route is the best way to reach it. The remote network is more than one router away but the static route should not be replaced by a dynamic route, even if the dynamic route is more efcient. 79 Administrators Handbook RIP Advertise: From the pull-down menu, choose how the static route should be advertised via RIP:
Split Horizon: Do not advertise route if the gateway is on the same subnet. Always: Advertise route in all RIP messages. Never: Do not advertise route. Click the Submit button. The Alert icon page, when you are nished. will appear, so that you can switch to the Save Changes Once you save your changes, you will be returned to the IP Static Routes entry screen. You can continue to Add, Edit, or Delete Static Routes from this screen. When you are nished, click the Alert icon Changes link.
, switch to the Save Changes page, and click the Save 80 Link: IP Static ARP Your Gateway maintains a dynamic Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) table to map IP addresses to Ether-
net (MAC) addresses. It populates this ARP table dynamically, by retrieving IP address/MAC address pairs only when it needs them. Optionally, you can dene static ARP entries to map IP addresses to their corre-
sponding Ethernet MAC addresses. Unlike dynamic ARP table entries, static ARP table entries do not time out. The IP address cannot be 0.0.0.0. The Ethernet MAC address entry is in nn-nn-nn-nn-nn-nn (hexadeci-
mal) format. 81 Administrators Handbook Link: Pinholes Pinholes allow you to transparently route selected types of network trafc, such as FTP requests or HTTP
(Web) connections, to a specic host behind the Gateway. Creating a pinhole allows access trafc originat-
ing from a remote connection (WAN) to be sent to the internal computer (LAN) that is specied in the Pin-
hole page. Pinholes are common for applications like multiplayer online games. Refer to software manufacturer appli-
cation documentation for specic trafc types and port numbers. Congure Specic Pinholes. Planning for Your Pinholes. Determine if any of the service applications that you want to provide on your LAN stations use TCP or UDP protocols. If an application does, then you must congure a pinhole to implement port forwarding. This is accessed from the Advanced ->
Pinholes page. Example: A LAN Requiring Three Pinholes . The procedure on the following pages describes how you set up your NAT-enabled Motorola Netopia Gateway to support three separate applications. This requires passing three kinds of specic IP trafc through to your LAN. Application 1: You have a Web server located on your LAN behind your Motorola Netopia Gateway and would like users on the Internet to have access to it. With NAT On, the only externally visible IP address on your network is the Gateways WAN IP (supplied by your Service Provider). All trafc intended for that LAN Web server must be directed to that IP address. Application 2: You want one of your LAN stations to act as the central repository for all email for all of the LAN users. Application 3: One of your LAN stations is specially congured for game applications. You want this spe-
cic LAN station to be dedicated to games. A sample table to plan the desired pinholes is:
WAN Trafc Type Protocol Pinhole Name LAN Internal IP Address Web Email Games TCP TCP UDP my-webserver my-mailserver my-games 192.168.1.1 192.168.1.2 192.168.1.3 For this example, Internet protocols TCP and UDP must be passed through the NAT security feature and the Gateways embedded Web (HTTP) port must be re-assigned by conguring new settings on the Internal Servers page. 82 TIPS for making Pinhole Entries:
1. If the port forwarding feature is required for Web services, ensure that the embedded Web servers port number is re-assigned PRIOR to any Pinhole data entry. 2. Enter data for one Pinhole at a time. 3. Use a unique name for each Pinhole. If you choose a duplicate name, it will overwrite the previous information without warning. A diagram of this LAN example is:
Internet Gateway WAN Ethernet Interface 210.219.41.20 LAN Ethernet Interface my-webserver 192.168.1.1 NAT my-mailserver 192.168.1.2 Embedded Web Server 210.219.41.20:8100 NAT Pinholes my-games 192.168.1.3 You can also use the LAN-side address of the Gateway, 192.168.1.x:8100 to access the web and 192.168.1.x:23 to access the telnet server. 83 Administrators Handbook Pinhole Conguration Procedure. Use the following steps:
1. From the Congure toolbar button -> Advanced link, select the Internal Servers link. Since Port Forwarding is required for this example, the Motorola Netopia embedded Web server is con-
gured rst. NOTE:
The two text boxes, Web (HTTP) Server Port and Telnet Server Port, on this page refer to the port numbers of the Motorola Netopia Gateways embedded administration ports. To pass Web trafc through to your LAN station(s), select a Web (HTTP) Port number that is greater than 1024. In this example, you choose 8100. 2. Type 8100 in the Web (HTTP) Server Port text box. 3. Click the Submit button. 4. Click Advanced. Select the Pinholes link to go to the Pinhole page. 5. Click Add. Type your specic data into the Pinhole Entries table of this page. Click Sub-
mit. 84 6. Click on the Add or Edit more Pinholes link. Click the Add button. Add the next Pinhole. Type the specic data for the second Pinhole. 7. Click on the Add or Edit more Pinholes link. Click the Add button. Add the next Pinhole. Type the specic data for the third Pinhole. NOTE:
Note the following parameters for the my-games Pinhole:
1. The Protocol ID is UDP. 2. The external port is specied as a range. 3. The Internal port is specied as the lower range entry. 85 Administrators Handbook 8. Click on the Add or Edit more Pinholes link. Review your entries to be sure they are cor-
rect. 9. Click the Alert icon. 10. Click the Save and Restart link to complete the entire Pinhole creation task and ensure that the parameters are properly saved. NOTE:
REMEMBER: When you have re-assigned the port address for the embedded Web server, you can still access this facility. Use the Gateways WAN address plus the new port number. In this example it would be
<WAN Gateway address>:<new port number> or, in this case, 210.219.41.20:8100 You can also use the LAN-side address of the Gateway, 192.168.1.x:8100 to access the web and 192.168.1.x:23 to access the telnet server. 86 Link: IPMaps IPMaps supports one-to-one Network Address Translation (NAT) for IP addresses assigned to servers, hosts, or specic computers on the LAN side of the Motorola Netopia Gateway. A single static or dynamic (DHCP) WAN IP address must be assigned to support other devices on the LAN. These devices utilize Motorola Netopias default NAT/PAT capabilities. Congure the IPMaps Feature FAQs for the IPMaps Feature Before conguring an example of an IPMaps-enabled network, review these frequently asked questions. What are IPMaps and how are they used? The IPMaps feature allows multiple static WAN IP addresses to be assigned to the Motorola Netopia Gateway. Static WAN IP addresses are used to support specic services, like a web server, mail server, or DNS server. This is accomplished by mapping a separate static WAN IP address to a specic internal LAN IP address. All trafc arriving at the Gateway intended for the static IP address is transferred to the internal device. All outbound trafc from the internal device appears to originate from the static IP address. Locally hosted servers are supported by a public IP address while LAN users behind the NAT-enabled IP address are protected. IPMaps is compatible with the use of NAT, with either a statically assigned IP address or DHCP/PPP served IP address for the NAT table. What types of servers are supported by IPMaps? IPMaps allows a Motorola Netopia Gate-
way to support servers behind the Gateway, for example, web, mail, FTP, or DNS servers. VPN servers are not supported at this time. Can I use IPMaps with my PPPoE or PPPoA connection? Yes. IPMaps can be assigned to the WAN interface provided they are on the same subnet. Service providers will need to ensure proper routing to all IP addresses assigned to your WAN interface. Will IPMaps allow IP addresses from different subnets to be assigned to my Gate-
way? IPMap will support statically assigned WAN IP addresses from the same subnet. WAN IP addresses from different subnets are not supported. 87 Administrators Handbook IPMaps Block Diagram The following diagram shows the IPMaps principle in conjunction with existing Motorola Netopia NAT oper-
ations:
Motorola Netopia Gateway WAN Interface LAN Interface NAT/PAT Table 192.168.1.1 Static IP Addresses for IPMaps Applications 143.137.50.37 143.137.50.36 143.137.50.37 192.168.1.1 143.137.50.36 192.168.1.2 143.137.50.35 192.168.1.3
. 192.168.1.n 192.168.1.2 143.137.50.35 Static IP Addresses or DHCP/PPP Served IP Address for Netopias default NAT/PAT Capabilities LAN stations with WAN IP trafc forwarded by Netopias IPMaps LAN stations with WAN IP trafc forwarded by Netopias NAT function. 192.168.1.3 IPMaps:
One-to-One Multiple Address Mapping
... 192.168.1.n 88 Link: Default Server This feature allows you to:
Direct your Gateway to forward all externally initiated IP trafc (TCP and UDP protocols only) to a default host on the LAN. Enable it for certain situations:
Where you cannot anticipate what port number or packet protocol an in-bound application might use. For example, some network games select arbitrary port numbers when a connection is opened. When you want all unsolicited trafc to go to a specic LAN host. Congure for IP Passthrough. Congure a Default Server. This feature allows you to direct unsolicited or non-specic trafc to a designated LAN station. With NAT On in the Gateway, these packets normally would be discarded. For instance, this could be application trafc where you dont know (in advance) the port or protocol that will be used. Some game applications t this prole. Use the following steps to setup a NAT default server to receive this information:
1. Select the Congure toolbar button, then Advanced, then the Default Server link. 2. From the pull-down menu, select Default-Server. The NAT Server IP Address eld appears. 3. Determine the IP address of the LAN computer you have chosen to receive the unex-
pected or unknown trafc. Enter this address in the NAT Server IP Address eld. 4. Click the Submit button. 5. Click the Alert button. 6. Click the Save and Restart link to conrm. Typical Network Diagram. A typical network using the NAT Default Server looks like this:
89 Administrators Handbook Internet Gateway WAN Ethernet Interface 210.219.41.20 LAN Ethernet Interface NAT LAN STN #3 192.168.1.3 LAN STN #2 192.168.1.2 NAT protected Embedded Web Server 210.219.41.20
(Port 80 default) NAT Default Server NAT Default Server 192.168.1.1 You can also use the LAN-side address of the Gateway, 192.168.1.x to access the web and telnet server. NAT Combination Application. Motorola Netopias NAT security feature allows you to congure a sophisticated LAN layout that uses both the Pinhole and Default Server capabilities. With this topology, you congure the embedded administration ports as a rst task, followed by the Pin-
holes and, nally, the NAT Default Server. When using both NAT pinholes and NAT Default Server the Gateway works with the following rules (in sequence) to forward trafc from the Internet to the LAN:
1. 2. 3. If the packet is a response to an existing connection created by outbound trafc from a LAN PC, forward to that station. If not, check for a match with a pinhole conguration and, if one is found, forward the packet according to the pinhole rule. If theres no pinhole, the packet is forwarded to the Default Server. IP-Passthrough. Your Gateway offers an IP passthrough feature. The IP passthrough feature allows a single PC on the LAN to have the Gateways public address assigned to it. It also provides PAT (NAPT) via the same public IP address for all other hosts on the private LAN subnet. Using IP passthrough:
The public WAN IP is used to provide IP address translation for private LAN computers. The public WAN IP is assigned and reused on a LAN computer. 90 DHCP address serving can automatically serve the WAN IP address to a LAN computer. When DHCP is used for addressing the designated passthrough PC, the acquired or congured WAN address is passed to DHCP, which will dynamically congure a single-servable-address subnet, and reserve the address for the congured MAC address. This dynamic subnet conguration is based on the local and remote WAN address and subnet mask. If the WAN interface does not have a suitable subnet mask that is usable, for example when using PPP or PPPoE, the DHCP subnet conguration will default to a class C subnet mask. If you want to manually assign the WAN address to a LAN PC, do not check the DHCP Enable checkbox. If you check the DHCP Enable checkbox, the screen expands. The Host Hardware Address eld displays. Here you enter the MAC address of the designated IP-
Passthrough computer. If this MAC address is not all zeroes, then it will use DHCP to set the LAN host's address to the (cong-
ured or acquired) WAN IP address. The MAC address must be six colon-delimited or dash-delimited sets of hex digits ('0' 'FF'). If you leave the MAC address as zeros then the rst DHCP client will be assigned the WAN address. Once congured, the passthrough host's DHCP leases will be shortened to two minutes. This allows for timely updates of the host's IP address, which will be a private IP address before the WAN connection is established. After the WAN connection is established and has an address, the passthrough host can renew its DHCP address binding to acquire the WAN IP address. A restriction. Since both the Gateway and the passthrough host will use the same IP address, new ses-
sions that conict with existing sessions will be rejected by the Gateway. For example, suppose you are a teleworker using an IPSec tunnel from the Gateway and from the passthrough host. Both tunnels go to the same remote endpoint, such as the VPN access concentrator at your employers ofce. In this case, the rst one to start the IPSec trafc will be allowed; the second one since, from the WAN, it's indistinguish-
able will fail. 91 Administrators Handbook Link: Differentiated Services When you click the Differentiated Services link, the Differentiated Services conguration screen appears. Differentiated Services (Diffserv) allow your Gateway to make Quality of Service (QoS) decisions about what path Internet trafc, such as Voice over IP (VoIP), should travel across your network. For example, you may want streaming video conferencing to use high quality, but more restrictive, connections, or, you might want e-mail to use less restrictive, but less reliable, connections. VDSL and Bonded ADSL models display this screen:
Most other models display this screen:
To enable Differentiated Services, check the Enable checkbox.
(Not displayed on VDSL and Bonded ADSL models) Enter a value from 60 to 100 (percent) in the Low-
High Priority Ratio eld. The default is 92. Differentiated Services uses the low-to-high priority queue ratio to regulate trafc ow. For example, to provide the least possible latency and highest possible throughput for high priority trafc, you could set the ratio to 100(%). This would cause the gateway to forward low priority data only after the high priority queue is completely empty. In practice, you should set it to something less than 100%, since the low pri-
ority trafc might have to wait too long to be passed, and consequently be subject to time-outs. Click the Submit button. You can then dene Custom Flows. If your applications do not provide Quality of Service (QoS) control, Cus-
tom Flows allows you to dene streams for some protocols, port ranges, and between specic end point addresses. 92 To dene a custom ow, click the Add button. The Custom Flow Entry screen appears. Name Enter a name in this eld to label the ow. Protocol Select the protocol from the pull-down menu: TCP (default), UDP, ICMP, or Other. Other is appropriate for setting up ows on protocols with non-
standard port denitions. IPSEC and PPTP are common examples. Numerical Protocol If you select Other protocol, this eld appears for you to provide its actual protocol number, with a range of 0 255. Direction Choose Outbound (default), Inbound, or Both from the pull-down menu. Start Port For TCP or UDP protocols, you can option-
ally specify a range of ports. Enter the starting port here. End Port Enter the ending port here. Inside IP Address/Netmask For outbound ows, specify an IP address/netmask on your LAN. For inbound ows, this setting is ignored. This setting marks packets from this LAN IP host/network based on the address and netmask information. For outbound ows, the Inside IP Address/Netmask is the source address. If you enter a zero IP address (0.0.0.0), the IP address/netmask elds will be ignored. Outside IP Address/Netmask If you want trafc destined for and originating from a certain WAN IP address to be controlled, enter the IP address and subnet mask here. If you leave the default all-zeroes, the outside address check is ignored. For outbound ows, the outside address is the destination IP address for trafc; for inbound packets, the outside address is the source IP address. Note:
When setting the Inside/Outside IP Address/Netmask settings, note that a netmask value can be used to congure for a network rather than a single IP address. 93 Administrators Handbook Quality of Service (QoS) This is the Quality of Service setting for the ow, based on the TOS bit information. Select Expedite, Assure, or Off (default) from the pull-down menu. The following table out-
lines the TOS bit settings and behavior:
QoS Setting TOS Bit Value Off TOS=000 Assure TOS=001 Expedite Network Control TOS=101 TOS=111 Behavior This custom ow is disabled. You can activate it by selecting one of the two settings below. This setting allows you to pre-dene ows without actually activating them. Use normal queuing and throughput rules, but do not drop pack-
ets if possible. Appropriate for applications with no guaranteed delivery mechanism. Use minimum delay. Appropriate for VoIP and video applications. Use highest possible priority. 94 Link: DNS Your Service Provider may maintain a Domain Name server. If you have the information for the DNS serv-
ers, enter it on the DNS page. If your Gateway is congured to use DHCP to obtain its WAN IP address, the DNS information is automatically obtained from that same DHCP Server. 95 Administrators Handbook Link: DHCP Server Your Gateway can provide network conguration information to computers on your LAN, using the Dynamic Host Conguration Protocol (DHCP). If you already have a DHCP server on your LAN, you should turn this service off. If you want the Gateway to provide this service, select Server from the Server Mode pull-down menu, then congure the range of IP addresses that you would like the Gateway to hand out to your computers. You can also specify the length of time the computers can use the conguration information; DHCP calls this period the lease time. Your Service Provider may, for certain services, want to provide conguration from its DHCP servers to the computers on your LANs. In this case, the Gateway will relay the DHCP requests from your computers to a DHCP server in the Service Provider's network. Select Relay-agent and enter the IP address of the Service Provider's DHCP server in the Server Address eld. This address is furnished by the Service Provider. NOTE:
The relay-agent option only works when NAT is off and the Gateway is in router mode. 96 Link: RADIUS Server RADIUS servers allow external authentication of users by means of a remote authentication database. The remote authentication database is maintained by a Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service (RADIUS) server. In conjunction with Wireless User Authentication, you can use a RADIUS server database to authen-
ticate users seeking access to the wireless services, as well as the authorized user list maintained locally within the Gateway. If you click the RADIUS link, the RADIUS Servers screen appears. RADIUS Server Addr/Name: The default RADIUS server name or IP address that you want to use. RADIUS Server Secret: The RADIUS secret key used by this server. The shared secret should have the same characteristics as a normal password. RADIUS Server Port: The port on which the RADIUS server is listening, typically, the default 1812. Click the Submit button. You can also congure alternate RADIUS servers from the Wireless Conguration pages. See Use RADIUS Server on page 65 for more information. 97 Administrators Handbook Link: SNMP When you click the SNMP link, the SNMP conguration page appears. The Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) lets a network administrator monitor problems on a net-
work by retrieving settings on remote network devices. The network administrator typically runs an SNMP management station program on a local host to obtain information from an SNMP agent. In this case, the Motorola Netopia Gateway is an SNMP agent. Your Gateway supports SNMP-V1, with the exception of most sets (read-only and traps), and SNMP-V2. (For certain parts of the NPAV2TRAP.MIB parameters under resNatParams, resDslParams, resSecParams set is supported.) You enter SNMP conguration information on this page. Your network administrator furnishes the SNMP parameters. WARNING:
SNMP presents you with a security issue. The community facility of SNMP behaves somewhat like a password. The community public is a well-known community name. It could be used to examine the conguration of your Gateway by your service provider or an uninvited reviewer. The information can be read from the Gateway. If you are strongly concerned about security, you may leave the public community blank. 98 The Notication Type pull-down menu allows you to congure the type of SNMP notications that will be generated:
v1 Trap This selection will generate notications containing an SNMPv1 Trap Protocol Data Unit (PDU) v2 Trap This selection will generate notications containing an SNMPv2 Trap PDU Inform This selection will generate notications containing an SNMPv2 InformRequest PDU. To send SNMP traps, you must add IP addresses for each trap receiver you want to have. Click the Add button. The IP Trap Entry screen appears. Enter an IP Trap Entry IP address. This is the destination for SNMP trap messages, the IP address of the host acting as an SNMP console. Click the Submit button. Click the Alert icon, and in the resulting page, click the Save and Restart link. 99 Administrators Handbook Link: IGMP (Internet Group Management Protocol) Multicasting is a method for transmitting large amounts of information to many, but not all, computers over an internet. One common use is to distribute real time voice, video, and data services to the set of computers which have joined a distributed conference. Other uses include updating the address books of mobile computer users in the eld, or sending out company newsletters to a distribution list. Since a router should not be used as a passive forwarding device, Motorola Netopia Gateways use a pro-
tocol for forwarding multicasting: Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP). Motorola Netopia Gateways support IGMP Version 1, Version 2, or, beginning with Motorola Netopia Firmware Version 7.7, Version 3. See the Advanced option in LAN on page 49 for more information. IGMP Snooping is a feature of Ethernet layer 2 switches that listens in on the IGMP conversation between computers and multicast routers. Through this process, it builds a database of where the multi-
cast routers reside by noting IGMP general queries used in the querier selection process and by listening to other router protocols. From the host point of view, the snooping function listens at a port level for an IGMP report. The switch then processes the IGMP report and starts forwarding the relevant multicast stream onto the host's port. When the switch receives an IGMP leave message, it processes the leave message, and if appropriate stops the multicast stream to that particular port. Basically, customer IGMP messages although processed by the switch are also sent to the multicast routers. In order for IGMP snooping to function with IGMP Version 3, it must always track the full source lter state of each host on each group, as was previously done with Version 2 only when Fast Leave support was enabled. IGMP Version 3 supports:
IGMP Source Filtering: the ability for group memberships to incorporate source address ltering. This allows Source-Specic Multicast (SSM). By adding source ltering, a Gateway that proxies IGMP can more selec-
tively join the specic multicast group for which there are interested LAN multicast receivers. These features require no user conguration on the Gateway. To congure IGMP options available in Motorola Netopia Gateways, click the IGMP link. 100 The IGMP page appears. You can set the following options:
IGMP Snooping checking this checkbox enables the Motorola Netopia Gateway to listen in to IGMP trafc. The Gateway discovers multicast group membership for the purpose of restricting multicast transmissions to only those ports which have requested them. This helps to reduce overall network trafc from streaming media and other bandwidth-intensive IP multicast applications. Robustness a way of indicating how sensitive to lost packets the network is. IGMP can recover from robustness minus 1 lost IGMP packet. The default value is 2. Query Interval the amount of time in seconds between IGMP General Query messages sent by the querier gate-
way. The default query interval is 125 seconds. Query Response Interval the maximum amount of time in tenths of a second that the IGMP router waits to receive a response to a General Query message. The default query response interval is 10 seconds and must be less than the query interval. Unsolicited Report Interval the amount of time in seconds between repetitions of a particular computers initial report of membership in a group. The default unsolicited report interval is 10 seconds. Querier Version Select a version of the IGMP Querier from the pull-down menu: v1, v2, or v3. The default v3 allows for backward compatibility mode with the earlier versions, and should not need to be changed. However, for administrative purposes you may select either v1 or v2. Last Member Query Interval the amount of time in tenths of a second that the IGMP gateway waits to receive a response to a Group-Specic Query message. The last member query interval is also the amount of time in seconds between successive Group-Specic Query messages. The default last mem-
ber query interval is 1 second (10 deci-seconds). Last Member Query Count the number of Group-Specic Query messages sent before the gateway assumes that there are no members of the host group being queried on this interface. The default last member query count is 2. Fast Leave Checking this checkbox enables a non-standard expedited leave mechanism. The querier keeps track of which client is requesting which channel by IP address. When a leave message is received, the querier can check its internal table to see if there are any more clients on this group. If there are none, it immediately sends an IGMP leave message to the upstream querier. By default, Fast Leave is set to Off. Log Enable If you check this checkbox, all IGMP messages on both the LAN and the WAN will be logged. Wireless Multicast to Unicast conversion This checkbox only appears if IGMP Snooping is enabled. If you check this checkbox, the Gateway replaces the multicast MAC-address with the physical MAC-address of the wireless client. If there is more than one wireless client interested in the same mul-
ticast group, the router will revert to multicasting the stream immediately. When one or more wireless clients leave a group, and the router determines that only a single wireless client is interested in the stream, it will once again unicast the stream. Click the Submit button. Click the Alert icon, and in the resulting page, click the Save and Restart link. 101 Administrators Handbook Link: UPnP Universal Plug and Play (UPnP) is a set of protocols that allows a PC to automatically discover other UPnP devices (anything from an internet gateway device to a light switch), retrieve an XML description of the device and its services, control the device, and subscribe to real-time event notication. By default, UPnP is enabled on the Motorola Netopia Gateway. For Windows XP users, the automatic discovery feature places an icon representing the Motorola Netopia Gateway automatically in the My Network Places folder. Double-clicking this icon opens the Gateways web UI. PCs using UPnP can retrieve the Gateways WAN IP address, and automatically cre-
ate NAT port maps. This means that applications that support UPnP, and are used with a UPnP-enabled Motorola Netopia Gateway, will not need application layer gateway support on the Motorola Netopia Gateway to work through NAT. You can disable UPnP, if you are not using any UPnP devices or applications. Uncheck the UPnP Enabled checkbox, and click the Submit button. The Alert icon will appear in the upper right corner of the web page. Click the Alert icon, and when prompted, click the Save and Restart link. 102 Link: LAN Management TR-064 is a LAN-side DSL Gateway conguration specication. It is an extension of UPnP. It denes more services to locally manage the Motorola Netopia Gateway. While UPnP allows open access to congure the Gateway's features, TR-064 requires a password to execute any command that changes the Gateway's conguration. TR-064 is enabled by default. To disable it:
Uncheck the Enabled checkbox, and click the Submit button. The Alert icon will appear in the upper right corner of the web page. Click the Alert icon, and when prompted, click the Save and Restart link. 103 Administrators Handbook Link: Ethernet Bridge The Motorola Netopia Gateway can be used as a bridge, rather than a router. A bridge is a device that joins two networks. As an Internet access device, a bridge connects the home computer directly to the ser-
vice providers network equipment with no intervening routing functionality, such as Network Address Trans-
lation. Your home computer becomes just another address on the service providers network. In a DSL connection, the bridge serves simply to convey the digital data information back and forth over your tele-
phone lines in a form that keeps it separate from your voice telephone signals. If your service providers network is set up to provide your Internet connectivity via bridge mode, you can set your Motorola Netopia Gateway to be compatible. Bridges let you join two networks, so that they appear to be part of the same physical network. As a bridge for protocols other than TCP/IP, your Gateway keeps track of as many as 512 MAC (Media Access Control) addresses, each of which uniquely identies an individual host on a network. Your Gateway uses this bridg-
ing table to identify which hosts are accessible through which of its network interfaces. The bridging table contains the MAC address of each packet it sees, along with the interface over which it received the packet. Over time, the Gateway learns which hosts are available through its WAN port and/or its LAN port. When congured in Bridge Mode, the Motorola Netopia will act as a pass-through device and allow the workstations on your LAN to have public addresses directly on the internet. NOTE:
In this mode the Motorola Netopia is providing NO rewall protection as is afforded by NAT. Also, only the workstations that have a public address can access the internet. This can be useful if you have multiple static public IPs on the LAN. Bridging per WAN is supported in conjunction with VLANs individual WANs can be bridged to the LAN only if the WANs are part of a VLAN. (See VLAN on page 107 for more information.) The capability to bridge individual VLANs is supported only if the underlying encapsulation is RFC1483-Bridged (ether-llc). 104 Conguring for Bridge Mode 1. Browse into the Motorola Netopia Gateways web interface. 2. Click on the Congure button in the upper Menu bar. 3. Click on the LAN link. The LAN page appears. 4. In the box titled LAN IP Interface (Ethernet 100BT):
Make note of the Ethernet IP Address and subnet mask. You can use this address to access the router in the future. 5. Click on the Advanced link in the left-hand links toolbar. 6. Under the heading of Services, click on the Ether-
net Bridge link. The Ethernet Bridge page appears. 7. 8. The appearance of this page varies, depending on your Gateways interfaces. If available:
a. Check the Enable Bridging on Port selection. (This may be Always On.) b. Click Submit. If you want the Gateway to do both bridging and routing, check the Enable Concurrent Bridging/Routing checkbox. When this mode is enabled, the Gateway will appear to be a router, but also bridge trafc from the LAN if it has a valid LAN-side address. 9. Check the Enable System Bridge checkbox. The window shrinks. 105 Administrators Handbook b. Click Submit. At this point you should be ready to do the nal save on the conguration changes you have made. The yellow Alert symbol will appear beneath the Help button on the right-hand end of the menu bar. 10. Click on the Alert symbol and you will see whether your changes have been validated. 11. If you are satised with the changes you have made, click Save and Restart in the Save Database box to Apply changes and restart Gateway. You have now congured your Motorola Netopia Gateway for bridging, and it will bridge all trafc across the WAN. You will need to make congurations to your machines on your LAN. These settings must be made in accordance with your ISP. If you ever need to get back into the Motorola Netopia Gateway again for management reasons, you will need to manually congure your machine to be in the same subnet as the Ethernet interface of the Motorola Netopia, since DHCP server is not operational in bridge mode. 106 Link: VLAN When you click the VLAN link the VLANs page appears. Overview A Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN) is a network of computers or other devices that behave as if they are connected to the same wire even though they may be physically located on different segments of a LAN. You set up VLANs by conguring the Gateway software rather than hardware. This makes VLANs very exi-
ble. VLANs behave like separate and independent networks. Beginning with Version 7.7.4, VLANs are now strictly layer 2 entities. They can be thought of as virtual Ethernet switches, into which can be added: Ethernet ports, router IP interfaces, ATM PVC/VCC interfaces, SSIDs, and any other physical port such as USB, HPNA, or MOCA. This allows great exibility on how the components of a system are connected to each other. VLANs are part of Motorolas VGx Virtual Gateway technology which allows individual port-based VLANs to be treated as separate and distinct channels. When data is passed to a Motorola Netopia VGx-enabled broadband gateway, specic policies, routing, and prioritization parameters can be applied to each individ-
ual service, delivering that service to the appropriate peripheral device with the required level of quality of service (QoS). In effect, a single Motorola gateway acts as separate virtual gateways for each distinct ser-
vice being delivered. Motorolas VGx technology maps multiple local VLANs to one or more specic permanent virtual circuits
(PVCs) for DSL, or wide area network VLANs for a ber network. VGx provides service segmentation and QoS controls, service management, and supports delivery of triple play applications: voice for IP Telephony, video for IPTV, and data. Your Gateway supports the following:
Port-based VLANs - these can be used when no trunking is required Global VLANs - these are used when trunking is required on any port member of the VLAN
- Supports 802.1q and 802.1p; both are congurable Routed VLANs 107 Administrators Handbook
- WAN-side VLAN with Multiple WAN IPoE interface support and IP interface-to-VLAN binding
- LAN-side VLAN with IP interface-to-VLAN binding
- Inter-VLAN routing Bridged VLANs - these VLANs are used to bridge trafc from LAN to WAN Prioritization per VLAN and per port Ethernet Switching/Policy Setup Before you congure any VLANs, the uncongured Gateway is set up as a router composed of a LAN switch, a WAN switch, and a router in the middle, with LAN and WAN IP interfaces connected to their respective switches. These bindings between Ethernet switch ports, IP LAN interface, IP WAN interface and WAN phys-
ical ports are automatically created. When you congure any VLANs, the default bindings are no longer valid, and the system requires explicit binding between IP interfaces and layer 2 interfaces. Each VLAN can be thought of as a layer 2 switch, and enabling each port or interface in a VLAN is analogous to plugging it in to the layer 2 switch. Thereafter, in order for devices to communicate on layer 2, they must be associated in the same VLAN. For devices to communicate at layer 3, the devices must be either on the same VLAN, or on VLANs that have an Inter-VLAN routing group enabled in common. When conguring VLANs you must dene how trafc needs to be forwarded:
If trafc needs to be bridged between LAN and WAN you can create a single VLAN that encompasses the WAN port and LAN ports. If trafc needs to be routed then you must dene four elements:
LAN-side VLANs WAN-side VLANs Associate IP Interfaces to VLANs Inter-VLAN Routing Groups: conguration of routing between VLANs is done by association of a VLAN to a Routing Group. Trafc will be routed between VLANs within a routing group. The LAN IP Ethernet Interface can be bound to multiple LAN VLANs, but forwarding can be limited between an Ethernet LAN port and a WAN VLAN if you properly congure Inter-VLAN groups. Inter-VLAN groups are also used to block routing between WAN interfaces. If each WAN IP interface is bound to its own VLAN and if you congure a different Inter-VLAN group for each WAN VLAN then no rout-
ing between WAN IP interfaces is possible. Example: to route between a VCC and all the LAN ports, which effectively is similar to the default cong-
uration without any VLANs:
Create a VLAN named "VccWan" consisting of vcc1, ip-vcc1, routing-group 1 Create a VLAN named "Lan" consisting of eth0.1, eth0.2, eth0.3, eth0.4, ssid1, ssid2, ssid3, ssid4
(etc.), ip-eth-a, routing-group 1 108 An example of multiple VLANs, using a Motorola Netopia Gateway with VGx managed switch technology, is shown below:
A VLAN Model Combining Bridging and Routing To congure VLANs check the Enable checkbox. To create a VLAN select a list item from the main VLAN page and click the Edit button. 109 Administrators Handbook The VLAN Entry page appears. Check the Enable checkbox, and enter a descriptive name for the VLAN. You can create up to 16 VLANs, and you can also restrict any VLAN, and the computers on it, from adminis-
tering the Gateway. VLAN Name A descriptive name for the VLAN. Type LAN or WAN Port(s) can be enabled on the VLAN. You can choose a type designation as follows:
By-Port: indicates that the VLAN is port-based. Trafc sent to this port will be treated as belonging to the VLAN, and will not be forwarded to other ports that are not within a common VLAN segment. Global indicates that the ports joining this VLAN are part of a global 802.1q Ethernet VLAN. This VLAN includes ports on this Router and may include ports within other devices throughout the network. The VID in this case may dene the behavior of trafc between all devices on the network having ports that are members of this VLAN segment. 110 VLAN ID If you select Global as the VLAN Type, the VLAN ID eld appears for you to enter a VID. This must be a unique identifying number between 1 and 4094. (A VID of zero (0) is permitted on the Ether-
net WAN port only.) Admin Restricted If you want to prevent administrative access to the Gateway from this VLAN, check the checkbox. 802.1p Priority Bit: If you set this from the pull-down menu to a value greater than 0, all packets of this VLAN with unmarked priority bits (pbits) will be re-marked to this priority. Click the Submit button. The VLAN Port Conguration screen appears. Port interfaces available for this VLAN are listed in the left hand column. Displayed port interfaces vary depending on the kinds of physical ports on your Gateway, for example, Ethernet, USB, and/or wireless. Also, if you have multiple wireless SSIDs dened, these may be displayed as well (See Enable Multiple Wireless IDs on page 59) For Motorola Netopia VGx technology models, separate Ethernet switch ports are displayed and may be congured. To enable any of them on this VLAN, check the associated Enable checkbox(es). Typically you will choose a physical port, such as an Ethernet port (example: eth0.1) or a wireless SSID
(example: ssid1). When you enable an interface, the Tag, Priority, and Promote checkboxes and an 802.1p Priority Bit pull-down menu appear for that interface. 111 Administrators Handbook Tag Packets transmitted from this port through this VLAN must be tagged with the VLAN VID. Packets received through this port destined for this VLAN must be tagged with the VLAN VID by the source. The Tag option is only available on Global type ports. Priority Use any 802.1p priority bits in the VLAN header to prioritize packets within the Gateways internal queues, according to DiffServ priority mapping rules. See Differentiated Services on page 92 for more information. Promote Write any 802.1p priority bits into the IP-TOS header bit eld for received IP packets on this port destined for this VLAN. Write any IP-TOS priority bits into the 802.1p priority bit eld for tagged IP packets transmitted from this port for this VLAN. All mappings between Ethernet 802.1p and IP-TOS are made according to a pre-dened QoS mapping policy. The pre-dened mapping can now be set in the CLI. See Queue Conguration on page 271. See also Differentiated Services on page 92 for more information. 802.1p Priority Bit If you set this eld to a value greater than 0, all packets received on this port with unmarked priority bits (pbits) will be re-marked to this priority. If the port 802.1p PBit is greater than 0, the VLAN 802.1p PBit setting is ignored. Select an IP Interface for this VLAN if it is to be routed; otherwise leave the default. These selections will vary depending on your IP interfaces. For example, if you have set up multiple VCCs, these will appear in the list as ip-vcc1, ip-vcc2, and so forth. 112 When you select an IP interface, the screen expands to allow you to congure Inter-Vlan-Groups. Inter-VLAN groups allow VLANs in the group to route trafc to the others; ungrouped VLANs cannot route trafc to each other. Click the Submit button. When you are nished, click the Alert icon resulting screen, click the Save link. in the upper right-hand corner of the screen, and in the If you want to create more VLANs, click the Advanced link (in the left-hand toolbar) and then the VLAN link in the resulting page, and repeat the process. 113 Administrators Handbook You can Edit, Clear, Enable, or Disable your VLAN entries by returning to the VLANs page, and selecting the appropriate entry from the displayed list. When you are nished, click the Alert icon in the upper right-hand corner of the screen, and in the resulting screen, click the Save and Restart link. To view the settings for each VLAN, select the desired VLAN from the list and click the Details button. 114 The screen expands to display the VLAN settings. 115 Administrators Handbook Example The following is a simple example of how you might congure some VLANs:
You want to congure a 3347NWG-VGx Gateway with two SSIDs (see Multiple SSIDs on page 59 for more information) for two VLANs, allowing both access to the Internet. One SSID will be in the same VLAN as the four ports of the Ethernet Switch, so that those two networks can communicate. The second VLAN will be for the other SSID. The second VLAN will also be denied access to the 3347NWG-VGx web interface and tel-
net interface. This setup might be useful if you have a doctors ofce or a coffee shop, and you want to keep your customers separated from the rest of the network. 1. In the VLANs page, check the Enable checkbox, select VLAN #1 in the VLANs list, and click the Edit button. 2. Check the Enable checkbox, and in the VLAN Name box, enter the name you would like. For example, call it Network A. Since this VLAN will be for SSID1 and the Ethernet ports, leave Admin Restricted unchecked. This will give this VLAN access to the Gateway. 3. Click the Submit button. 4. In the Port Conguration for VLAN:1 page, you add the Port Interfaces you want associ-
ated with the VLAN. 116 In this case, select all the physical Ethernet ports: eth0.1 through eth0.4, and wireless ssid1. Select ip-eth-a, the IP interface for the group. This will be Inter-Vlan-Group #1. Check the Group-1 checkbox. These ports will be able to communicate with each other. 5. Click the Submit button. 6. In the VLAN page, select VLAN #2 in the VLANs list, and click the Edit button. The VLAN Name must be given another unique name. For example, call it Network B. Since this is for the second SSID that we dont want to be given access to the Gateway, check the Admin Restricted checkbox. 117 Administrators Handbook 7. Click the Submit button. 8. In the Port Conguration for VLAN: 2 page, you add the Port Interfaces you want asso-
ciated with the VLAN. Select the ip-eth-a port interface and check the ssid2 port interface. Make this VLAN a member of Inter-Vlan-Group Group-2. 9. Click the Submit button. 10. Next, create a VLAN to provide the Inter-Vlan-Groups access to the Internet (WAN). For example, call it WAN VLAN. 118 Check the vcc1 checkbox, select the ip-vcc1 IP interface, and check the Inter-Vlan-Group Group-1 and Group-2 checkboxes. Members of Groups 1 and 2 will now be able to communicate with the Internet
(WAN), but not with each other. 11. Once you have nished with the conguration of the VLANs, click the Alert icon in the upper right hand corner. This will validate that the settings are legal for your network. 12. Click the Save and Restart link. This will restart the Motorola Netopia Gateway and retain the VLAN conguration. 119 Administrators Handbook Link: VoIP
(supported models only) Voice-over-IP (VoIP) refers to the ability to make voice telephone calls over the Internet. This differs from tra-
ditional phone calls that use the Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN). VoIP calls use an Internet pro-
tocol, Session Initiation Protocol (SIP), to transmit sound over a network or the Internet in the form of data packets. Certain Motorola Netopia Gateway models have two separate voice ports for connecting tele-
phone handsets. These models support VoIP. If your Gateway is a VoIP model, you can congure the VoIP features. When you click the VoIP link, the SIP Line Entry page appears. To enable a VoIP line, select one of the lines from the SIP Line Entry menu that corresponds to the port on the Gateway to which your phone is connected. Click the Edit button. In the resulting screen, check the Enable SIP checkbox. The screen expands to display the features that you can enable for that line. 120 SIP Line Entry Registration Interval
(in secs) Registrar Server Registrar Port Proxy Server Length of time the VoIP registration will be valid before it will be renewed. Default is 1 hour. Registration Server name or IP address. Registration Server port. Default is 5060. Proxy server name or IP address. 121 Administrators Handbook Proxy Port Outbound Proxy Server Outbound Proxy Port User Display Name SIP User Name SIP User Password Auth User ID DTMF Mode Enable End of Dial Marker Enable Call Fowarding Unconditionally Enable Call Forwarding On Busy Enable Call Forwarding On No Answer Enable Waiting Enable Conferencing Subscribe for Do Not Dis-
turb Subscribe for MWI SIP Line Entry Proxy server port, if required. Default is 5060. Outbound Proxy server name or IP address, if required. Outbound Proxy server port, if required. Default is 5060. Name of this phones user to be displayed on the Home page. Example: Jacob Q. Smith Registration user ID. Example: jqsmith Registration user password. The authorization ID that authenticates the user to SIP for the specied phone. Most SIP Servers expect this to be the User Name itself but some may use Auth User ID. Call Features Settings Choose the Dual Tone Multi-Frequency Mode:
Inband: Sends the DTMF digits as a normal inband tone. RFC2833: Sends the DTMF digits as an event as part of the RTP packet header information. Info: Sends the DTMF digits in the SIP INFO message. If you check this checkbox, the Gateway will generate an end of dial (#) signal that indicates that the dialed number is complete. If you check this checkbox, all calls will be forwarded to a speci-
ed number. The Unconditional Call Fowarding Number eld will appear for you to enter the number, if enabled. If you check this checkbox, calls will be forwarded to a specied number if the line is busy. The On Busy Call Fowarding Number eld will appear for you to enter the number, if enabled. If you check this checkbox, calls will be forwarded to a specied number if there is no answer. The On No Answer Call Fowarding Number eld will appear for you to enter the number, if enabled. If you check this checkbox, call waiting is enabled. If you check this checkbox, 3-party teleconferencing is enabled. If you check this checkbox, the Gateway will reject VoIP calls with-
out ringing the phone. If you check this checkbox, Message Waiting Indicator is enabled when new voice mail is received. When you are nished entering the required information, click the Submit button. To congure the second voice port, return to the SIP Line Entry screen by clicking the VoIP link in the Breadcrumb Trail. When you are nished, click the Alert icon page, click the Save and Restart link. in the upper right corner of the page, and in the resulting 122 The Home page for a VoIP-enabled Gateway with both phone lines registered is shown below. 123 Administrators Handbook Link: System The System Name defaults to your Gateway's factory identier combined with its serial number. Some cable-oriented Service Providers use the System Name as an important identication and support parame-
ter. The System Name can be 1 255 characters long; it can include embedded spaces and special charac-
ters. The Log Message Level alters the severity at which messages are collected in the Gateway's system log. Do not alter this eld unless instructed by your Support representative. 124 Link: Syslog Parameters You can congure a UNIX-compatible syslog client to report a number of subsets of the events entered in the Gateways WAN Event History. Syslog sends log-messages to a host that you specify. To enable syslog logging, click on the Syslog Parameters link. Check the Syslog checkbox. The screen expands. Syslog: Enable syslog logging in the system. Syslog Host Name/IP Address: Enter the name or the IP Address of the host that should receive sys-
log messages. Facility: From the pull-down menu, select the Syslog facility to be used by the router when generating syslog messages. Options are local0 through local7. Log Violations: If you check this checkbox, the Gateway will generate messages whenever a packet is discarded because it violates the router's security policy. Log Access Attempts: If you check this checkbox, the Gateway will generate messages whenever a packet attempts to access the router or tries to pass through the router. This option is disabled by default. Log Accepted Packets: If you check this checkbox, the Gateway will generate messages whenever a packet accesses the router or passes through the router. This option is disabled by default. NOTE:
Syslog needs to be enabled to comply with logging requirements mentioned in The Modular Firewall Certication Criteria - Baseline Module - version 4.1 (specied by ICSA Labs). For more information, please go to the following URL:
http://www.icsalabs.com/icsa/docs/html/communities/rewalls/pdf/4.1/baseline.pdf 125 Administrators Handbook Log Event Messages Administration Related Log Messages 1. administrative access attempted:
2. administrative access authenticated and allowed:
3. administrative access allowed:
4. administrative access denied -
invalid user name:
5. administrative access denied -
invalid password:
6. administrative access denied - telnet access not allowed:
7. administrative access denied - web access not allowed:
This log-message is generated whenever the user attempts to access the router's management interface. This log-message is generated whenever the user attempts to access the router's management interface and is successfully authenticated and allowed access to the management interface. If for some reason, a customer does not want password protection for the management interface, this log-message is generated whenever any user attempts to access the router's management interface and is allowed access to the management interface. This log-message is generated whenever the user tries to access the router's management interface and authentication fails due to incor-
rect user-name. This log-message is generated whenever the user tries to access the router's management interface and authentication fails due to incor-
rect password. This log-message is generated whenever the user tries to access the router's Telnet management interface from a Public interface and is not permitted since Remote Management is disabled. This log-message is generated whenever the user tries to access the router's HTTP management interface from a Public interface and is not permitted since Remote Management is disabled. 1. Received NTP Date and Time:
2. EN: IP up:
3. WAN: Ethernet WAN1 activated at 100000 Kbps:
4. Device Restarted:
1. WAN: Data link activated at <Rate>
Kbps (rx/tx) 2.WAN: Data link deactivated 3. RFC1483 up 4. RFC1483-<WAN-
instance>: IP down System Log Messages This log-message is generated whenever NTP receives Date and time from the server. This log-message is generated whenever Ethernet WAN comes up. This log-message is generated when the Ethernet WAN Link is up. This log-message is generated when the router has been restarted. DSL Log Messages (most common):
This log message is generated when the DSL link comes up. This log message is generated when the DSL link goes down. This log message is generated when RFC1483 link comes up. This log message is generated when RFC1483 link goes down. 126 5. PPP: Channel <ID>
up Dialout Prole name: <Prole Name>
6. PPP-<WAN Instance> down:
<Reason>
1. permitted:
2. attempt:
3. dropped - violation of security policy:
4. dropped - invalid checksum:
5. dropped - invalid data length:
6. dropped - frag-
mented packet:
7. dropped - cannot fragment:
8. dropped - no route found:
9. dropped - invalid IP version:
10. dropped - possi-
ble land attack:
11. TCP SYN ood detected:
12. Telnet receive DoS attack - packets dropped:
DSL Log Messages (most common):
This log message is generated when a PPP channel comes up. This log message is generated when a PPP channel goes down. The reason for the channel going down is displayed as well. Access-related Log Messages This log-message is generated whenever a packet is allowed to traverse router-interfaces or allowed to access the router itself. This log-message is generated whenever a packet attempts to traverse router-interfaces or attempts to access the router itself. This log-message is generated whenever a packet, traversing the router or destined to the router itself, is dropped by the rewall because it violates the expected conditions. This log-message is generated whenever a packet, traversing the router or destined to the router itself, is dropped because of invalid IP checksum. This log-message is generated whenever a packet, traversing the router or destined to the router itself, is dropped because the IP length is greater than the received packet length or if the length is too small for an IP packet. This log-message is generated whenever a packet, traversing the router, is dropped because it is fragmented, stateful inspection is turned ON on the packet's transmit or receive interface, and deny-
fragment option is enabled. This log-message is generated whenever a packet traversing the router is dropped because the packet cannot be sent without frag-
mentation, but the do not fragment bit is set. This log-message is generated whenever a packet, traversing the router or destined to the router itself, is dropped because no route is found to forward the packet. This log-message is generated whenever a packet, traversing the router or destined to the router itself, is dropped because the IP ver-
sion is not 4. This log-message is generated whenever a packet, traversing the router or destined to the router itself, is dropped because the packet is TCP/UDP packet and source IP Address and source port equals the destination IP Address and destination port. This log-message is generated whenever a SYN packet destined to the router's management interface is dropped because the number of SYN-sent and SYN-receives exceeds one half the number of allow-
able connections in the router. This log-message is generated whenever TCP packets destined to the router's telnet management interface are dropped due to over-
whelming receive data. 127 Administrators Handbook Access-related Log Messages 13. dropped - reas-
sembly timeout:
14. dropped - illegal size:
This log-message is generated whenever packets, traversing the router or destined to the router itself, are dropped because of reas-
sembly timeout. This log-message is generated whenever packets, traversing the router or destined to the router itself, are dropped during reassembly because of illegal packet size in a fragment. 128 Link: Internal Servers Your Gateway ships with an embedded Web server and support for a Telnet session, to allow ease of use for conguration and maintenance. The default ports of 80 for HTTP and 23 for Telnet may be reassigned. This is necessary if a pinhole is created to support applications using port 80 or 23. See Pinholes on page 82. for more information on Pinhole conguration. Web (HTTP) Server Port: To reassign the port number used to access the Motorola Netopia embedded Web server, change this value to a value greater than 1024. When you next access the embedded Motorola Netopia Web server, append the IP address with <port number>, (e.g. Point your browser to http://
210.219.41.20:8080). Telnet Server Port: To reassign the port number used to access your Motorola Netopia embedded Telnet server, change this value to a value greater than 1024. When you next access the Motorola Netopia embedded Telnet server, append the IP address with <port number>, (e.g. telnet 210.219.41.20 2323). You can also use the LAN-side address of the Gateway, 192.168.1.x:8100 to access the web server and 192.168.1.x:2323 to access the telnet server. The value of 0 for an internal server port will disable that server. You can disable Telnet or Web, but not both. If you disabled both ports, you would not be able to recongure the unit without pressing the reset button. 129 Administrators Handbook Link: Software Hosting Software Hosting allows you to host internet applications when NAT is enabled. User(PC) species the machine on which the selected software is hosted. You can host different games and software on different PCs. To select the games or software that you want to host for a specic PC, highlight the name(s) in the box on the left side of the screen. Click the Add button to select the software that will be hosted. To remove a game or software from the hosted list, highlight the game or software you want to remove and click the Remove button. 130 List of Supported Games and Software Age of Empires, v.1.0 Age of Empires: The Rise of Rome, v.1.0 Age of Wonders Asheron's Call Buddy Phone Baldur's Gate Calista IP Phone Citrix Metaframe/ICA Client Close Combat for Windows 1.0 Battleeld Communicator CART Precision Racing, v 1.0 Close Combat: A Bridge Too Far, v 2.0 Close Combat III: The Russian Front, v 1.0 Combat Flight Sim: WWII Europe Series, v 1.0 Combat Flight Sim 2: WWII Pacic Thr, v 1.0 Dark Reign Diablo II Server Dune 2000 F-16, Mig 29 FTP Half Life Hexen II HTTPS IMAP Client IPSec Kali Delta Force (Client and Server) Delta Force 2 Dialpad eDonkey 2000 F-22, Lightning 3 GNUtella DNS Server eMule Fighter Ace II H.323 compliant (Netmeeting, CUSeeME) Hellbender for Windows, v 1.0 Heretic II Hotline Server ICQ 2001b IMAP Client v.3 IPSec IKE KazaA HTTP ICQ Old Internet Phone Jedi Knight II: Jedi Outcast LimeWire Links LS 2000 Mech Warrior 3 Mech Warrior 4: Vengeance Medal of Honor Allied Assault Microsoft Flight Simulator 98 Microsoft Flight Simulator 2000 Microsoft Golf 1998 Edition, v 1.0 Microsoft Golf 1999 Edition Microsoft Golf 2001 Edition Midtown Madness, v 1.0 Monster Truck Madness, v 1.0 Monster Truck Madness 2, v 2.0 Motocross Madness 2, v 2.0 Motocross Madness, v 1.0 MSN Game Zone MSN Game Zone (DX7 an 8 Play) Need for Speed 3, Hot Pursuit Need for Speed, Porsche Net2Phone Outlaws PPTP Rainbow Six NNTP Operation FlashPoint pcAnywhere (incoming) Quake II RealAudio POP-3 Quake III Return to Castle Wolfenstein 131 Administrators Handbook Roger Wilco SMTP StarCraft Telnet Timbuktu Rogue Spear SNMP ShoutCast Server SSH server Stareet Command StarLancer, v 1.0 TFTP Tiberian Sun: Command and Conquer Total Annihilation Ultima Online Unreal Tournament Server Urban Assault, v 1.0 VNC, Virtual Network Comput-
ing Westwood Online, Command and Conquer Win2000 Terminal Server XBox Live Games Yahoo Messenger Chat Yahoo Messenger Phone ZNES Rename a User(PC) If a PC on your LAN has no assigned host name, you can assign one by clicking the Rename a User(PC) link. To rename a server, select the server from the pull-down menu. Then type a new name in the text box below the pull-down menu. Click the Update button to save the new name. NOTE:
The new name given to a server is only known to Software Hosting. It is not used as an identi-
er in other network functions, such as DNS or DHCP. 132 Link: Backup The purpose of Backup is to provide a recovery mechanism in the event that the primary connection fails. A failure can be either line loss, for example by central site switch failure or physical cable breakage, or loss of end-to-end connectivity. Detection of one of these failures causes the Gateway to switch from using the primary DSL WAN connection to an alternate gateway on the Ethernet LAN. In the event of a loss of primary connectivity you have the option of switching back to the primary circuit automatically once it has recovered its connection. A typical application would be to have a LAN connection from your Gateway to another Gateway that has, for example, another DSL modem or Gateway connection to the Internet, and designating the second gateway as the backup gateway. Should the primary WAN connection fail, trafc would be automatically redirected through your alternate gateway device to maintain Internet connectivity. When you click the Backup link, the Backup Options page appears. Select either manual or automatic from the pull-down menu. If you choose manual, you will have to switch manually to your alternate gateway in the event of a connection failure. For fail-over purposes, choose automatic. Manual options If you choose manual, you can also choose Auto Recovery. If you chose Auto Recovery, enter the number of minutes that the system should wait before it assumes that a connection has been re-established. This allows you to be sure that the primary WAN connection is well re-established before the Gateway switches back to it from the backup mode. Minimum value is one minute. Check the Enable Backup Gateway checkbox. From the pull-down menu, select the Interface Type to which you want to direct the backup con-
nection. If you have dened multiple VCCs, you can choose a secondary one. Otherwise, to backup to an IP device on the LAN, choose IP Address. The screen expands to allow you to enter an IP address of your Backup Gateway. Click the Submit button; click the Alert icon, and in the resulting page, click the Save and Restart link. 133 Administrators Handbook Once Backup is congured, a new eld appears in the Home Page. If your DSL WAN link fails, you can switch to your Backup Gateway by clicking the Force Backup button. Automatic options If you select automatic as your Backup option, the screen expands to allow you to enter additional informa-
tion. Failure Timeout (minutes 1-10) Enter the number of minutes you want the system to wait before the backup port becomes enabled in the event of primary line failure. This allows you to be sure the WAN connection is not merely briey interrupted before the gateway switches to backup mode. Ping Host 1 and Ping Host 2 Select address or name from the pull-down menu enter IP address(es) or resolvable DNS name(s) that the Gateway will ping. The Gateway will ping both addresses simulta-
neously at ve-second intervals, recording the ping responses from each host. The Gateway will proceed into backup mode only if neither of the congured remote hosts responds. Note:
For best results, enter an IP address and not a host name. If a host name is used it may not be resolvable, and may keep the interface down. While the Gateway is in backup mode, it will continue to ping both hosts via the primary interface. If either host responds to a ping and the Auto Recovery checkbox is checked, the Gateway will revert to the primary interface. If you chose Auto Recovery, select Recovery Timeout (minutes1-10). Enter the number of minutes you want the system to wait before attempting to switch back to the WAN connection. This allows you to be sure that the WAN connection is well re-established before the gateway switches back to it from the backup mode. Check the Enable Backup Gateway checkbox 134 From the pull-down menu, select the Interface Type to which you want to direct the backup connection. If you have dened multiple VCCs, you can choose a secondary one. Otherwise, to backup to an IP device on the LAN, choose IP Address. The screen expands to allow you to enter an IP address of your Backup Gateway. Click the Submit button; click the Alert icon, and in the resulting page, click the Save and Restart link. Once Backup is congured, a new eld appears in the Home Page. For automatic mode, it should not be necessary to switch to Backup manually. However, you can force a switch to your Backup Gateway by clicking the Force Backup button. 135 Administrators Handbook Link: Ethernet MAC Override
(Only available on models with Ethernet WAN interfaces, such as the 338X-series or VDSL Gateways.) Your Gateway comes with its own MAC (Media Access Control) address, also called the Hardware Address, a 12 character number unique for each LAN-connected device. Your Service Provider, particularly cable service providers, may instruct you to override the default MAC address. If so, check the Enable Override checkbox, and enter the new MAC address in the eld provided. 136 Link: Clear Options To restore the factory conguration of the Gateway, choose Clear Options. You may want to upload your conguration to a le before performing this function. You can do this using the upload command via the command-line interface. See the upload command on page 238. Clear Options does not clear feature keys or affect the software image. You must restart the Gateway for Clear Options to take effect. 137 Administrators Handbook Link: Time Zone When you click the Time Zone link, the Time Zone page appears. You can set your local time zone by selecting the number of hours your time zone is distant from Greenwich Mean Time (GMT +12 -12) from the pull-down menu. This allows you to set the time zone for access con-
trols and in general. 138 Security Button: Security The Security features are available by clicking on the Security toolbar button. Some items of this category do not appear when you log on as User. 139 Administrators Handbook Link: Passwords Access to your Gateway may be controlled through two optional user accounts, Admin and User. When you rst power up your Gateway, you create a password for the Admin account. The User account does not exist by default. As the Admin, a password for the User account can be entered or existing passwords changed. Create and Change Passwords. You can establish different levels of access security to protect your Motorola Netopia Gateway settings from unauthorized display or modication. Admin level privileges let you display and modify all settings in the Motorola Netopia Gateway (Read/
Write mode). The Admin level password is created when you rst access your Gateway. User level privileges let you display (but not change) settings of the Motorola Netopia Gateway. (Read Only mode) To prevent anyone from observing the password you enter, characters in the old and new password elds are not displayed as you type them. To display the Passwords window, click the Security toolbar button on the Home page. Use the following procedure to change existing passwords or add the User password for your Motorola Netopia Gateway:
1. Select the account type from the Username pull-down list. Choose from Admin or User. If you assigned a password to the Motorola Netopia Gateway previously, enter your current password in the Old Password eld. 2. 3. Enter your new password in the New Password eld. Motorola Netopias rules for a Password are:
140 It can have up to eight alphanumeric characters. It is case-sensitive. 4. Enter your new password again in the Conrm Password eld. You conrm the new password to verify that you entered it correctly the rst time. 5. When you are nished, click the Submit button to store your modied conguration in the Motorola Netopia units memory. Password changes are automatically saved, and take effect immediately. 141 Administrators Handbook Link: Firewall Use a Motorola Netopia Firewall BreakWater Basic Firewall. BreakWater delivers an easily selectable set of pre-congured rewall protection levels. For simple implementation these settings (comprised of three levels) are readily available through Motorola Netopias embedded web server interface. BreakWater Basic Firewalls three settings are:
ClearSailing ClearSailing, BreakWater's default setting, supports both inbound and outbound trafc. It is the only basic rewall setting that fully interoperates with all other Motorola Netopia software features. SilentRunning Using this level of rewall protection allows transmission of outbound trafc on pre-congured TCP/UDP ports. It disables any attempt for inbound trafc to identify the Gateway. This is the Internet equivalent of having an unlisted number. LANdLocked The third option available turns off all inbound and outbound trafc, isolating the LAN and disabling all WAN trafc. NOTE:
BreakWater Basic Firewall operates independent of the NAT functionality on the Gateway. Conguring for a BreakWater Setting Use these steps to establish a rewall setting:
1. Ensure that you have enabled the BreakWater basic rewall with the appropriate fea-
ture key. See See Use Motorola Netopia Software Feature Keys on page 187. for reference. NOTE: The rewall is now keyed on by default on the 2200-Series Gateways. 2. Click the Security toolbar button. 3. Click Firewall. 142 4. Click on the radio button to select the protection level you want. Click Submit. Changing the BreakWater setting does not require a restart to take effect. This makes it easy to change the setting on the y, as your needs change. TIPS for making your BreakWater Basic Firewall Selection Application Typical Internet usage
(browsing, e-mail) Multi-player online gaming Going on vacation Finished online use for the day Chatting online or using instant messaging Select this Level SilentRunning Other Considerations ClearSailing LANdLocked LANdLocked ClearSailing Set Pinholes; once dened, pinholes will be active whenever ClearSailing is set. Restore SilentRunning when nished. Protects your connection while your away. This protects you instead of disconnecting your Gateway connection. Set Pinholes; once dened, pinholes will be active whenever ClearSailing is set. Restore SilentRunning when nished. Basic Firewall Background As a device on the Internet, a Motorola Netopia Gateway requires an IP address in order to send or receive trafc. The IP trafc sent or received have an associated application port which is dependent on the nature of the connection request. In the IP protocol standard the following session types are common applications:
ICMP SNMP HTTP telnet FTP DHCP By receiving a response to a scan from a port or series of ports (which is the expected behavior according to the IP standard), hackers can identify an existing device and gain a potential opening for access to an internet-connected device. 143 Administrators Handbook To protect LAN users and their network from these types of attacks, BreakWater offers three levels of increasing protection. The following tables indicate the state of ports associated with session types, both on the WAN side and the LAN side of the Gateway. This table shows how inbound trafc is treated. Inbound means the trafc is coming from the WAN into the WAN side of the Gateway. Gateway: WAN Side BreakWater Setting >>
ClearSailing SilentRunning LANdLocked Port 20 21 23 23 80 80 67 68 161 Session Type Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled ftp data ftp control telnet external telnet Motorola Netopia server http external Enabled http Motorola Netopia server Enabled Enabled DHCP client Not Applicable DHCP server Enabled snmp ping (ICMP) Enabled
--------------Port State-----------------------
Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Enabled Not Applicable Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Not Applicable Disabled Disabled This table shows how outbound trafc is treated. Outbound means the trafc is coming from the LAN-side computers into the LAN side of the Gateway. Gateway: LAN Side BreakWater Setting >>
ClearSailing SilentRunning LANdLocked Session Type Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled ftp data ftp control telnet external telnet Motorola Netopia server http external Enabled http Motorola Netopia server Enabled DHCP client DHCP server snmp ping (ICMP) Not Applicable Enabled Enabled Enabled
--------------Port State-----------------------
Disabled Disabled Disabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Not Applicable Enabled Enabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Not Applicable Enabled Enabled WAN - Disabled LAN -
Local Address Only Port 20 21 23 23 80 80 67 68 161 144 NOTE:
The Gateways WAN DHCP client port in SilentRunning mode is enabled. This feature allows end users to continue using DHCP-served IP addresses from their Service Providers, while hav-
ing no identiable presence on the Internet. 145 Administrators Handbook Link: IPSec When you click on the IPSec link, the IPSec conguration screen appears. Your Gateway can support two mechanisms for IPSec tunnels:
IPSec PassThrough supports Virtual Private Network (VPN) clients running on LAN-connected comput-
ers. Normally, this feature is enabled. You can disable it if your LAN-side VPN client includes its own NAT interoperability option. Uncheck the Enable IPSec Passthrough checkbox. SafeHarbour VPN IPSec is a keyed feature that you must purchase. (See Install Key on page 187.) It enables Gateway-terminated VPN support. 146 SafeHarbour IPSec VPN SafeHarbour VPN IPSec Tunnel provides a single, encrypted tunnel to be terminated on the Gateway, mak-
ing a secure tunnel available for all LAN- connected users. This implementation offers the following:
Eliminates the need for VPN client software on individual PCs. Reduces the complexity of tunnel conguration. Simplies the ongoing maintenance for secure remote access. If you have purchased the SafeHarbour IPSec feature key, the IPSec conguration screen offers additional options. A typical SafeHarbour conguration is shown below:
147 Administrators Handbook Conguring a SafeHarbour VPN Use the following procedure to congure your SafeHarbour tunnel. 1. Obtain your conguration information from your network administrator. The tables Parameter Descriptions on page 151 describe the various parameters that may be required for your tunnel. Not all of them need to be changed from the defaults for every VPN tunnel. Consult with your network administrator. 2. Complete the Parameter Setup worksheet IPSec Tunnel Details Parameter Setup Work-
sheet on page 149. The worksheet provides spaces for you to enter your own specic values. You can print the page for easy reference. IPSec tunnel conguration requires precise parameter setup between VPN devices. The Setup Worksheet (page 149) facilitates setup and assures that the associated variables are identical. 148 Table 1: IPSec Tunnel Details Parameter Setup Worksheet Parameter Name Peer Internal Network Peer Internal Netmask NAT Enable PAT Address Negotiation Method Local ID Type Local ID Address/Value Local ID Mask Remote ID Type Remote ID Address/Value Remote ID Mask Pre-Shared Key Type Pre-Shared Key DH Group PFS Enable SA Encrypt Type SA Hash Type Invalid SPI Recovery Soft MBytes Soft Seconds Hard MBytes Hard Seconds IPSec MTU Xauth Enable Xauth Username Xauth Password Motorola Netopia Gateway Peer Gateway On/Off Main/Aggressive IP Address Subnet Hostname ASCII IP Address Subnet Hostname ASCII HEX ASCII 1/2/5 Off/On DES 3DES MD5 SHA1 Off/On 1 - 1000000 60 - 1000000 1 - 1000000 60 - 1000000 100 - 1500 (default) Off/On 149 Administrators Handbook 3. Be sure that you have SafeHarbour VPN enabled. SafeHarbour is a keyed feature. See Install Key on page 187. for information concerning installing Motorola Netopia Software Feature Keys. 4. Check the Enable SafeHarbour IPSec checkbox. Checking this box will automatically display the SafeHarbour IPSec Tunnel Entry parameters. Enter the initial group of tunnel parameters. Refer to your Setup Worksheet and the Parameter Descriptions on page 151 as required. 5. Enter the tunnel Name. This parameter does not have to match the peer/remote VPN device. 6. Enter the Peer External IP Address. 7. Select the Encryption Protocol from the pull-down menu. 8. Select the Authentication Protocol from the pull-down menu. 9. Click Add. The Tunnel Details page appears. 10.Make the Tunnel Details entries. Enter or select the required settings. Soft MBytes, Soft Seconds, Hard MBytes, and Hard Seconds values do not have to match the peer/remote VPN device. Refer to your IPSec Tunnel Details Parameter Setup Worksheet on page 149.) 11.Click Update. The Alert button appears. 12.Click the Alert button. 13.Click Save and Restart. Your SafeHarbour IPSec VPN tunnel is fully cong-
ured. 150 Parameter Descriptions The following tables describe SafeHarbours parameters that are used for an IPSec VPN tunnel congura-
tion:
Field Name Peer External IP Address Encryption Protocol Authentication Protocol Key Management Table 2: IPSec Configuration page parameters Description The Name parameter refers to the name of the congured tunnel. This is mainly used as an identier for the administrator. The Name parameter is an ASCII value and is limited to 31 characters. The tunnel name does not need to match the peer gateway. The Peer External IP Address is the public, or routable IP address of the remote gateway or VPN server you are establishing the tunnel with. Encryption protocol for the tunnel session. Parameter values supported include NONE or ESP. Authentication Protocol for IP packet header. The three parameter values are None, Encapsulating Security Payload (ESP) and Authentication Header
(AH) The Key Management algorithm manages the exchange of security keys in the IPSec protocol architecture. SafeHarbour supports the standard Inter-
net Key Exchange (IKE) Field Name Peer Internal Network Peer Internal Netmask NAT enable PAT Address Negotiation Method Local ID type Local ID Address/
Value Table 3: IPSec Tunnel Details page parameters Description The Name parameter refers to the name of the congured tunnel. This is mainly used as an identier for the administrator. The Name parameter is an ASCII value and is limited to 31 characters. The tunnel name does not need to match the peer gateway. The Peer Internal IP Network is the private, or Local Area Network (LAN) address of the remote gateway or VPN Server you are communicating with. The Peer Internal IP Netmask is the subnet mask of the Peer Internal IP Network. Turns NAT on or off for this tunnel. If NAT is enabled, this eld appears. You can specify a Port Address Trans-
lation (PAT) address or leave the default all-zeroes (if Xauth is enabled). If you leave the default. the address will be requested from the remote router and dynamically applied to the Gateway. This parameter refers to the method used during the Phase I key exchange, or IKE process. SafeHarbour supports Main or Aggressive Mode. Main mode requires 3 two-way message exchanges while Aggres-
sive mode only requires 3 total message exchanges. If Aggressive mode is selected as the Negotiation Method, this option appears. Selection options are: IP Address, Subnet, Hostname, ASCII If Aggressive mode is selected as the Negotiation Method, this eld appears. This is the local (Gateway-side) IP address (or Name Value, if Sub-
net or Hostname are selected as the Local ID Type). 151 Administrators Handbook Local ID Mask Remote ID Type Remote ID Address/Value Remote ID Mask Pre-Shared Key Type Pre-Shared Key DH Group PFS Enable SA Encrypt Type SA Hash Type Invalid SPI Recovery Soft MBytes Soft Seconds Hard MBytes Hard Seconds Table 3: IPSec Tunnel Details page parameters If Aggressive mode is selected as the Negotiation Method, and Subnet as the Local ID Type, this eld appears. This is the local (Gateway-side) sub-
net mask. If Aggressive mode is selected as the Negotiation Method, this option appears. Selection options are: IP Address, Subnet, Hostname, ASCII. If Aggressive mode is selected as the Negotiation Method, this eld appears. This is the remote (central-ofce-side) IP address (or Name Value, if Subnet or Hostname are selected as the Local ID Type). If Aggressive mode is selected as the Negotiation Method, and Subnet as the Remote ID Type, this eld appears. This is the remote (central-ofce-
side) subnet mask. The Pre-Shared Key Type classies the Pre-Shared Key. SafeHarbour sup-
ports ASCII or HEX types The Pre-Shared Key is a parameter used for authenticating each side. The value can be ASCII or Hex and a maximum of 64 characters. ASCII is case-
sensitive. Dife-Hellman is a public key algorithm used between two systems to determine and deliver secret keys used for encryption. Groups 1, 2 and 5 are supported. Perfect Forward Secrecy (PFS) is used during SA renegotiation. When PFS is selected, a Dife-Hellman key exchange is required. If enabled, the PFS DH group follows the IKE phase 1 DH group. SA Encryption Type refers to the symmetric encryption type. This encryp-
tion algorithm will be used to encrypt each data packet. SA Encryption Type values supported include DES and 3DES. SA Hash Type refers to the Authentication Hash algorithm used during SA negotiation. Values supported include MD5 and SHA1. N/A will display if NONE is chosen for Auth Protocol. Enabling this allows the Gateway to re-establish the tunnel if either the Motorola Netopia Gateway or the peer gateway is rebooted. Setting the Soft MBytes parameter forces the renegotiation of the IPSec Security Associations (SAs) at the congured Soft MByte value. The value can be congured between 1 and 1,000,000 MB and refers to data trafc passed. If this value is not achieved, the Hard MBytes parameter is enforced. This parameter does not need to match the peer gateway. Setting the Soft Seconds parameter forces the renegotiation of the IPSec Security Associations (SAs) at the congured Soft Seconds value. The value can be congured between 60 and 1,000,000 seconds. This param-
eter does not need to match the peer gateway. Setting the Hard MBytes parameter forces the renegotiation of the IPSec Security Associations (SAs) at the congured Hard MByte value. The value can be congured between 1 and 1,000,000 MB and refers to data trafc passed. This parameter does not need to match the peer gate-
way. Setting the Hard Seconds parameter forces the renegotiation of the IPSec Security Associations (SAs) at the congured Hard Seconds value. The value can be congured between 60 and 1,000,000 seconds This parame-
ter does not need to match the peer gateway. 152 Table 3: IPSec Tunnel Details page parameters Some ISPs require a setting of e.g. 1492 (or other value). The default 1500 is the most common and you usually dont need to change this unless otherwise instructed. Accepted values are from 100 1500. This is the starting value that is used for the MTU when the IPSec tunnel is installed. It species the maximum IP packet length for the encapsulated AH or ESP packets sent by the router. The MTU used on the IPSec connec-
tion will be automatically adjusted based on the MTU value in any received ICMP can't fragment error messages that correspond to IPSec trafc initi-
ated from the router. Normally the MTU only requires manual conguration if the ICMP error messages are blocked or otherwise not received by the router. Extended Authentication (XAuth), an extension to the Internet Key Exchange (IKE) protocol. The Xauth extension provides dual authentication for a remote users Motorola Netopia Gateway to establish a VPN, autho-
rizing network access to the users central ofce. IKE establishes the tun-
nel, and Xauth authenticates the specic remote user's Gateway. Since NAT is supported over the tunnel, the remote user network can have multi-
ple PCs behind the client Gateway accessing the VPN. By using XAuth, net-
work VPN managers can centrally control remote user authentication. Xauth authentication credentials. IPSec MTU Xauth Enable Xauth Username/
Password 153 Administrators Handbook Link: Stateful Inspection All computer operating systems are vulnerable to attack from outside sources, typically at the operating system or Internet Protocol (IP) layers. Stateful Inspection rewalls intercept and analyze incoming data packets to determine whether they should be admitted to your private LAN, based on multiple criteria, or blocked. Stateful inspection improves security by tracking data packets over a period of time, examining incoming and outgoing packets. Outgoing packets that request specic types of incoming packets are tracked; only those incoming packets constituting a proper response are allowed through the rewall. Stateful inspection is a security feature that prevents unsolicited inbound access when NAT is disabled. You can congure UDP and TCP no-activity periods that will also apply to NAT time-outs if stateful inspection is enabled on the interface. Stateful Inspection parameters are active on a WAN interface only if enabled on your Gateway. Stateful inspection can be enabled on a WAN interface whether NAT is enabled or not. Stateful Inspection Firewall installation procedure NOTE:
Installing Stateful Inspection Firewall is mandatory to comply with Required Services Security Policy - Residential Category module - Version 4.1 (specied by ICSA Labs) For more information please go to the following URL:
http://www.icsalabs.com/icsa/docs/html/communities/rewalls/pdf/4.1/baseline.pdf 1. Access the router through the web interface from the private LAN. DHCP server is enabled on the LAN by default. 2. The Gateways Stateful Inspection feature must be enabled in order to prevent TCP, UDP and ICMP packets destined for the router or the private hosts. This can be done by navigating to Expert Mode -> Security -> Stateful Inspection. UDP no-activity time-out: The time in seconds after which a UDP session will be terminated, if there is no trafc on the session. TCP no-activity time-out: The time in seconds after which an TCP session will be terminated, if there is no trafc on the session. 154 DoS Detect: If you check this checkbox, the Gateway will monitor packets for Denial of Service attacks. Exposed Addresses: The hosts specied in Exposed Addresses will be allowed to receive inbound traf-
c even if there is no corresponding outbound trafc. This is active only if NAT is disabled on a WAN interface. Stateful Inspection Options: Enable and congure stateful inspection on a WAN interface. Exposed Addresses You can specify the IP addresses you want to expose by clicking the Exposed addresses link. Add, Edit, or delete exposed addresses options are active only if NAT is disabled on a WAN interface. The hosts specied in exposed addresses will be allowed to receive inbound trafc even if there is no corre-
sponding outbound trafc. Start Address: Start IP Address of the exposed host range. End Address: End IP Address of the exposed host range Protocol: Select the Protocol of the trafc to be allowed to the host range from the pull-down menu. Options are Any, TCP, UDP, or TCP/UDP. Start Port: Start port of the range to be allowed to the host range. The acceptable range is from 1 -
65535 End Port: Protocol of the trafc to be allowed to the host range. The acceptable range is from 1 - 65535 155 Administrators Handbook You can add more exposed addresses by clicking the Add more Exposed Addresses link. A list of pre-
viously congured exposed addresses appears. Click the Add button to add a new range of exposed addresses. You can edit a previously congured range by clicking the Edit button, or delete the entry entirely by clicking the Delete button. All conguration changes will trigger the Alert Icon. Click on the Alert icon. This allows you to validate the conguration and reboot the Gateway. Click the Save and Restart link. You will be asked to conrm your choice, and the Gateway will reboot with the new conguration. 156 Stateful Inspection Options Stateful Inspection Parameters are active on a WAN interface only if you enable them on your Gateway. Stateful Inspection: To enable stateful inspection on this WAN interface, check the checkbox. Default Mapping to Router: This is disabled by default. This option will allow the router to respond to trafc received on this interface, for example, ICMP Echo requests. NOTE:
If Stateful Inspection is enabled on a WAN interface Default Mapping to Router must be enabled to allow inbound VPN terminations to the router. TCP Sequence Number Difference: Enter a value in this eld. This value represents the maximum sequence number difference allowed between subsequent TCP packets. If this number is exceeded, the packet is dropped. The acceptable range is 0 65535. A value of 0 (zero) disables this check. Deny Fragments: To enable this option, which causes the router to discard fragmented packets on this interface, check the checkbox. Open Ports in Default Stateful Inspection Installation Port Protocol Description LAN (Private) Interface WAN (Public) Interface 23 53 67 68 80 137 138 161 500 520 TCP UDP UDP UDP TCP UDP UDP UDP UDP UDP telnet DNS Bootps Bootpc HTTP Netbios-ns Netbios-dgm SNMP ISAKMP Router Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No No No No No No No 157 Administrators Handbook Firewall Tutorial General rewall terms Note:
Breakwater Basic Firewall (see BreakWater Basic Firewall on page 142) does not make use of the packet lter support and can be used in addition to ltersets Filter rule: A lter set is comprised of individual lter rules. Filter set: A grouping of individual lter rules. Firewall: A component or set of components that restrict access between a protected network and the Internet, or between two networks. Host: A workstation on the network. Packet: Unit of communication on the Internet. Packet lter: Packet lters allow or deny packets based on source or destination IP addresses, TCP or UDP ports. Port: A number that denes a particular type of service. Basic IP packet components All IP packets contain the same basic header information, as follows:
Source IP Address Destination IP Address Source Port Destination Port Protocol DATA 163.176.132.18 163.176.4.27 2541 80 TCP User Data This header information is what the packet lter uses to make ltering decisions. It is important to note that a packet lter does not look into the IP data stream (the User Data from above) to make ltering deci-
sions. Basic protocol types TCP: Transmission Control Protocol. TCP provides reliable packet delivery and has a retransmission mech-
anism (so packets are not lost). RFC 793 is the specication for TCP. 158 UDP: User Datagram Protocol. Unlike TCP, UDP does not guarantee reliable, sequenced packet delivery. If data does not reach its destination, UDP does not retransmit the data. RFC 768 is the specication for UDP. There are many more ports dened in the Assigned Addresses RFC. The table that follows shows some of these port assignments. Example TCP/UDP Ports TCP Port Service UDP Port Service 161 69 SNMP TFTP 20/21 23 25 80 144 FTP Telnet SMTP WWW News Firewall design rules There are two basic rules to rewall design:
What is not explicitly allowed is denied. and What is not explicitly denied is allowed. The rst rule is far more secure, and is the best approach to rewall design. It is far easier (and more secure) to allow in or out only certain services and deny anything else. If the other rule is used, you would have to gure out everything that you want to disallow, now and in the future. Firewall Logic Firewall design is a test of logic, and lter rule ordering is critical. If a packet is forwarded through a series of lter rules and then the packet matches a rule, the appropriate action is taken. The packet will not for-
ward through the remainder of the lter rules. For example, if you had the following lter set... Allow WWW access;
Allow FTP access;
Allow SMTP access;
Deny all other packets. and a packet goes through these rules destined for FTP, the packet would forward through the rst rule
(WWW), go through the second rule (FTP), and match this rule; the packet is allowed through. If you had this lter set for example.... Allow WWW access;
159 Administrators Handbook Allow FTP access;
Deny FTP access;
Deny all other packets. and a packet goes through these rules destined for FTP, the packet would forward through the rst lter rule (WWW), match the second rule (FTP), and the packet is allowed through. Even though the next rule is to deny all FTP trafc, the FTP packet will never make it to this rule. Implied rules With a given set of lter rules, there is an Implied rule that may or may not be shown to the user. The implied rule tells the lter set what to do with a packet that does not match any of the lter rules. An exam-
ple of implied rules is as follows:
Implied Meaning Y+Y+Y=N If all lter rules are YES, the implied rule is NO. N+N+N=Y If all lter rules are NO, the implied rule is YES. Y+N+Y=N If a mix of YES and NO lters, the implied rule is NO. Example lter set page This is an example of the Motorola Netopia lter set page:
160 Filter basics In the source or destination IP address elds, the IP address that is entered must be the network address of the subnet. A host address can be entered, but the applied subnet mask must be 32 bits
(255.255.255.255). Netopia Embedded Software Version 7.7.4 has the ability to compare source and destination TCP or UDP ports. These options are as follows:
Item No Compare Not Equal To Less Than What it means Does not compare TCP or UDP port Matches any port other than what is dened Anything less than the port dened Less Than or Equal Any port less than or equal to the port dened Equal Matches only the port dened Greater Than or Equal Matches the port or any port greater Greater Than Matches anything greater than the port dened Example network Input Packet Filter Internet Data IP 200.1.1.??
Example lters Example 1 Filter Rule:
200.1.1.0
(Source IP Network Address) 255.255.255.128
(Source IP Mask) Forward = No
(What happens on match) Incoming packet has the source address of 200.1.1.28 161 Administrators Handbook This incoming IP packet has a source IP address that matches the network address in the Source IP Address eld in Netopia Embedded Software Version 7.7.4. This will forward this packet. not Example 2 Filter Rule:
200.1.1.0
(Source IP Network Address) 255.255.255.128
(Source IP Mask) Forward = No
(What happens on match) Incoming packet has the source address of 200.1.1.184. This incoming IP packet has a source IP address that does not match the network address in the Source IP Address eld in Netopia Embedded Software Version 7.7.4. This rule forward this packet because the packet does not match. will Example 3 Filter Rule:
200.1.1.96
(Source IP Network Address) 255.255.255.240
(Source IP Mask) Forward = No
(What happens on match) Incoming packet has the source address of 200.1.1.184. This rule does not match and this packet will be forwarded. Example 4 Filter Rule:
200.1.1.96
(Source IP Network Address) 255.255.255.240
(Source IP Mask) Forward = No
(What happens on match) Incoming packet has the source address of 200.1.1.104. This rule does match and this packet will not be forwarded. Example 5 Filter Rule:
200.1.1.96
(Source IP Network Address) 255.255.255.255
(Source IP Mask) Forward = No
(What happens on match) Incoming packet has the source address of 200.1.1.96. This rule does match and this packet will not be forwarded. This rule masks off a single IP address. 162 Link: Packet Filter When you click the Packet Filter link the Filter Sets screen appears. Security should be a high priority for anyone administering a network connected to the Internet. Using packet lters to control network communications can greatly improve your networks security. The Packet Filter engine allows creation of a maximum of eight Filter Sets. Each Filter Set can consist of many rules. There can be a maximum of 32 lter rules in the system. WARNING:
Before attempting to congure lters and lter sets, please read and understand this entire section thoroughly. Motorola Netopia Gateways incorporating NAT have advanced security features built in. Improperly adding lters and lter sets increases the possibility of loss of communication with the Gateway and the Internet. Never attempt to congure lters unless you are local to the Gateway. Although using lter sets can enhance network security, there are disadvantages:
Filters are complex. Combining them in lter sets introduces subtle interactions, increasing the likelihood of implementation errors. Enabling a large number of lters can have a negative impact on performance. Processing of packets will take longer if they have to go through many checkpoints in addition to NAT. Too much reliance on packet lters can cause too little reliance on other security methods. Filter sets are a substitute for password protection, effective safeguarding of passwords, and general awareness of how your network may be vulnerable. not Netopia Embedded Software Version 7.7.4s packet lters are designed to provide security for the Internet connections made to and from your network. You can customize the Gateways lter sets for a variety of packet ltering applications. Typically, you use lters to selectively admit or refuse TCP/IP connections from certain remote networks and specic hosts. You will also use lters to screen particular types of connec-
tions. This is commonly called your network. rewalling Before creating lter sets, you should read the next few sections to learn more about how these powerful security tools work. Whats a lter and whats a lter set?
A lter is a rule that lets you specify what sort of data can ow in and out of your network. A particular lter can be either an input lterone that is used on data (packets) coming in to your network from the Inter-
netor an output lterone that is used on data (packets) going out from your network to the Internet. A lter set is a group of lters that work together to check incoming or outgoing data. A lter set can consist of a combination of input and output lters. 163 Administrators Handbook How lter sets work A lter set acts like a team of customs inspectors. Each lter is an inspector through which incoming and outgoing packages must pass. The inspectors work as a team, but each inspects every package individu-
ally. Each inspector has a specic task. One inspectors task may be to examine the destination address of all outgoing packages. That inspector looks for a certain destinationwhich could be as specic as a street address or as broad as an entire countryand checks each packages destination address to see if it matches that destination. A lter inspects data packets like a customs inspector scrutinizing packages. I N S P E C T O R D E FROM:
P P A V O TO:
R FROM:
TO:
FROM:
TO:
Filter priority packet no send to next filter discard
(delete) first filter match?
yes forward discard?
or forward to network Continuing the customs inspectors analogy, imagine the inspectors lined up to examine a package. If the package matches the rst inspectors criteria, the package is either rejected or passed on to its destination, depending on the rst inspectors particular orders. In this case, the package is never seen by the remaining inspectors. If the package does not match the rst inspectors criteria, it goes to the second inspector, and so on. You can see that the order of the inspectors in the line is very important. For example, lets say the rst inspectors orders are to send along all pack-
ages that come from Rome, and the second inspectors orders are to reject all packages that come from France. If a package arrives from Rome, the rst inspector sends it along without allowing the second inspector to see it. A package from Paris is ignored by the rst inspector, rejected by the second inspector, and never seen by the others. A package from London is ignored by the rst two inspectors, so its seen by the third inspector. In the same way, lter sets apply their lters in a particular order. The rst l-
ter applied can forward or discard a packet before that packet ever reaches any of the other lters. If the rst lter can neither forward nor discard the packet (because it cannot match any criteria), the second lter has a chance to forward or reject it, and so on. Because of this hierarchical structure, each lter is said to have a priority. The rst lter has the highest priority, and the last lter has the lowest priority. 164 How individual lters work As described above, a lter applies criteria to an IP packet and then takes one of three actions:
Forwards the packet to the local or remote network Blocks (discards) the packet Ignores the packet A lter forwards or blocks a packet only if it nds a match after applying its criteria. When no match occurs, the lter ignores the packet. A ltering rule The criteria are based on information contained in the packets. A lter is simply a rule that prescribes cer-
tain actions based on certain conditions. For example, the following rule qualies as a lter:
Block all Telnet attempts that originate from the remote host 199.211.211.17. This rule applies to Telnet packets that come from a host with the IP address 199.211.211.17. If a match occurs, the packet is blocked. Here is what this rule looks like when imple-
mented as a lter in Netopia Embedded Software Version 7.7.4:
To understand this particular lter, look at the parts of a lter. Parts of a lter A lter consists of criteria based on packet attributes. A typical lter can match a packet on any one of the following attributes:
The source IP address and subnet mask
(where the packet was sent from) The destination IP address and subnet mask
(where the packet is going) The TOS bit setting of the packet. Certain types of IP packets, such as voice or multime-
dia packets, are sensitive to delays introduced by the network. A delay-sensitive packet is identied by a special low-latency setting called the TOS bit. It is important for such packets to be received rapidly or the quality of service degrades. The type of higher-layer Internet protocol the packet is carrying, such as TCP or UDP Port numbers A lter can also match a packets port number attributes, but only if the lters protocol type is set to TCP or UDP, since only those protocols use port numbers. The lter can be congured to match the following:
The source port number (the port on the sending host that originated the packet) The destination port number (the port on the receiving host that the packet is destined for) 165 Administrators Handbook By matching on a port number, a lter can be applied to selected TCP or UDP services, such as Telnet, FTP, and World Wide Web. The following tables show a few common services and their associated port numbers:
Internet service TCP port Internet service TCP port FTP Telnet SMTP (mail) Gopher 20/21 Finger 23 25 70 World Wide Web News rlogin 79 80 144 513 Internet service UDP port Internet service UDP port Who Is World Wide Web SNMP 43 80 161 TFTP who 69 513 Port number comparisons A lter can also use a comparison option to evaluate a packets source or destination port number. The comparison options are:
No comparison of the port number specied in the lter with the packets port number. For the lter to match, the packets port number cannot equal the port number specied No Compare:
Not Equal To:
in the lter. Less Than:
ed in the lter. Less Than or Equal:
port number specied in the lter. Equal:
ter. Greater Than:
specied in the lter. Greater Than or Equal:
to the port number specied in the lter. For the lter to match, the packets port number must be less than the port number speci-
For the lter to match, the packets port number must be less than or equal to the For the lter to match, the packets port number must equal the port number specied in the l-
For the lter to match, the packets port number must be greater than the port number For the lter to match, the packets port number must be greater than or equal Other lter attributes There are three other attributes to each lter:
The lters order (i.e., priority) in the lter set Whether the lter is currently active Whether the lter is set to forward packets or to block (discard) packets 166 Putting the parts together When you display a lter set, its lters are displayed as rows in a table:
The tables columns correspond to each lters attributes:
#: The lters priority in the set. Filter number 1, with the highest priority, is rst in the table. Fwd: Shows whether the lter forwards (Yes) a packet or discards (No) it when theres a match. Src-IP: The packet source IP address to match. Src-Mask: The packet source subnet mask to match. Dst-IP: The packet destination IP address to match. Dst-Mask: The packet destination IP address to match. Protocol: The protocol to match. This can be entered as a number (see the table below) or as TCP or UDP if those protocols are used. Protocol Number to use Full name N/A ICMP TCP UDP 0 1 6 17 Ignores protocol type Internet Control Message Protocol Transmission Control Protocol User Datagram Protocol Src Port: The source port to match. This is the port on the sending host that originated the packet. Dst Port: The destination port to match. This is the port on the receiving host for which the packet is intended. NC: Indicates No Compare, where specied. Filtering example #1 Returning to our ltering rule example from above (see page 165), look at how a rule is translated into a l-
ter. Start with the rule, then ll in the lters attributes:
The rule you want to implement as a lter is:
Block all Telnet attempts that originate from the remote host 199.211.211.17. 167 Administrators Handbook The host 199.211.211.17 is the source of the Telnet packets you want to block, while the destination address is any IP address. How these IP addresses are masked determines what the nal match will be, although the mask is not displayed in the table that displays the lter sets (you set it when you create the lter). In fact, since the mask for the destination IP address is 0.0.0.0, the address for Destination IP address could have been anything. The mask for Source IP address must be 255.255.255.255 since an exact match is desired. Source IP Address = 199.211.211.17 Source IP address mask = 255.255.255.255 Destination IP Address = 0.0.0.0 Destination IP address mask = 0.0.0.0 Using the tables on page 166, nd the destination port and protocol numbers (the local Telnet port):
Protocol = TCP (or 6) Destination Port = 23 The lter should be enabled and instructed to block the Telnet packets containing the source address shown in step 2:
Forward = unchecked This four-step process is how we produced the following lter from the original rule:
168 Filtering example #2 Suppose a lter is congured to block all incoming IP packets with the source IP address of 200.233.14.0, regardless of the type of connection or its destination. The lter would look like this:
This lter blocks any packets coming from a remote network with the IP network address 200.233.14.0. The 0 at the end of the address signies any host on the class C IP network 200.233.14.0. If, for example, the lter is applied to a packet with the source IP address 200.233.14.5, it will block it. In this case, the mask, must be set to 255.255.255.0. This way, all packets with a source address of 200.233.14.x will be matched correctly, no matter what the nal address byte is. Note:
The protocol attribute for this lter is Any by default. This tells the lter to ignore the IP protocol or type of IP packet. Design guidelines Careful thought must go into designing a new lter set. You should consider the following guidelines:
Be sure the lter sets overall purpose is clear from the beginning. A vague purpose can lead to a faulty set, and that can actually make your network less secure. Be sure each individual lters purpose is clear. Determine how lter priority will affect the sets actions. Test the set (on paper) by determining how the lters would respond to a number of different hypothetical packets. Consider the combined effect of the lters. If every lter in a set fails to match on a particular packet, the packet is:
Forwarded if all the lters are congured to discard (not forward) Discarded if all the lters are congured to forward Discarded if the set contains a combination of forward and discard lters 169 Administrators Handbook An approach to using lters The ultimate goal of network security is to prevent unauthorized access to the network without compromis-
ing authorized access. Using lter sets is part of reaching that goal. Each lter set you design will be based on one of the following approaches:
That which is not expressly prohibited is permitted. That which is not expressly permitted is prohibited. It is strongly recommended that you take the latter, and safer, approach to all of your lter set designs. 170
1 | User Manual Part Two | Users Manual | 3.07 MiB | May 02 2008 |
Working with IP Filters and Filter Sets To work with lters and lter sets, begin by accessing the lter set pages. NOTE:
Make sure you understand how lters work before attempting to use them. Read the section Packet Filter on page 163. The procedure for creating and maintaining lter sets is as follows:
1. Add a new lter set. See Adding a lter set, below. 2. Create the lters for the new lter set. See Adding lters to a lter set on page 172. 3. Associate the lter set with either the LAN or WAN interface. See Associating a Filter Set with an Interface on page 176. The sections below explain how to execute these steps. Adding a lter set You can create up to eight different custom lter sets. Each lter set can contain up to 16 output lters and up to 16 input lters. There can be a maximum of 32 lter rules in the system. To add a new lter set, click the Add button in the Filter Sets page. The Add Filter Set page appears. Enter new name for the lter set, for example Filter Set 1. To save the lter set, click the Submit button. The saved lter set is empty (contains no lters), but you can return to it later to add lters (see Adding lters to a lter set). NOTE:
As you begin to build a lter set, and as you add lters, after your rst entry, the Alert icon 171 Administrators Handbook will appear in the upper right corner of the web page. It will remain until all of your changes are entered and validated. You need not immediately restart the Gateway until your l-
ter set is complete. See Associating a Filter Set with an Interface on page 176. Adding lters to a lter set There are two kinds of lters you can add to a lter set: input and output. Input lters check packets received from the Internet, destined for your network. Output lters check packets transmitted from your network to the Internet. packet WAN input filter packet LAN output filter The Motorola Netopia Router Packets in Netopia Embedded Software Version 7.7.4 pass through an input lter if they originate from the WAN and through an output lter if theyre being sent out to the WAN. The process for adding input and output lters is exactly the same. The main difference between the two involves their reference to source and destination. From the perspective of an input lter, your local network is the destination of the packets it checks, and the remote network is their source. From the perspective of an output lter, your local network is the source of the packets, and the remote network is their destination. Type of lter Source means Destination means Input lter The remote network The local network Output lter The local network The remote network To add a lter, select the Filter Set Name to which you will add a lter, and click the Edit button. 172 The Filter Set page appears. Note:
There are two Add buttons in this page, one for input lters and one for output lters. In this section, youll learn how to add an input lter to a lter set. Adding an output lter works exactly the same way, providing you keep the different source and destination perspectives in mind. 173 Administrators Handbook 1. To add a lter, click the Add button under Input Rules. The Input Rule Entry page appears. 2. If you want the lter to forward packets that match its criteria to the destination IP address, check the Forward checkbox. If Forward is unchecked, packets matching the lters criteria will be discarded. 3. Enter the Source IP address this lter will match on. You can enter a subnet or a host address. 4. Enter the Source Mask for the source IP address. This allows you to further modify the way the lter will match on the source address. Enter 0.0.0.0 to force the lter to match on all source IP addresses, or enter 255.255.255.255 to match the source IP address exclusively. 5. Enter the Destination IP Address this lter will match on. You can enter a subnet or a host address. 6. Enter the Destination Mask for the destination IP address. This allows you to further modify the way the lter will match on the destination address. Enter 0.0.0.0 to force the lter to match on all destination IP addresses. If desired, you can enter a TOS and TOS Mask value. See Policy-based Routing using Filtersets on page 177 for more information. 7. 8. Select Protocol from the pull-down menu: ICMP, TCP, UDP, Any, or the number of another IP transport protocol (see the table on page 167). If Protocol Type is set to TCP or UDP, the settings for port comparison will appear. These settings only take effect if the Protocol Type is TCP or UDP. 9. From the Source Port Compare pull-down menu, choose a comparison method for the lter to use on a packets source port number. Then select Source Port and enter the actual source port number to match on (see the table on page 166). 10. From the Destination Port Compare pull-down menu, choose a comparison method for the lter to use on a packets destination port number. Then select Destination Port and enter the actual destination port number to match on (see the table on page 166). 174 11. When you are nished conguring the lter, click the Submit button to save the lter in the lter set. Viewing lters To display the table of input or output lters, select the Filter Set Name in the Filter Set page and click the Add or Edit button. The table of lters in the ltersets appears. Modifying lters To modify a lter, select a lter from the table and click the Edit button. The Rule Entry page appears. The parameters in this page are set in the same way as the ones in the original Rule Entry page (see Adding l-
ters to a lter set on page 172). Deleting lters To delete a lter, select a lter from the table and click the Delete button. Moving lters To reorganize the lters in a lter set, select a lter from the table and click the Move Up or Move Down button to place the lter in the desired priority position. Deleting a lter set If you delete a lter set, all of the lters it contains are deleted as well. To reuse any of these lters in another set, before deleting the current lter set youll have to note their conguration and then recreate them. To delete a lter set, select the lter set from the Filter Sets list and click the Delete button. 175 Administrators Handbook Associating a Filter Set with an Interface Once you have created a lter set, you must associate it with an interface in order for it to be effective. Depending on its application, you can associate it with either the WAN (usually the Internet) interface or the LAN. To associate an lter set with the LAN, return to the Filter Sets page. Click the Ethernet 100BT link. The Ethernet 100BT page appears. From the pull-down menu, select the lter set to associate with this interface. Click the Submit button. The Alert icon will appear in the upper right corner of the page. Click the Alert icon to go to the validation page, where you can save your conguration. You can repeat this process for both the WAN and LAN interfaces, to associate your lter sets. When you return to the Filter Sets page, it will display your interface associations. 176 Policy-based Routing using Filtersets Netopia Embedded Software Version 7.7.4 offers the ability to route IP packets using criteria other than the destination IP address. This is called policy-based routing. You specify the routing criteria and routing information by using IP ltersets to determine the forwarding action of a particular lter. You specify a gateway IP address, and each packet matching the lter is routed according to that gateway address, rather than by means of the global routing table. In addition, the classier list in a lter includes the TOS eld. This allows you to lter on TOS eld settings in the IP packet, if you want. To use the policy-based routing feature, you create a lter that forwards the trafc. Check the Forward checkbox. This will display the Force Rout-
ing options. Check the Force Route checkbox. Enter the Gateway IP address in standard dotted-quad nota-
tion to which the trafc should be forwarded. You can enter Source and Destination IP Address(es) and Mask(s), Protocol Type, and Source and Destination Port ID(s) for the lter, if desired. TOS eld matching Netopia Embedded Software Version 7.7.4 includes two parameters for an IP lter: TOS and TOS Mask. Both elds accept values in the range 0 255. Certain types of IP packets, such as voice or multimedia packets, are sensitive to latency introduced by the network. A delay-sensitive packet is one that has the low-latency bit set in the TOS eld of the IP header. This means that if such packets are not received rapidly, the quality of service degrades. If you expect to route signicant amounts of such trafc you can congure your router to route this type of trafc to a gateway other than your normal gateway using this feature. The TOS eld matching check is consistent with source and destination address matching. If you check the Idle Reset checkbox, a match on this rule will keep the WAN connection alive by resetting the idle-timeout status. The Idle Reset setting is used to determine if a packet which matches the lter will cause an instant-on link to connect, if it is down; or reset its idle timer, if it is already up. For example, if you wanted ping trafc not to keep the link up, you would create a lter which forwards a ping, but with the Idle Reset checkbox unchecked. 177 Administrators Handbook Example: You want packets with the TOS low latency bit to go through VC 2 (via gateway 127.0.0.3 the Motorola Netopia Gateway will use 127.0.0.x, where x is the WAN port + 1) instead of your normal gateway. You would set up the lter as shown here. NOTE:
Default Forwarding Filter If you create one or more lters that have a matching action of forward, then action on a packet matching none of the lters is to block any trafc. Therefore, if the behavior you want is to force the routing of a certain type of packet and pass all others through the normal routing mechanism, you must congure one lter to match the rst type of packet and apply Force Routing. A subsequent lter is required to match and for-
ward all other packets. Management IP trafc If the Force Routing lter is applied to source IP addresses, it may inadvertently block commu-
nication with the router itself. You can avoid this by preceding the Force Routing lter with a l-
ter that matches the destination IP address of the Gateway itself. 178 Link: Security Log Security Monitoring is a keyed feature. See page 187 for information concerning installing Motorola Neto-
pia Software Feature Keys. Security Monitoring detects security-related events, including common types of malicious attacks, and writes them to the security log le. Using the Security Monitoring Log You can view the Security Log at any time. Use the following steps:
1. Click the Security toolbar button. 2. Click the Security Log link. 3. Click the Show link from the Security Log tool bar. 4. An example of the Security Log is shown on the next page. 5. When a new security event is detected, you will see the Alert button. The Security Alert remains until you view the information. Clicking the Alert button will take you directly to a page showing the log. 179 Administrators Handbook Your Netopia Gateway has detected and successfully blocked an event that could have compromised the security of your network. Please refer to your customer documentation for a description of the logged event. Number of security log entries
5
Security alert type
Protocol type
IP source address Time at last attempt
Number of ports that were scanned :
Highest port Lowest port
1102 1108 1094 1099 1166 1167 1151 1160 1164 Port Scan TCP 143.137.137.14 Fri May 21 15:17:40 2004 (UTC) 9 1167 1094 Security alert type IP source address IP destination address Number of attempts Time at last attempt
Excessive Pings 143.137.137.92 143.137.199.8 90 Fri May 21 17:52:22 2004 (UTC)
Security alert type
Protocol type
IP source address Time at last attempt
Number of ports that were scanned :
Highest port
Lowest port
111 473 602 863 817 1994 805 395 5302 1670
(Only the first 10 ports are recorded.) Port Scan TCP 143.137.50.2 Fri May 21 17:51:37 2004 (UTC) 241 5302 73
Security alert type
Protocol type
IP source address Time at last attempt
Number of ports that were scanned :
Highest port Lowest port
583 1 1471 444 4133 811 5236 650 776 1492
(Only the first 10 ports are recorded.) Port Scan UDP 143.137.50.2 Fri May 21 17:52:43 2004 (UTC) 162 5236 1 Security alert type IP source address IP destination address Number of attempts Time at last attempt Illegal packet size
Illegal Packet Size (Ping of Death) 192.168.1.3 143.137.199.8 5 Fri May 21 18:05:33 2004 (UTC) 65740 The capacity of the security log is 100 security alert messages. When the log reaches capacity, subsequent messages are not captured, but they are noted in the log entry count. To reset this log, select Reset from the Security Monitor tool bar. The following message is displayed. The security log has been reset. 180 When the Security Log contains no entries, this is the response:
The security log is empty. Timestamp Background During bootup, to provide better log information and to support improved troubleshooting, a Motorola Neto-
pia Gateway acquires the National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) Universal Coordinated Time (UTC) reference signal, and then adjusts it for your local time zone. Once per hour, the Gateway attempts to re-acquire the NIST reference, for re-synchronization or initial acqui-
sition of the UTC information. Once acquired, all subsequent log entries display this date and time informa-
tion. UTC provides the equivalent of Greenwich Mean Time (GMT) information. If the WAN connection is not enabled (or NTP has been disabled), the internal clocking function of the Gate-
way provides log timestamps based on uptime of the unit. 181 Administrators Handbook Install Button: Install From the Install toolbar button you can Install new Operating System Software and Feature Keys as updates become available. On selected models, you can install a Secure Sockets Layer (SSL V3.0) certicate from a trusted Certica-
tion Authority (CA) for authentication purposes. If this feature is available on your Gateway, the Install Cer-
ticate link will appear in the Install page as shown. Otherwise, it will not appear. 182 Link: Install Software
(This link is not available on the 3342/3352 models, since rmware updates must be upgraded via the USB host driver. 3342N/3352N models are upgradeable by this procedsure.) This page allows you to install an updated release of the Motorola Netopia Firmware. Updating Your Gateways Motorola Netopia Firmware Version. You install a new operat-
ing system image in your unit from the Install Operating System Software page. For this process, the com-
puter you are using to connect to the Motorola Netopia Gateway must be on the same local area network as the Motorola Netopia Gateway. Step 1: Required Files Upgrading Netopia Embedded Software Version 7.7.4 requires a Motorola Netopia rmware image le. Background Firmware upgrade image les are posted periodically on the Motorola Netopia website. You can download the latest operating system software for your Gateway by accessing the following URL:
http://www.netopia.com/support/hardware/
Be sure to download the correct le for your particular Gateway. Different Gateway models have different rmware les. Also, be sure your ISP supports the version of rmware you want to use. 183 Administrators Handbook When you download your rmware upgrade from the Motorola Netopia website, be sure to download the latest User Guide PDF les. These are also posted on the Motorola Netopia website in the Documentation Center. Conrm Motorola Netopia Firmware Image Files The Motorola Netopia rmware Image le is specic to the model and the product identication number. 1. Conrm that you have received the appropriate Motorola Netopia Firmware Image le. 2. Save the Motorola Netopia Firmware image le to a convenient location on your PC. Step 2: Motorola Netopia rmware Image File Install the Motorola Netopia rmware Image To install the Motorola Netopia rmware in your Motorola Netopia Gateway from the Home Page use the following steps:
1. Open a web connection to your Motorola Netopia Gateway from the computer on your LAN. 2. Click the Install Software button on the Motorola Netopia Gateway Home page. The Install Operating System Software window opens. 3. Enter the lename into the text box by using one of these techniques:
The Motorola Netopia rmware le name begins with a shortened form of the version number and ends with the sufx .bin (for binary). Example: nta760.bin a. Click the Browse button, select the le you want, and click Open.
-or-
b. Enter the name and path of the software image you want to install in the text eld. 4. Click the Install Software button. The Motorola Netopia Gateway copies the image le from your computer and installs it into its memory storage. You see a progress bar appear on your screen as the image is copied and installed. 184 When the image has been installed, a success message displays. 5. When the success message appears, click the Restart button and conrm the Restart when you are prompted. Your Motorola Netopia Gateway restarts with its new image. Verify the Motorola Netopia Firmware Release To verify that the Motorola Netopia rmware image has loaded successfully, use the following steps:
1. Open a web connection to your Motorola Netopia Gateway from the computer on your LAN and return to the Home page. 185 Administrators Handbook 2. Verify your Motorola Netopia rmware release, as shown on the Home Page. This completes the upgrade process. 186 Link: Install Key You can obtain advanced product functionality by employing a software Feature Key. Software feature keys are specic to a Gateway's serial number. Once the feature key is installed and the Gateway is restarted, the new feature's functionality becomes enabled. Use Motorola Netopia Software Feature Keys Motorola Netopia Gateway users obtain advanced product functionality by installing a software feature key. This concept utilizes a specially constructed and distributed keycode (referred to as a feature key) to enable additional capability within the unit. Software feature key properties are specic to a units serial number; they will not be accepted on a plat-
form with another serial number. Once installed, and the Gateway restarted, the new features functionality becomes available. This allows full access to conguration, operation, maintenance and administration of the new enhancement. Obtaining Software Feature Keys Contact Motorola or your Service Provider to acquire a Software Feature Key. Procedure - Install a New Feature Key File With the appropriate feature keycode, use the steps listed below to enable a new function. 1. From the Home page, click the Install toolbar button. 2. Click Install Keys The Install Key File page appears. 3. Enter the feature keycode in the input Text Box. Type the full keycode in the Text Box. 187 Administrators Handbook 4. Click the Install Key button. 5. Click the Restart toolbar button. The Conrmation screen appears. 188 6. Click the Restart the Gateway link to conrm. To check your installed features:
7. Click the Install toolbar button. 8. Click the list of features link. The System Status page appears with the information from the features link displayed below. You can check that the feature you just installed is enabled. 189 Administrators Handbook Link: Install Certicate Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) is a protocol for transmitting private information over the Internet. SSL uses two keys to encrypt data: a public key known to everyone and a private or secret key known only to the recipient of the message. Netopia Embedded Software Version 7.7.4 uses SSL certicates for TR-069 support. SSL certicates are issued by trusted Certication Authorities (CAs). The CA digitally signs each certicate. Each client contains a list of trusted CAs. When an SSL handshake between a server and your Gateway occurs, the client veries that the server certicate was issued by a trusted CA. If the CA is not trusted, a warning will appear. Certicates installed in your Gateway and servers to which it connects verify to each other that communications between them are encrypted and private. Certicates are purchased from an issuing Certicate Authority, usually by your corporate IT department or other service provider, and provided to users for secure communications. You must obtain a certicate le before you can install it. 1. To install an SSL certicate, click the Install Certicate link. 190 The Install Certicate page appears. 2. Browse to the location where you have saved your certicate and select the le, or type the full path. 3. Click the Install Certicate button. 4. Restart your Gateway. 191 Administrators Handbook 192 CHAPTER 4 Basic Troubleshooting This section gives some simple suggestions for troubleshooting problems with your Gateways initial cong-
uration. Before troubleshooting, make sure you have read the Quickstart Guide;
plugged in all the necessary cables; and set your PCs TCP/IP controls to obtain an IP address automatically. 193 Administrators Handbook Status Indicator Lights The rst step in troubleshooting is to check the status indicator lights (LEDs) in the order outlined below. Motorola Netopia Gateway 2210 status indicator lights Power Ethernet DSL Internet LED Power Ethernet DSL Internet Action Green when power is on. Red if device malfunctions. Flashes Red when new embedded software is being installed. Solid green when connected. Flash green when there is activity on the LAN. Solid green when trained. Blinking green when no line is attached or when training. Solid green when Broadband device is connected. Flashes green for activity on the WAN port. If the physical link comes up, but PPP or DHCP fail, the LED turns red. 194 Motorola Netopia Gateway 2240N/2241N status indicator lights Power Ethernet USB DSL Internet LED Power Ethernet Action Green when power is on. Red if device malfunctions. Flashes Red when new embedded software is being installed. Solid green when connected. Flash green when there is activity on the LAN. USB
(Model 2241N only) Solid green when connected. Flash green when there is activity on the LAN. DSL Internet Solid green when trained. Blinking green when no line is attached or when training. Solid green when Broadband device is connected. Flashes green for activity on the WAN port. If the physical link comes up, but PPP or DHCP fail, the LED turns red. 195 Administrators Handbook Motorola Netopia Gateway 2246N status indicator lights Power Ethernet 1, 2, 3, 4 DSL Internet LED Power Action Green when power is on. Red if device malfunctions. Flashes Red when new embedded software is being installed. Ethernet 1, 2, 3, 4 Solid green when connected. Flash green when there is activity on the LAN. DSL Internet Solid green when trained. Blinking green when no line is attached or when training. Solid green when Broadband device is connected. Flashes green for activity on the WAN port. If the physical link comes up, but PPP or DHCP fail, the LED turns red. 196 Motorola Netopia Gateway 2247NWG status indicator lights Power Ethernet 1, 2, 3, 4 Wireless DSL Internet LED Power Action Green when power is on. Red if device malfunctions. Flashes Red when new embedded software is being installed. Ethernet 1, 2, 3, 4 Solid green when connected. Flash green when there is activity on the LAN. Wireless DSL Internet Flashes green when there is activity on the wireless LAN. Off if driver fails to initialize, or if wireless is disabled. Solid green when trained. Blinking green when no line is attached or when training. Solid green when Broadband device is connected. Flashes green for activity on the WAN port. If the physical link comes up, but PPP or DHCP fail, the LED turns red. 197 Administrators Handbook Motorola Netopia Gateway 3340(N), 3341(N), 3351(N) status indicator lights Ethernet Link Ethernet Traffic DSL Traffic DSL Sync USB Active Power LED Action Ethernet Link Solid green when connected. Ethernet Trafc Flashes green when there is activity on the LAN. DSL Trafc DSL Sync USB Active
(Model 3341N only) PPPoE Active
(Model 3340N only) Blinks green when trafc is sent/received over the WAN. Blinking green with no line attached or training, solid green when trained with the DSL line. Solid green when connected; otherwise, not lit. Solid green when PPPoE is negotiated; otherwise, not lit. Power Green when power is on. Red if device malfunctions. Flashes Red when new embedded software is being installed. 198 Motorola Netopia Gateway 3342/3342N, 3352/3352N status indicator lights USB:
Solid green when USB is connected otherwise, not lit DSL:
Blinking green with no line attached or training, solid green when trained with the DSL line. Special patterns:
Both LEDs are off during boot (power on boot or warm reboot). When the 3342/3352 successfully boots up, both LEDs ash green once. Both LEDs are off when the Host OS suspends the device, (e.g. Windows standby/reboot, device disabled, driver uninstalled, etc.) 199 Administrators Handbook Motorola Netopia Gateway 3346(N), 3356(N) status indicator lights LAN 1, 2, 3, 4 DSL Sync Power LED Power Action Green when power is on. Red if device malfunctions. Flashes Red when new embedded software is being installed. DSL Sync Blinking green with no line attached or training, solid green when trained with the DSL line. LAN 1, 2, 3, 4 Solid green when connected; Flash green when there is activity on the LAN. 200 Motorola Netopia Gateway 3347W, 3347(N)WG status indicator lights Wireless Link LAN 1, 2, 3, 4 DSL Sync Power LED Power Action Green when power is on. Red if device malfunctions. Flashes Red when new embedded software is being installed. DSL Sync Solid green when trained. Blinking green when no line is attached or when training. Flashes green for DSL trafc. Ethernet 1, 2, 3, 4 Solid green when connected. Flash green when there is activity on the LAN. Wireless Link Flashes green when there is activity on the wireless LAN. Off if driver fails to initialize, or if wireless is disabled. 201 Administrators Handbook Motorola Netopia Gateway MiAVo status indicator lights Wireless Ethernet 1, 2, 3, 4 DSL Power LED Power DSL
(DSL 1 & 2: ADSL2+
models only) Action Green when power is on. Red if device malfunctions. Flashes Red when new embedded software is being installed. Solid green when trained. Blinking green when no line is attached or when training. Flashes green for DSL trafc. Ethernet 1, 2, 3, 4 Solid green when connected. Flash green when there is activity on the LAN. Wireless Flashes green when there is activity on the wireless LAN. Off if driver fails to initialize, or if wireless is disabled. 202 Motorola Netopia Gateway 7346/56-series MiAVo status indicator lights Power Ethernet 1, 2, 3, 4 DSL LED Power Action Green when power is on. Red if device malfunctions. Flashes Red when new embedded software is being installed. Ethernet 1, 2, 3, 4 Solid green when connected. Flash green when there is activity on the LAN. DSL Solid green when trained. Blinking green when no line is attached or when training. Flashes green for DSL trafc. 203 Administrators Handbook LED Function Summary Matrix Unlit Solid Green Flashing Green Solid Red Flashing Red No power Power on N/A System failure Power USB Active DSL Sync DSL Trafc Ethernet Trafc No signal No signal No signal USB port con-
nected to PC DSL line synched with the DSLAM N/A No signal N/A Ethernet Link Internet No signal No signal Synched with Ether-
net card Broadband device is connected. Activity on the USB cable Attempting to train with DSLAM Activity on the DSL cable Activity on the Ethernet port N/A Activity on the WAN port. N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Physical link established, but PPP or DHCP fails. N/A Installing new embedded software N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Wireless Wireless is disabled. Wireless is enabled. Activity on the WLAN. If a status indicator light does not look correct, look for these possible problems:
LED State Possible problems 1. Make sure the power switch is in the ON position. 2. Make sure the power adapter is plugged into the 2200-, 3300- or 7000-series DSL Gate-
Power Unlit way properly. 3. Try a known good wall outlet. 4. Replace the power supply and/or unit. DSL Sync Unlit EN Link Unlit 1. Make sure the you are using the correct cable. The DSL cable is the thinner standard tele-
phone cable. 2. Make sure the DSL cable is plugged into the correct wall jack. 3. Make sure the DSL cable is plugged into the DSL port on the 2200-, 3300- or 7000-series DSL Gateway. 4. Make sure the DSL line has been activated at the central ofce DSLAM. 5. Make sure the 2200-, 3300- or 7000-series DSL Gateway is not plugged into a micro lter. Note: EN Link light is inactive if only using USB. 1. Make sure the you are using the Ethernet cable, not the DSL cable. The Ethernet cable is thicker than the standard telephone cable. 2. Make sure the Ethernet cable is securely plugged into the Ethernet jack on the PC. 3. If plugging a 2200-, 3300- or 7000-series DSL Gateway into a hub the you may need to plug into an uplink port on the hub, or use an Ethernet cross over cable. 4. Make sure the Ethernet cable is securely plugged into the Ethernet port on the 2200-, 3300- or 7000-series DSL Gateway. 5. Try another Ethernet cable if you have one available. 204 1. Make sure you have Ethernet drivers installed on the PC. 2. Make sure the PCs TCP/IP Properties for the Ethernet Network Control Panel is set to obtain an IP address via DHCP. 3. Make sure the PC has obtained an address in the 192.168.1.x range. (You may have changed the subnet addressing.) 4. Make sure the PC is congured to access the Internet over a LAN. 5. Disable any installed network devices (Ethernet, HomePNA, wireless) that are not being used to connect to the 2200-, 3300- or 7000-series DSL Gateway. Note: USB Active light is inactive if only using Ethernet. 1. Make sure you have USB drivers installed on the PC. 2. Make sure the PCs TCP/IP Properties for the USB Network Control Panel is set to obtain an IP address via DHCP. 3. Make sure the PC has obtained an address in the 192.168.1.x range. (You may have changed the subnet addressing.) EN Trafc Unlit USB Active Unlit 4. Make sure the PC is congured to access the Internet over a LAN. 5. Disable any installed network devices (Ethernet, HomePNA, wireless) that are not being used to connect to the 2200-, 3300- or 7000-series DSL Gateway. Unlit Launch a browser and try to browse the Internet. If the DSL Active light still does not ash, then proceed to Advanced Troubleshooting below. DSL Trafc Wireless Link Unlit Make sure your client PC(s) have their wireless cards correctly installed and congured. Check your client PC(s) TCP/IP settings to make sure they are receiving an IP address from the wireless Router. Check the Gateways log for wireless driver failure messages. 205 Administrators Handbook Factory Reset Switch
(not supported on some models; 3342/3342N/3352/3352N models do not have a reset switch) Lose your password? This section shows how to reset the Motorola Netopia Gateway so that you can access the conguration screens once again. NOTE: Keep in mind that all of your settings will need to be recongured. If you don't have a password, the only way to access the Motorola Netopia Gateway is the following:
1. Referring to the following diagram, nd the round Reset Switch opening. MiaVo DSL 4 LAN 2 3 1 Power Off/On Factory Reset Switch:
Push to clear all settings 3347W/3357W DSL 4 3 LAN 2 1 Power Off / On Factory Reset Switch:
Push to clear all settings 3341/3351 3 Ethernet 4 USB 2 DSL 1 Power On / Off Factory Reset Switch:
Push to clear all settings 3346/3356 4 3 LAN 2 1 Power Off / On DSL Factory Reset Switch:
Push to clear all settings 2247NWG DSL 4 3 ETHERNET 2 1 RESET POWER ON OFF Factory Reset Switch:
Push to clear all settings 2240N Factory Reset Switch: Push to clear all settings 2241N 2246N Factory Reset Switch:
Push to clear all settings 2. Carefully insert the point of a pen or an unwound paperclip into the opening. If you press the factory default button for less than 1/2 a second, the unit will continue to run as nor-
mal. If you press the factory default button for 1 second, when you release it, the Gateway will perform a fac-
tory reset, clear all settings and congurations, and reboot. Do not hold the button down too long (5 10 seconds). This will destroy any saved default settings as well. 206 CHAPTER 5 Advanced Troubleshooting Advanced Troubleshooting can be accessed from the Gateways Web UI. Point your browser to http://192.168.1.254. The main page displays the device status. (If this does not make the Web UI appear, then do a release and renew in Windows networking to see what the Gateway address really is.) 207 Administrators Handbook Home Page The home page displays basic information about the Gateway. This includes the ISP Username, Connection Status, Device Address, Remote Gateway Address, DNS-1, and DNS-2. If you are not able to connect to the Internet, verify the following:
Item Local WAN IP Address Remote Gateway Address Status of Connection ISP Username Device Address Description This is the negotiated address of the Gateways WAN interface. This address is usually dynamically assigned. This is the negotiated address of the remote router to which this Gate-
way is connected. Waiting for DSL is displayed while the Gateway is training. This should change to Up within two minutes. If not, make sure an RJ-11 cable is used, the Gateway is connected to the correct wall jack, and the Gateway is not plugged into a micro lter. No Connection is displayed if the Gateway has trained but failed the PPPoE login. This usually means an invalid user name or password. Go to Expert Mode and change the PPPoE name and password. Up is displayed when the ADSL line is synched and the PPPoE (or other connection method) session is established. Down is displayed if the line connection fails. This should be the valid PPPoE username. If not, go to Expert Mode and change to the correct username. This is the negotiated address of the Gateways WAN interface. This address is often dynamically assigned. Make sure this is a valid address. If this is not the correct assigned address, go to Expert Mode and ver-
ify the PPPoE address has not been manually assigned. 208 Item Device Gateway Primary DNS/
Secondary DNS Serial Number Ethernet Status USB Status Software Release Warranty Date Date & Time Description This is the negotiated address of the remote router. Make sure this is a valid address. If this is not the correct address, go to Expert Mode and verify the address has not been manually assigned. These are the negotiated DNS addresses. Make sure they are valid DNS addresses. (Secondary DNS is optional, and may validly be blank
(0.0.0.0).) If these are not the correct addresses, go to Expert Mode and verify the addresses have not been manually assigned. This is the unique serial number of your Gateway.
(if so equipped; not available on 3342/3342N/3352/3352N) This is the status of your Ethernet connection. If you are connecting via Ether-
net, it should be Up. This is the status of your USB connection (if equipped). If you are con-
necting via USB, it should be Up. This is the version number of the current embedded software in your Gateway. This is the date that your Gateway was installed and enabled. If this is blank, you likely lack a network connection, or your NTP server information is incorrect. NOTE: The Home Page may also display Wireless, VoIP or Backup status depending on model and conguration. See Wireless on page 53, VoIP on page 120, or Backup on page 133 for more information. If all of the above seem correct, then access Expert Mode by clicking the Expert Mode link. 209 Administrators Handbook Button: Troubleshoot Expert Mode Expert Mode has advanced troubleshooting tools that are used to pinpoint the exact source of a problem. Clicking the Troubleshoot tab displays a page with links to System Status, Network Tools, and Diagnostics. System Status: Displays an overall view of the system and its condition. Network Tools: Includes NSLookup, Ping and TraceRoute. Diagnostics: Runs a multi-layer diagnostic test that checks the LAN, WAN, PPPoE, and other connection issues. 210 Link: System Status In the system status screen, there are several utilities that are useful for troubleshooting. Some examples are given in the following pages. 211 Administrators Handbook Link: Ports: Ethernet The Ethernet port selection shows the trafc sent and received on the Ethernet interface. There should be frames and bytes on both the upstream and downstream sides. If there are not, this could indicate a bad Ethernet cable or no Ethernet connection. Below is an example:
Ethernet Driver Statistics - 10/100 Ethernet Type: 100BASET Port Status: Link up General:
Transmit OK : 7862 Receive OK : 4454 Tx Errors : 0 Rx Errors : 0 Rx CRC Errors : 0 Rx Frame Errors : 0 Upper Layers:
Rx No Handler : 0 Rx No Message : 0 Rx Octets : 975576 Rx Unicast Pkts : 4156 Rx Multicast Pkts : 203 Tx Discards : 0 Tx Octets : 2117992 Tx Unicast Pkts : 3789 Tx Multicast Pkts : 4073 Ethernet driver statistics - USB Port Status: Link down General:
Transmit OK : 0 Receive OK : 0 Tx Errors : 0 Rx Errors : 0 Tx Octets : 0 Rx Octets : 0 Ethernet driver statistics - 10/100 Ethernet Type: 100BASET Port Status: Link up General:
Transmit OK : 7863 Receive OK : 4458 Tx Errors : 0 Rx Errors : 0 Rx CRC Errors : 0 Rx Frame Errors : 0 Upper Layers:
Rx No Handler : 0 Rx No Message : 0 Rx Octets : 976327 Rx Unicast Pkts : 4159 Rx Multicast Pkts : 204 Tx Discards : 0 212 Link: Ports: DSL The DSL port selection shows the state of the DSL line, whether it is up or down and how many times the Gateway attempted to train. The state should indicate up for a working conguration. If it is not, check the DSL cable and make sure it is plugged in correctly and not connected to a micro lter. Below is an example:
ADSL Line State: Up ADSL Startup Attempts: 5 ADSL Modulation: DMT Datapump Version: 3.22 Downstream Upstream
SNR Margin: 18.6 14.0 dB Line Attenuation: 0.4 4.0 dB Errored Seconds: 14 3 Loss of Signal: 4 4 Loss of Frame: 0 0 CRC Errors: 0 0 Data Rate: 8000 800 213 Administrators Handbook Link: IP: Interfaces The IP interfaces selection shows the state and conguration information for your IP LAN and WAN inter-
faces. Below is an example:
IP interfaces:
Ethernet 100BT: ( up broadcast default rip-send v1 rip-receive v1 ) inet 192.168.1.1 netmask 255.255.255.0 broadcast 192.168.1.255 physical address 00-16-cb-39-a9-78 mtu 1500 PPP over Ethernet vcc1: ( up address-mapping broadcast default admin-disabled rip-send v1 rip-receive v1 ) inet 10.1.2.34 netmask 255.255.255.0 broadcast 10.1.2.1 physical address 00-15-bc-28-b8-67 mtu 1500 214 Link: DSL: Circuit Conguration The DSL Circuit Conguration screen shows the trafc sent and received over the DSL line as well as the trained rate (upstream and downstream) and the VPI/VCI. Verify trafc is being sent over the DSL line. If not, check the cabling and make sure the Gateway is not connected to a micro lter. Also verify the correct PVC is listed, which should be 0/35 (some providers use other values, such as 8/35. Check with your pro-
vider). If not go to the WAN setup and change the VPI/VCI to its correct value. Below is an example:
ATM port status : Up Rx data rate (bps) : 8000 Tx data rate (bps) : 800 ATM Virtual Circuits:
VCC # Type VPI VCI Encapsulation
1 PVC 8 35 PPP over Ethernet (LLC/SNAP encapsulation) ATM Circuit Statistics:
Rx Frames : 17092 Tx Frames : 25078 Rx Octets : 905876 Tx Octets : 1329134 Rx Errors : 0 Tx Errors : 0 Rx Discards : 0 Tx Discards : 0 No Rx Buffers : 0 Tx Queue Full : 0 215 Administrators Handbook Link: System Log: Entire The system log shows the state of the WAN connection as well as the PPPoE session. Verify that the PPPoE session has been correctly established and there are no failures. If there are error messages, go to the WAN conguration and verify the settings. The following is an example of a successful connection:
Message Log:
Mon Apr 16 10:48:22 2007 L3 KS: Using configured options found in flash Mon Apr 16 10:48:22 2007 L3 BOOT: Warm start v7.3r0 ----------------------------------
Mon Apr 16 10:48:22 2007 L3 IP address server initialization complete Mon Apr 16 10:48:22 2007 L4 BR: Using saved configuration options Mon Apr 16 10:48:22 2007 L4 BR: Netopia SOC OS version 7.3.0 (build r0) Mon Apr 16 10:48:22 2007 L4 BR: Netopia-3000/9495032 (Netopia-3000, rev 1), PID 1205 Mon Apr 16 10:48:22 2007 L4 BR: last install status: Firmware installed successfully Mon Apr 16 10:48:22 2007 L4 BR: memory sizes - 2048K Flash, 8192K RAM Mon Apr 16 10:48:22 2007 L3 BR: Starting kernel Mon Apr 16 10:48:22 2007 L3 AAL5: initializing service Mon Apr 16 10:48:22 2007 L4 ATM: Waiting for PHY layer to come up Mon Apr 16 10:48:22 2007 L3 POE: Initializing PPP over Ethernet service Mon Apr 16 10:48:22 2007 L4 POE: Binding to Ethernet (ether/vcc1) Mon Apr 16 10:48:22 2007 L3 BRDG: Configuring port (10/100BT-LAN) Mon Apr 16 10:48:22 2007 L3 BRDG: Bridge not enabled for WAN. Mon Apr 16 10:48:22 2007 L3 BRDG: Bridging from one WAN port to another is disabled Mon Apr 16 10:48:22 2007 L3 BRDG: Initialization complete Mon Apr 16 10:48:22 2007 L4 IP: Routing between WAN ports is disabled Mon Apr 16 10:48:22 2007 L4 IP: IPSec client pass through is enabled Mon Apr 16 10:48:22 2007 L4 IP: Address mapping enabled on interface PPP over Ethernet vcc1 Mon Apr 16 10:48:22 2007 L3 IP: Adding default gateway over PPP over Ethernet vcc1 Mon Apr 16 10:48:22 2007 L3 IP: Initialization complete Mon Apr 16 10:48:22 2007 L3 IPSec: initializing service Mon Apr 16 10:48:22 2007 L3 IPSec: No feature key available - service disabled Mon Apr 16 10:48:22 2007 L3 PPP: PPP over Ethernet vcc1 binding to PPPoE Mon Apr 16 10:48:22 2007 L3 PPP: PPP over Ethernet vcc1 Port listening for incoming PPP connection requests
. Mon Apr 16 10:48:22 2007 L4 RFC1483-1 up Mon Apr 16 10:48:22 2007 L3 Service-Name=ANY Mon Apr 16 10:48:22 2007 L3 Host-Uniq 00000001 Mon Apr 16 10:48:22 2007 L3 AC-Name=62011050058192-SMS1800 Mon Apr 16 10:48:22 2007 L3 Service-Name=ANY Mon Apr 16 10:48:22 2007 L3 lcp: LCP Send Config-Request+
Mon Apr 16 10:48:22 2007 L3 MAGIC 0x2dee0000+
Mon Apr 16 10:48:22 2007 L3 lcp: LCP Recv Config-Req:+
Mon Apr 16 10:48:22 2007 L3 MRU(1492) (ACK) AUTHTYPE(c223) (CHAP) (ACK) MAGICNUMBER Mon Apr 16 10:48:22 2007 L3 (4403604) (ACK) Mon Apr 16 10:48:22 2007 L3 lcp: returning Configure-Ack Mon Apr 16 10:48:22 2007 L3 chap: received challenge, id 1 Mon Apr 16 10:48:22 2007 L3 chap: received success, id 1 Mon Apr 16 10:48:22 2007 L3 ipcp: IPCP Config-Request+
Mon Apr 16 10:48:22 2007 L3 ADDR(0x0) DNS(0x0) DNS2(0x0) WINS(0x0) WINS2(0x0) Mon Apr 16 10:48:22 2007 L3 ipcp: IPCP Recv Config-Req:+
Mon Apr 16 10:48:22 2007 L3 ADDR(143.137.199.254) (ACK) Mon Apr 16 10:48:22 2007 L3 ipcp: returning Configure-ACK Mon Apr 16 10:48:22 2007 L3 ipcp: IPCP Config-Request+
Mon Apr 16 10:48:22 2007 L3 ADDR(0x0) DNS(0x0) DNS2(0x0) Mon Apr 16 10:48:22 2007 L3 ipcp: IPCP Config-Request+
Mon Apr 16 10:48:22 2007 L3 ADDR(0x8f89c702) DNS(0x8f89320a) DNS2(0x8f898909) Mon Apr 16 10:48:22 2007 L3 ipcp: negotiated remote IP address 143.137.199.254 Mon Apr 16 10:48:22 2007 L3 ipcp: negotiated IP address 143.137.199.2 Mon Apr 16 10:48:22 2007 L3 ipcp: negotiated TCP hdr compression off Mon Apr 16 10:48:22 2007 L3 NTP: Update system date & time Mon Apr 16 10:50:02 L4 TS: "admin" logging in on serial port 0 Mon Apr 16 10:50:02 L4 TS: "Admin" completed login: Full Read/Write access Mon Apr 16 10:50:02 L4 TS: "Admin" completed login: Full Read/Write access 216 Link: Diagnostics The diagnostics section tests a number of different things at the same time, including the DSL line, the Ethernet interface and the PPPoE session.
==== Checking LAN Interfaces Check Ethernet LAN connect : PASS Check IP connect to Ethernet (LAN) : PASS Pinging Gateway : PASS Check MAC-Bridge connect to Ethernet (LAN) : PASS
==== Checking DSL (WAN) Interfaces Check DSL Synchronization : PASS Check ATM Cell-Delineation : PASS ATM OAM Segment Ping through (vcc1) : WARNING
*** Don't worry, your service provider may not support this test ATM OAM End-To-End Ping through (vcc1) : WARNING
*** Don't worry, your service provider may not support this test Check Ethernet connect to AAL5 (vcc1) : PASS Check PPPOE connect to Ethernet (vcc1) : PASS Check PPP connect to PPPOE (vcc1) : PASS Check IP connect to PPP (vcc1) : PASS Pinging Gateway : PASS
==== Checking Miscellaneous Check DNS- Query for netopia.com : SKIPPED Ping DNS Server Primary IP Address : SKIPPED TEST DONE The following table summarizes the possible results. CODE PASS FAIL SKIPPED PENDING WARNING Description The test was successful. The test was unsuccessful. The test was skipped because a test on which it depended failed, or it was not sup-
ported by the service provider equipment to which it is connected, or it does not apply. The test timed out without producing a result. Try running the test again. The test was unsuccessful. The Service Provider equipment your Gateway connects to may not support this test. 217 Administrators Handbook Link: Network Tools Three test tools are available from this page. NSLookup - converts a domain name to its IP address and vice versa. Ping - tests the reachability of a particular network destination by sending an ICMP echo request and waiting for a reply. TraceRoute - displays the path to a destination by showing the number of hops and the router addresses of these hops. 1. To use the NSLookup capability, type an address (domain name or IP address) in the text box and click the NSLookup button Example: Show the IP Address for grosso.com. Server : controller2.netopia.com Address : 143.137.137.9 Name : www.grosso.com Address : 192.150.14.120 Result: The DNS Server doing the lookup is displayed in the Server: and Address: elds. If the Name Server can nd your entry in its table, it is displayed in the Name: and Address: elds. PING: The network tools section sends a PING from the Gateway to either the LAN or WAN to verify connec-
tivity. A PING could be either an IP address (163.176.4.32) or Domain Name (www.netopia.com). 2. To use the Ping capability, type a destination address (domain name or IP address) in the text box and click the Ping button. Example: Ping to grosso.com. 218 ping www.grosso.com Pinging 192.150.14.120 from local address 143.137.199.8 (timer gran. 100 ms)... Ping size: 100 Ping count: 5 ICMP echo reply from 192.150.14.120, 200 ms ICMP echo reply from 192.150.14.120, 100 ms No ping response. ICMP echo reply from 192.150.14.120, 100 ms ICMP echo reply from 192.150.14.120, 100 ms
--- 192.150.14.120 ping statistics ---
5 packets transmitted, 4 packets received, 20% packet loss Result: The host was reachable with four out of ve packets sent. 219 Administrators Handbook Below are some specic tests:
Action If PING is not successful, possible causes are:
From the Gateway's Network Tools page:
Ping the internet default gateway IP address Ping an internet site by IP address Ping an internet site by name From a LAN PC:
Ping the Gateways LAN IP address Ping the Gateways WAN IP address Ping the Gateways internet default gateway IP address Ping an internet site by IP address Ping an internet site by name DSL is down, DSL or ATM settings are incorrect; Gate-
ways IP address or subnet mask are wrong; gateway router is down. Gateways default gateway is incorrect, Gateways sub-
net mask is incorrect, site is down. DNS is not properly congured on the Gateway; cong-
ured DNS servers are down; site is down. IP address and subnet mask of PC are not on the same scheme as the Gateway; cabling or other connectivity issue. Default gateway on PC is incorrect. NAT is off on the Gateway and the internal IP addresses are private. PC's subnet mask may be incorrect, site is down. DNS is not properly congured on the PC, congured DNS servers are down, site is down. 3. To use the TraceRoute capability, type a destination address (domain name or IP address) in the text box and click the TraceRoute button. 220 Example: Show the path to the grosso.com site. traceroute www.grosso.com Traceroute to 192.150.14.120 from address 143.137.199.8 (timer gran. 100 ms)... 30 hops max, 56 byte packets 1 143.137.199.254 100 ms 100 ms 0 ms 2 143.137.50.254 100 ms 0 ms 0 ms 3 143.137.137.254 100 ms 0 ms 100 ms 4 141.154.96.161 0 ms 0 ms 100 ms 5 141.154.8.13 0 ms 100 ms 0 ms 6 4.24.92.97 0 ms 100 ms 0 ms 7 4.24.4.225 100 ms 0 ms 100 ms 8 4.24.7.121 0 ms 0 ms 100 ms 9 4.24.7.113 0 ms 100 ms 0 ms 10 4.24.6.50 100 ms 0 ms 100 ms 11 4.24.10.86 0 ms 100 ms 100 ms 12 4.24.6.234 0 ms 100 ms 0 ms 13 192.205.32.153 100 ms 0 ms 100 ms 14 12.123.1.122 100 ms 0 ms 100 ms 15 12.122.2.173 100 ms 100 ms 100 ms 16 12.122.2.153 100 ms 100 ms 100 ms 17 12.122.5.149 100 ms 200 ms 100 ms 18 12.123.12.189 100 ms 100 ms 200 ms 19 12.124.32.34 100 ms 100 ms 200 ms 20 192.150.14.120 100 ms ! 100 ms ! 100 ms !
Result: It took 20 hops to get to the grosso.com web site. 221 Administrators Handbook 222 CHAPTER 6 Command Line Interface The Motorola Netopia Gateway operating software includes a command line interface (CLI) that lets you access your Motorola Netopia Gateway over a telnet connection. You can use the command line interface to enter and update the units conguration settings, monitor its performance, and restart it. This chapter covers the following topics:
Overview on page 224 Starting and Ending a CLI Session on page 226 Using the CLI Help Facility on page 226 About SHELL Commands on page 227 SHELL Commands on page 228 About CONFIG Commands on page 240 CONFIG Commands on page 243 CONFIG Commands Remote ATA Conguration Commands on page 243 DSL Commands on page 245 Bridging Settings on page 246 DHCP Settings on page 248 DMT Settings on page 254 Domain Name System Settings on page 255 IGMP Settings on page 257 IP Settings on page 259 Queue Conguration on page 271 IPMaps Settings on page 277 Network Address Translation (NAT) Default Settings on page 278 Network Address Translation (NAT) Pinhole Settings on page 278 PPPoE /PPPoA Settings on page 279 SNMP Settings on page 297 PPPoE with IPoE Settings on page 282 Ethernet Port Settings on page 283 802.3ah Ethernet OAM Settings on page 284 Command Line Interface Preference Settings on page 285 Port Renumbering Settings on page 286 Security Settings on page 287 System Settings on page 298 Syslog on page 301 Wireless Settings (supported models) on page 303 VLAN Settings on page 311 VoIP settings on page 316 UPnP settings on page 321 DSL Forum settings on page 321 Backup IP Gateway Settings on page 323 223 Administrators Handbook Overview The CLI has two major command modes: SHELL and CONFIG. Summary tables that list the commands are provided below. Details of the entire command set follow in this section. Command arp atmping clear clear_certicate clear_log congure diagnose download etheroam exit help install license log loglevel netstat nslookup ping quit reset restart show start status telnet traceroute upload view voip who SHELL Commands Status and/or Description to send ARP request to send ATM OAM loopback to erase all stored conguration information to remove an SSL certicate that has been installed to erase all stored log info in ash memory to congure unit's options to run self-test to download cong le to show Ethernet OAM info to quit this shell to get more: help all or help help to download and program an image into ash to enter an upgrade key to add a feature to add a message to the diagnostic log to report or change diagnostic log level to show IP information to send DNS query for host to send ICMP Echo request to quit this shell to reset subsystems to restart unit to show system information to start subsystem to show basic status of unit to telnet to a remote host to send traceroute probes to upload cong le to show conguration information to show VoIP info to show who is using the shell 224 CONFIG Commands Command Verbs Status and/or Description delete help save script set validate view Keywords ata atm backup bridge dhcp dmt diffserv dns dslf-cpewan dslf-lanmgnt dynamic-dns ethernet ethernet-MAC-override igmp ip ip-maps nat-default pinhole ppp wan-over-ether preferences queue radius security servers snmp system upnp vdsl vlan wireless Delete conguration list data Help command option Save conguration data Print conguration data Set conguration data Validate conguration settings View conguration data ATA remote cong options ATM options (DSL only) Backup gateway options Bridge options Dynamic Host Conguration Protocol options DMT ADSL options Differentiated Services options Domain Name System options TR-069 CPE WAN management TR-064 LAN management Dynamic DNS client options Ethernet options Ethernet options IGMP conguration options TCP/IP protocol options IPmaps options Network Address Translation default options Pinhole options Peer-to-Peer Protocol options PPP over Ethernet options Shell environment settings bandwidth queueing options RADIUS Server options Security options Internal Server options SNMP management options Gateways system options UPnP options VDSL tuning options VLAN options Wireless LAN options Command Utilities top quit exit Go to top level of conguration mode Exit from conguration mode; return to shell mode Exit from conguration mode; return to shell mode 225 Administrators Handbook Starting and Ending a CLI Session Open a telnet connection from a workstation on your network. You initiate a telnet connection by issuing the following command from an IP host that supports telnet, for example, a personal computer running a telnet application such as NCSA Telnet. telnet <ip_address>
You must know the IP address of the Motorola Netopia Gateway before you can make a telnet connection to it. By default, your Motorola Netopia Gateway uses 192.168.1.254 as the IP address for its LAN inter-
face. You can use a Web browser to congure the Motorola Netopia Gateway IP address. Logging In The command line interface log-in process emulates the log-in process for a UNIX host. To logon, enter the username (either admin or user), and your password. Entering the administrator password lets you display and update all Motorola Netopia Gateway set-
tings. Entering a user password lets you display (but not update) Motorola Netopia Gateway settings. When you have logged in successfully, the command line interface lists the username and the security level associated with the password you entered in the diagnostic log. Ending a CLI Session You end a command line interface session by typing quit from the SHELL node of the command line inter-
face hierarchy. Saving Settings In CONFIG mode, the save command saves the working copy of the settings to the Gateway. The Gateway automatically validates its settings when you save and displays a warning message if the conguration is not correct. Using the CLI Help Facility The help command lets you display on-line help for SHELL and CONFIG commands. To display a list of the commands available to you from your current location within the command line interface hierarchy, enter help. To obtain help for a specic CLI command, type help <command>. You can truncate the help command to h or a question mark when you request help for a CLI command. 226 About SHELL Commands You begin in SHELL mode when you start a CLI session. SHELL mode lets you perform the following tasks with your Motorola Netopia Gateway:
Monitor its performance Display and reset Gateway statistics Issue administrative commands to restart Motorola Netopia Gateway functions SHELL Prompt When you are in SHELL mode, the CLI prompt is the name of the Motorola Netopia Gateway followed by a right angle bracket (>). For example, if you open a CLI connection to the Motorola Netopia Gateway named Netopia-3000/9437188, you would see Netopia-3000/9437188> as your CLI prompt. SHELL Command Shortcuts You can truncate most commands in the CLI to their shortest unique string. For example, you can use the truncated command q in place of the full quit command to exit the CLI. However, you would need to enter rese for the reset command, since the rst characters of reset are common to the restart command. The only commands you cannot truncate are restart and clear. To prevent accidental interruption of com-
munications, you must enter the restart and clear commands in their entirety. You can use the Up and Down arrow keys to scroll backward and forward through recent commands you have entered. Alternatively, you can use the !! command to repeat the last command you entered. 227 Administrators Handbook SHELL Commands Common Commands arp nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn Sends an Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) request to match the nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn IP address to an Ethernet hardware address. clear [yes]
Clears the conguration settings in a Motorola Netopia Gateway. If you do not use the optional yes qual-
ier, you are prompted to conrm the clear command. clear_certicate Removes an SSL certicate that has been installed. clear_log Erases the log information stored in ash if persistent logging is enabled. congure Puts the command line interface into Congure mode, which lets you congure your Motorola Netopia Gateway with Cong commands. Cong commands are described starting on page 225. diagnose Runs a diagnostic utility to conduct a series of internal checks and loopback tests to verify network connec-
tivity over each interface on your Motorola Netopia Gateway. The console displays the results of each test as the diagnostic utility runs. If one test is dependent on another, the diagnostic utility indents its entry in the console window. For example, the diagnostic utility indents the Check IP connect to Ethernet (LAN) entry, since that test will not run if the Check Ethernet LAN Connect test fails. Each test generates one of the following result codes:
CODE PASS FAIL SKIPPED PENDING Description The test was successful. The test was unsuccessful. The test was skipped because a test on which it depended failed, or because the test did not apply to your particular setup or model. The test timed out without producing a result. Try running the test again. download [server_address ] [lename] [conrm]
This command installs a le of conguration parameters into the Motorola Netopia Gateway from a TFTP
(Trivial File Transfer Protocol) server. The TFTP server must be accessible on your Ethernet network. 228 You can include one or more of the following arguments with the download command. If you omit argu-
ments, the console prompts you for this information. The server_address argument identies the IP address of the TFTP server from which you want to copy the Motorola Netopia Gateway conguration le. The filename argument identies the path and name of the conguration le on the TFTP server. If you include the optional conrm keyword, the download begins as soon as all information is entered. You can also download an SSL certicate le from a trusted Certication Authority (CA), on platforms that support SSL, as follows:
download [-cert] [server_address ] [lename] [conrm]
install [server_address] [lename] [conrm]
(Not supported on model 3342/3352) Downloads a new version of the Motorola Netopia Gateway operating software from a TFTP (Trivial File Transfer Protocol) server, validates the software image, and programs the image into the Motorola Neto-
pia Gateway memory. After you install new operating software, you must restart the Motorola Netopia Gateway. The server_address argument identies the IP address of the TFTP server on which your Motorola Neto-
pia Gateway operating software is stored. The filename argument identies the path and name of the operating software le on the TFTP server. If you include the optional keyword confirm, you will not be prompted to conrm whether or not you want to perform the operation. license [key]
This command installs a software upgrade key. An upgrade key is a purchased item, based on the serial number of the gateway. log message_string Adds the message in the message_string argument to the Motorola Netopia Gateway diagnostic log. loglevel [level]
Displays or modies the types of log messages you want the Motorola Netopia Gateway to record. If you enter the loglevel command without the optional level argument, the command line interface dis-
plays the current log level setting. You can enter the loglevel command with the level argument to specify the types of diagnostic mes-
sages you want to record. All messages with a level number equal to or greater than the level you specify are recorded. For example, if you specify loglevel 3, the diagnostic log will retain high-level informational messages (level 3), warnings (level 4), and failure messages (level 5). Use the following values for the level argument:
229 Administrators Handbook 1 or low Low-level informational messages or greater; includes trivial status messages. 2 or medium Medium-level informational messages or greater; includes status messages that can help monitor network trafc. 3 or high High-level informational messages or greater; includes status messages that may be signif-
icant but do not constitute errors. 4 or warning Warnings or greater; includes recoverable error conditions and useful operator infor-
mation. 5 or failure Failures; includes messages describing error conditions that may not be recover-
able. netstat -i Displays the IP interfaces for your Motorola Netopia Gateway. netstat -r Displays the IP routes stored in your Motorola Netopia Gateway. nslookup { hostname | ip_address }
Performs a domain name system lookup for a specied host. The hostname argument is the name of the host for which you want DNS information; for example, nslookup klaatu. The ip_address argument is the IP address, in dotted decimal notation, of the device for which you want DNS information. ping [-s size] [-c count]{ hostname | ip_address }
Causes the Motorola Netopia Gateway to issue a series of ICMP Echo requests for the device with the specied name or IP address. The hostname argument is the name of the device you want to ping; for example, ping ftp.neto-
pia.com. The ip_address argument is the IP address, in dotted decimal notation, of the device you want to locate. If a host using the specied name or IP address is active, it returns one or more ICMP Echo replies, conrming that it is accessible from your network. The -s size argument lets you specify the size of the ICMP packet. The -c count argument lets you specify the number of ICMP packets generated for the ping request. Values greater than 250 are truncated to 250. You can use the ping command to determine whether a hostname or IP address is already in use on your network. You cannot use the ping command to ping the Motorola Netopia Gateways own IP address. quit Exits the Motorola Netopia Gateway command line interface. 230 reset arp Clears the Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) cache on your unit. reset atm Resets the Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) statistics. reset cdmode This command will set up one boot ag so that the next time a 3342N/3352N restarts or reboots (power cycle), the Gateway will boot into CD-ROM mode instead of Gateway mode. This command is only for the 3342N/3352N. If the Gateway is not a 3342N/3352N this command does nothing but returns the message: "CD mode is not supported on this platform."
reset crash Clears crash-dump information, which identies the contents of the Motorola Netopia Gateway registers at the point of system malfunction. reset dhcp server Clears the DHCP lease table in the Motorola Netopia Gateway. reset diffserv Resets the Differentiated Services (diffserv) statistics. reset enet [ all ]
Resets Ethernet statistics to zero. Resets individual LAN switch port statistics as well as wireless and WAN Ethernet statistics (where applicable). reset heartbeat Restarts the heartbeat sequence. reset ipmap Clears the IPMap table (NAT). reset log Rewinds the diagnostic log display to the top of the existing Motorola Netopia Gateway diagnostic log. The reset log command does not clear the diagnostic log. The next show log command will display infor-
mation from the beginning of the log le. 231 Administrators Handbook reset security-log Clears the security monitoring log to make room to capture new entries. reset wan-users [all | ip-address]
This function disconnects the specied WAN User to allow for other users to access the WAN. This function is only available if the number of WAN Users is restricted and NAT is on. Use the all parameter to discon-
nect all users. If you logon as Admin you can disconnect any or all users. If you logon as User, you can only disconnect yourself. reset wan This function resets WAN interface statistics. reset wepkeys This function allows you to force your wireless WEP key settings back to the default values, if there are default values. For example, on some models, the WEP keys are based on the serial number. This allows you to get back those default settings if you have changed them without the need to reset the entire cong-
uration of the unit. restart [seconds]
Restarts your Motorola Netopia Gateway. If you include the optional seconds argument, your Motorola Netopia Gateway will restart when the specied number of seconds have elapsed. You must enter the complete restart command to initiate a restart. show all-info Displays all settings currently congured in the Motorola Netopia Gateway. show backup Displays the status of the Backup port, Up or Down, and reports the current port in use. show bridge interfaces Displays bridge interfaces maintained by the Motorola Netopia Gateway. show bridge table Displays the bridging table maintained by the Motorola Netopia Gateway. show cong Dumps the Motorola Netopia Gateways conguration script just as the script command does in cong mode. 232 show crash Displays the most recent crash information, if any, for your Motorola Netopia Gateway. show dhcp agent Displays DHCP relay-agent leases. show dhcp server leases Displays the DHCP leases stored in RAM by your Motorola Netopia Gateway. show diffserv Displays the Differentiated Services and QoS values congured in the Motorola Netopia Gateway. show dslf device-association Displays LAN devices that conform with the TR111 Gateway requirement. It displays - IP Address, Manufac-
ture OUI and Serial number. show enet [ all ]
Displays Ethernet interface statistics maintained by the Motorola Netopia Gateway. Beginning with Firm-
ware Version 7.7, supports display of individual LAN switch port statistics as well as WAN Ethernet statis-
tics (where applicable). Example:
show enet status all 10/100 Ethernet 1 Port Status: Link down Transmit OK : 0 Transmit unicastpkts : 0 Receive OK : 0 Receive unicastpkts : 0 Tx Octets : 0 Rx Octets : 0 10/100 Ethernet 2 Port Status: Link down Transmit OK : 0 Transmit unicastpkts : 0 Receive OK : 0 Receive unicastpkts : 0 Tx Octets : 0 Rx Octets : 0 233 Administrators Handbook 10/100 Ethernet 3 Port Status: Link up Duplex: Full-duplex not active Speed: 100BASE-X Transmit OK : 3309 Transmit unicastpkts : 31 Receive OK : 5588 Receive unicastpkts : 1976 Tx Octets : 31 Rx Octets : 1976 10/100 Ethernet 4 Port Status: Link down Transmit OK : 0 Transmit unicastpkts : 0 Receive OK : 0 Receive unicastpkts : 0 Tx Octets : 0 Rx Octets : 0 show etheroam ah Displays OAM internal information, such as OAM mode, state, congurations, events and OAM statistics. show features Displays standard and keyed features installed in the Motorola Netopia Gateway. show group-mgmt Displays the IGMP Snooping Table. See IGMP (Internet Group Management Protocol) on page 100 for detailed explanation. show ip arp Displays the Ethernet address resolution table stored in your Motorola Netopia Gateway. show ip igmp Displays the contents of the IGMP Group Address table and the IGMP Report table maintained by your Motorola Netopia Gateway. show ip interfaces Displays the IP interfaces for your Motorola Netopia Gateway. show ip ipsec Displays IPSec Tunnel statistics. 234 show ip rewall Displays rewall statistics. show ip lan-discovery Displays the LAN Host Discovery Table of hosts on the wired or wireless LAN, and whether or not they are currently online. show ip routes Displays the IP routes stored in your Motorola Netopia Gateway. show ip state-insp Displays whether stateful inspection is enabled on an interface or not, exposed addresses and blocked packet statistics because of stateful inspection. show ipmap Displays IPMap table (NAT). show log Displays blocks of information from the Motorola Netopia Gateway diagnostic log. To see the entire log, you can repeat the show log command or you can enter show log all. show memory [all]
Displays memory usage information for your Motorola Netopia Gateway. If you include the optional all argument, your Motorola Netopia Gateway will display a more detailed set of memory statistics. show pppoe Displays status information for each PPPoE socket, such as the socket state, service names, and host ID values. show rtsp Displays RTSP ALG session activity data. show security-log Displays blocks of information from the Motorola Netopia Gateway security log. 235 Administrators Handbook show status Displays the current status of a Motorola Netopia Gateway, the device's hardware and software revision levels, a summary of errors encountered, and the length of time the Motorola Netopia Gateway has been running since it was last restarted. Identical to the status command. show summary Displays a summary of WAN, LAN, and Gateway information. show vlan Displays detail of VLAN status and statistics. Example:
show vlan Displaying vlan segment interfaces
==== vlan mode ====
==== segment 0 port masks ====
PortPort : 00000000-00000000 GlobalPort : 00000000-00000000 SumPort : 00000000-00000000
==== segment 1 port masks ====
PortPort : 00001006-00000001 GlobalPort : 00000000-00000000 SumPort : 00001006-00000001
==== segment 2 port masks ====
PortPort : 0000003c-00000000 GlobalPort : 00000000-00000000 SumPort : 0000003c-00000000
==== segment 3 port masks ====
PortPort : 00000000-00000000 GlobalPort : 00000000-00000000 SumPort : 00000000-00000000
==== segment 4 port masks ====
PortPort : 00000000-00000000 GlobalPort : 00000000-00000000 SumPort : 00000000-00000000
==== segment 5 port masks ====
PortPort : 00000000-00000000 GlobalPort : 00000000-00000000 SumPort : 00000000-00000000
==== segment 6 port masks ====
PortPort : 00000000-00000000 GlobalPort : 00000000-00000000 SumPort : 00000000-00000000
==== segment 7 port masks ====
PortPort : 00000000-00000000 GlobalPort : 00000000-00000000 236 SumPort : 00000000-00000000
==== segment 8 port masks ====
PortPort : 00000000-00000000 GlobalPort : 00000000-00000000 SumPort : 00000000-00000000
==== segment 9 port masks ====
PortPort : 00000000-00000000 GlobalPort : 00000000-00000000 SumPort : 00000000-00000000
==== segment 10 port masks ====
PortPort : 00000000-00000000 GlobalPort : 00000000-00000000 SumPort : 00000000-00000000
==== vlan active segment ====
Type : 1 Index : 1 Vid : 1 PortMask : 00001006-00000001 SwitchMask : 00000004 WirelessMask : 00001000
==== vlan active link ====
namePtr : eth-lan-uplink portType : 1 portIndex : 1 ifId : 45
==== vlan active link ====
namePtr : ethernet0/0 portType : 3 portIndex : 2 ifId : 46
==== vlan active link ====
namePtr : ssid1 portType : 5 portIndex : 12 ifId : 56
==== vlan active link ====
namePtr : eth-ip0 portType : 7 portIndex : 32 ifId : 76
==== vlan active segment ====
Type : 1 Index : 2 Vid : 3 PortMask : 0000003c-00000000 SwitchMask : 0000003c WirelessMask : 00000000
==== vlan active link ====
namePtr : ethernet0/0 portType : 3 portIndex : 2 ifId : 90 237 Administrators Handbook
==== vlan active link ====
namePtr : ethernet0/1 portType : 3 portIndex : 3 ifId : 91
==== vlan active link ====
namePtr : ethernet0/2 portType : 3 portIndex : 4 ifId : 92
==== vlan active link ====
namePtr : ethernet0/3 portType : 3 portIndex : 5 ifId : 93 show wireless [all]
Shows wireless status and statistics. show wireless clients [ MAC_address ]
Displays details on connected clients, or more details on a particular client if the MAC address is added as an argument. telnet { hostname | ip_address } [port]
Lets you open a telnet connection to the specied host through your Motorola Netopia Gateway. The hostname argument is the name of the device to which you want to connect; for example, telnet ftp.netopia.com. The ip_address argument is the IP address, in dotted decimal notation, of the device to which you want to connect. The port argument is the number of t he port over which you want to open a telnet session. traceroute ( ip_address | hostname ) Traces the routing path to an IP destination. upload [server_address] [lename] [conrm]
Copies the current conguration settings of the Motorola Netopia Gateway to a TFTP (Trivial File Transfer Protocol) server. The TFTP server must be accessible on your Ethernet network. The server_address argument identies the IP address of the TFTP server on which you want to store the Motorola Netopia Gateway settings. The filename argument identies the path and name of the conguration le on the TFTP server. If you include the optional confirm keyword, you will not be prompted to conrm whether or not you want to perform the operation. view cong Dumps the Motorola Netopia Gateways conguration just as the view command does in cong mode. 238 who Displays the names of the current shell and PPP users. WAN Commands atmping vccn [ segment | end-to-end ]
Lets you check the ATM connection reachability and network connectivity. This command sends ve Opera-
tions, Administration, and Maintenance (OAM) loopback calls to the specied vpi/vci destination. There is a ve second total timeout interval. Use the segment argument to ping a neighbor switch. Use the end-to-end argument to ping a remote end node. reset dhcp client release [ vcc-id ]
Releases the DHCP lease the Motorola Netopia Gateway is currently using to acquire the IP settings for the specied DSL port. The vcc-id identier is an index letter in the range B-I, and does not directly map to the VCC in use. Enter the reset dhcp client release command without the variable to see the letter assigned to each virtual circuit. reset dhcp client renew [ vcc-id ]
Releases the DHCP lease the Motorola Netopia Gateway is currently using to acquire the IP settings for the specied DSL port. The vcc-id identier is an index letter in the range B-I, and does not directly map to the VCC in use. Enter the reset dhcp client release without the variable to see the letter assigned to each virtual circuit. reset dsl Resets any open DSL connection. reset ppp vccn Resets the point-to-point connection over the specied virtual circuit. This command only applies to virtual circuits that use PPP framing. show atm [all]
Displays ATM statistics for the Motorola Netopia Gateway. The optional all argument displays a more detailed set of ATM statistics. show dsl [ all ]
Displays DSL port statistics, such as upstream and downstream connection rates and noise levels. 239 Administrators Handbook show ppp [{ stats | lcp | ipcp }]
Displays information about open PPP links. You can display a subset of the PPP statistics by including an optional stats, lcp, or ipcp argument for the show ppp command. start ppp vccn Opens a PPP link on the specied virtual circuit. About CONFIG Commands You reach the conguration mode of the command line interface by typing congure (or any truncation of congure, such as con or cong) at the CLI SHELL prompt. CONFIG Mode Prompt When you are in CONFIG mode, the CLI prompt consists of the name of the Motorola Netopia Gateway fol-
lowed by your current node in the hierarchy and two right angle brackets (>>). For example, when you enter CONFIG mode (by typing cong at the SHELL prompt), the Netopia-3000/9437188 (top)>>
prompt reminds you that you are at the top of the CONFIG hierarchy. If you move to the ip node in the CON-
FIG hierarchy (by typing ip at the CONFIG prompt), the prompt changes to Netopia-3000/9437188
(ip)>> to identify your current location. Some CLI commands are not available until certain conditions are met. For example, you must enable IP for an interface before you can enter IP settings for that interface. Navigating the CONFIG Hierarchy Moving from CONFIG to SHELL You can navigate from anywhere in the CONFIG hierarchy back to the SHELL level by entering quit at the CONFIG prompt and pressing RETURN. Netopia-3000/9437188 (top)>> quit Netopia-3000/9437188 >
Moving from top to a subnode You can navigate from the top node to a subnode by entering the node name (or the signicant letters of the node name) at the CONFIG prompt and pressing RETURN. For example, you move to the IP subnode by entering ip and pressing RETURN. Netopia-3000/9437188 (top)>> ip Netopia-3000/9437188 (ip)>>
As a shortcut, you can enter the signicant letters of the node name in place of the full node name at the CONFIG prompt. The signicant characters of a node name are the letters that uniquely identify the node. For example, since no other CONFIG node starts with b, you could enter one letter (b) to move to the bridge node. Jumping down several nodes at once You can jump down several levels in the CONFIG hierarchy by entering the complete path to a node. Moving up one node You can move up through the CONFIG hierarchy one node at a time by entering the up command. 240 Jumping to the top node You can jump to the top level from anywhere in the CONFIG hierarchy by entering the top command. Moving from one subnode to another You can move from one subnode to another by entering a partial path that identies how far back to climb. Moving from any subnode to any other subnode You can move from any subnode to any other subnode by entering a partial path that starts with a top-level CONFIG command. Scrolling backward and forward through recent commands You can use the Up and Down arrow keys to scroll backward and forward through recent commands you have entered. When the command you want appears, press Enter to execute it. Entering Commands in CONFIG Mode CONFIG commands consist of keywords and arguments. Keywords in a CONFIG command specify the action you want to take or the entity on which you want to act. Arguments in a CONFIG command specify the val-
ues appropriate to your site. For example, the CONFIG command set ip ethernet A ip_address consists of two keywords (ip, and ethernet A) and one argument (ip_address). When you use the command to congure your Gateway, you would replace the argument with a value appropriate to your site. For example:
set ip ethernet A 192.31.222.57 Guidelines: CONFIG Commands The following table provides guidelines for entering and formatting CONFIG commands. Command component Command verbs Keywords Argument Text Numbers IP addresses Rules for entering CONFIG commands CONFIG commands must start with a command verb (set, view, delete). You can truncate CONFIG verbs to three characters (set, vie, del). CONFIG verbs are case-insensitive. You can enter SET, Set, or set. Keywords are case-insensitive. You can enter Ethernet, ETHERNET, or ethernet as a keyword without changing its meaning. Keywords can be abbreviated to the length that they are differentiated from other keywords. Text strings can be as many as 64 characters long, unless otherwise speci-
ed. In some cases they may be as long as 255 bytes. Special characters are represented using backslash notation. Text strings may be enclosed in double () or single () quote marks. If the text string includes an embedded space, it must be enclosed in quotes. Special characters are represented using backslash notation. Enter numbers as integers, or in hexadecimal, where so noted. Enter IP addresses in dotted decimal notation (0 to 255). If a command is ambiguous or miskeyed, the CLI prompts you to enter additional information. For example, you must specify which virtual circuit you are conguring when you are setting up a Motorola Netopia Gateway. 241 Administrators Handbook Displaying Current Gateway Settings You can use the view command to display the current CONFIG settings for your Motorola Netopia Gate-
way. If you enter the view command at the top level of the CONFIG hierarchy, the CLI displays the settings for all enabled functions. If you enter the view command at an intermediate node, you see settings for that node and its subnodes. Step Mode: A CLI Conguration Technique The Motorola Netopia Gateway command line interface includes a step mode to automate the process of entering conguration settings. When you use the CONFIG step mode, the command line interface prompts you for all required and optional information. You can then enter the conguration values appropriate for your site without having to enter complete CLI commands. When you are in step mode, the command line interface prompts you to enter required and optional set-
tings. If a setting has a default value or a current setting, the command line interface displays the default value for the command in parentheses. If a command has a limited number of acceptable values, those val-
ues are presented in brackets, with each value separated by a vertical line. For example, the following CLI step command indicates that the default value is off and that valid entries are limited to on and off. option (off) [on | off]: on You can accept the default value for a eld by pressing the Return key. To use a different value, enter it and press Return. You can enter the CONFIG step mode by entering set from the top node of the CONFIG hierarchy. You can enter step mode for a particular service by entering set service_name. In stepping set mode (press Control-X <Return/Enter> to exit. For example:
Netopia-3000/9437188 (top)>> set system
... system name (Netopia-3000/9437188): Mycroft Diagnostic Level (High): medium Stepping mode ended. Validating Your Conguration You can use the validate CONFIG command to make sure that your conguration settings have been entered correctly. If you use the validate command, the Motorola Netopia Gateway veries that all required settings for all services are present and that settings are consistent. Netopia-3000/9437188 (top)>> validate Error: Subnet mask is incorrect Global Validation did not pass inspection!
You can use the validate command to verify your conguration settings at any time. Your Motorola Neto-
pia Gateway automatically validates your conguration any time you save a modied conguration. 242 CONFIG Commands This section describes the keywords and arguments for the various CONFIG commands. Remote ATA Conguration Commands Motorola Netopia rmware supports conguration of a maximum of four Motorola Netopia ATA proles, which are stored in the Gateways conguration database. When a Motorola Netopia ATA is discovered, the Gateway compares the MAC address of the ATA with one of the existing proles stored in the database. If there is a match, the conguration is downloaded to the Motorola Netopia ATA, and the ATA is restarted. Once the Motorola Netopia ATA is restarted, it comes up with the newly downloaded conguration. set ata prole [ 0... 3 ] ata-option [ on | off ]
Enables or disables the remote ATA conguration option for the specied ATA conguration prole to be stored in the Gateway. set ata prole [ 0... 3 ] ata-mac-addr MAC_addr Species the MAC address of the ATA for the specied conguration prole. set ata prole [ 0... 3 ] ata-qos-enable [ on | off ]
Enables or disables QoS for the specied prole. set ata prole [ 0... 3 ] ata-dhcpc-enable [ on | off ]
Enables or disables DHCP client service for the specied prole. set ata prole [ 0... 3 ] ata-dhcpc-hostname string Species a DHCP client hostname for the specied prole. set ata prole [ 0... 3 ] ata-dhcpc-vid-enable [ off | on ]
Enables or disables a DHCP client vendor ID for the specied prole. set ata prole [ 0... 3 ] ata-dhcpc-vid string Species a vendor ID for the specied prole when ata-dhcpc-vid-enable is on. set ata prole [ 0... 3 ] ata-static-wan-ip ip_addr Species a static WAN IP address for the specied prole. set ata prole [ 0... 3 ] ata-static-wan-subnet-mask subnet_mask Species a static WAN IP subnet mask for the specied prole. 243 Administrators Handbook set ata prole [ 0... 3 ] ata-static-wan-gateway ip_addr Species a static gateway WAN IP address for the specied prole. set ata prole [ 0... 3 ] ata-proxy-server ip_addr Species a SIP proxy server hostname or IP address for the specied prole. set ata prole [ 0... 3 ] ata-proxy-port port Species a SIP proxy server port, typically 5060, for the specied prole. set ata prole [ 0... 3 ] ata-registrar-server ip_addr Species a registrar server hostname or IP address for the specied prole. set ata prole [ 0... 3 ] ata-registrar-port port Species a registrar server port, typically 5060, for the specied prole. set ata prole [ 0... 3 ] ata-outproxy-server ip_addr Species an outbound proxy server hostname or IP address for the specied prole. set ata prole [ 0... 3 ] ata-outproxy-port port Species an outbound proxy server port, typically 5060, for the specied prole. set ata prole [ 0... 3 ] ata-auth-id value Species an authorization ID for the specied prole. set ata prole [ 0... 3 ] ata-user-name string Species the ISP-supplied user name for the specied prole. set ata prole [ 0... 3 ] ata-user-display-name string Species the a user display or screen name for the specied prole. set ata prole [ 0... 3 ] ata-user-password string Species the user password for the specied prole. 244 DSL Commands ATM Settings. You can use the CLI to set up each ATM virtual circuit. set atm option {on | off }
Enables the WAN interface of the Motorola Netopia Gateway to be congured using the Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) protocol. set atm [vcc n] option {on | off }
Selects the virtual circuit for which further parameters are set. Up to eight VCCs are supported; the maxi-
mum number is dependent on your Motorola Netopia Operating System tier and the capabilities that your Service Provider offers. set atm [vcc n] qos service-class { cbr | ubr | vbr }
Sets the Quality of Service class for the specied virtual circuit Constant (cbr), Unspecied (ubr), or Vari-
able (vbr) Bit Rate. ubr: No conguration is needed for UBR VCs. Leave the default value 0 (maximum line rate). cbr: One parameter is required for CBR VCs. Enter the Peak Cell Rate that applies to the VC. This value should be between 1 and the line rate. You set this value according to specications dened by your ser-
vice provider. vbr: Three parameters are required for VBR VCs. Enter the Peak Cell Rate, the Sustained Cell Rate, and the Maximum Burst Size that apply to the VC. You set these values according to specications dened by your service provider. set atm [vcc n] qos peak-cell-rate { 1 ...n }
If QoS class is set to cbr or vbr then specify the peak-cell-rate that should apply to the specied virtual circuit. This value should be between 1 and the line rate. The Peak Cell Rate (PCR) should be set to the maximum rate a PVC can oversubscribe its Sustained Cell Rate (SCR). The Peak Cell Rate (see below) must be less than, or equal to the raw WAN (DSL) bit rate. The Maximum Burst Size (MBS) is the number of cells that can be sent at the PCR rate, after which the PVC must fall back to the SCR rate. set atm [vcc n] qos sustained-cell-rate { 1 ...n }
If QoS class is set to vbr, then specify the sustained-cell-rate that should apply to the specied virtual cir-
cuit. This value should be less than, or equal to the Peak Cell Rate, which should be less than, or equal to the line rate. set atm [vcc n] qos max-burst-size { 1 ...n }
If QoS class is set to vbr then specify the max-burst-size that should apply to the specied virtual circuit. This value is the maximum number of cells that can be transmitted at the Peak Cell Rate after which the ATM VC transmission rate must drop to the Sustained Cell Rate. 245 Administrators Handbook set atm [vcc n] vpi { 0 ... 255 }
Select the virtual path identier (vpi) for VCC n. Your Service Provider will indicate the required vpi number. set atm [vcc n] vci { 0 ... 65535 }
Select the virtual channel identier (vci) for VCC n. Your Service Provider will indicate the required vci num-
ber. set atm [vccn] encap { ppp-vcmux | ppp-llc | ether-llc |
ip-llc | ppoe-vcmux | pppoe-llc }
Select the encapsulation mode for VCC n. The options are:
ppp-vcmux ppp-llc ether-llc ip-llc pppoe-vcmux pppoe-llc PPP over ATM, VC-muxed PPP over ATM, LLC-SNAP RFC-1483, bridged Ethernet, LLC-SNAP RFC-1483, routed IP, LLC-SNAP PPP over Ethernet, VC-muxed PPP over Ethernet, LLC-SNAP Your Service Provider will indicate the required encapsulation mode. set atm [vccn] pppoe-sessions { 1 ... 8 }
Select the number of PPPoE sessions to be congured for VCC 1, up to a total of eight. The total number of pppoe-sessions and PPPoE VCCs congured must be less than or equal to eight. Bridging Settings Bridging lets the Motorola Netopia Gateway use MAC (Ethernet hardware) addresses to forward non-TCP/
IP trafc from one network to another. When bridging is enabled, the Motorola Netopia Gateway maintains a table of up to 512 MAC addresses. Entries that are not used within 30 seconds are dropped. If the bridg-
ing table lls up, the oldest table entries are dropped to make room for new entries. Virtual circuits that use IP framing cannot be bridged. NOTE:
For bridging in the 3341 (or any model with a USB port), you cannot set the bridge option off, or bridge ethernet option off; these are on by default because of the USB port. 246 Common Commands set bridge sys-bridge {on | off }
Enables or disables bridging services in the Motorola Netopia Gateway. You must enable bridging ser-
vices within the Motorola Netopia Gateway before you can enable bridging for a specic interface. set bridge concurrent-bridging-routing {on | off }
Enables or disables Concurrent Bridging/Routing. set bridge dhcp-lterset "string"
Assigns a lterset named string to the bridge conguration. NOTE:
A lterset can only be congured for the bridge if the system bridge or concurrent bridging/rout-
ing is enabled. set bridge ethernet option { on | off }
Enables or disables bridging services for the specied virtual circuit using Ethernet framing. set bridge dsl vccn option { on | off }
Enables or disables bridging services for the specied interface. Specied interface must be part of a VLAN if bridge is turned on. Only RFC-1483 Bridged encapsulation is supported currently. show log command will show that WAN Bridge is enabled when at least one WAN interface is bridged. show ip interfaces and show bridge interfaces commands will show the interfaces that are not in bridged mode and that are in bridged modes, respectively. set bridge table-timeout [ 30 ... 6000 ]
Sets the timeout value for bridging table timeout. Default = 30 secs; range = 30 secs 6000 secs (.5100 mins). 247 Administrators Handbook DHCP Settings As a Dynamic Host Control Protocol (DHCP) server, your Motorola Netopia Gateway can assign IP addresses and provide conguration information to other devices on your network dynamically. A device that acquires its IP address and other TCP/IP conguration settings from the Motorola Netopia Gateway can use the information for a xed period of time (called the DHCP lease). Common Commands set dhcp option { off | server | relay-agent }
Enables or disables DHCP services in the Motorola Netopia Gateway. You must enable DHCP services before you can enter other DHCP settings for the Motorola Netopia Gateway. If you turn off DHCP services and save the new conguration, the Motorola Netopia Gateway clears its DHCP settings. set dhcp start-address ip_address If you selected server, species the rst address in the DHCP address range. The Motorola Netopia Gateway can reserve a sequence of up to 253 IP addresses within a subnet, beginning with the specied address for dynamic assignment. set dhcp end-address ip_address If you selected server, species the last address in the DHCP address range. set dhcp lease-time lease-time If you selected server, species the default length for DHCP leases issued by the Motorola Netopia Gateway. Enter lease time in dd:hh:mm:ss (day/hour/minute/second) format. set dhcp option-group name Species a name for one of up to eight DHCP Option Groups. Each Option Group can have a name of between 1 and 15 characters. The name is used in the DHCP lterset syntax to choose what group of gen-
options is to be served to a particular DHCP Client. See DHCP Generic Options on page 249 and DHCP Option Filtering on page 252. Option Groups refer to gen-options; they do not contain them. Deleting a gen-option from an option group does not delete the option. Adding a gen-option to an option-group does not preclude it from being added to another option-group. set dhcp default-option-group name Sets the option group specied by name as the default. set dhcp server-address ip_address If you selected relay-agent, species the IP address of the relay agent server. 248 set dhcp range [ 2... 8 ] start-address ip_address Species the starting IP address of DHCP range n when subnet n option is on. See Additional subnets on page 262. set dhcp range [ 2... 8 ] end-address ip_address Species the ending IP address of DHCP range n when subnet n option is on. See Additional subnets on page 262. set dhcp reserved ip-address x.x.x.x mac-address y-y-y-y-y-y If you selected server, reserves the specied IP address from the DHCP pool to the specied MAC address. These are list items; a total of 16 reserved addresses are supported. Secondary ranges will all make use of the dhcp lease-time value. DHCP Generic Options Beginning with Firmware Version 7.7.2, you can specify DHCP Generic Options which allow you to congure the content to be served for particular option numbers. set dhcp gen-option name name Species a DHCP generic option set named name of one to 15 characters. You can specify up to 20 gen-
options. Each can contain up to 100 bytes of data, up to a maximum of 912 bytes of options data total. An option will be served only if the client requests it. set dhcp gen-option option [ 1 255 ]
Species the DHCP option by number, 1 255. The following table shows the formats and sizes for known options, and whether or not you can congure a gen-option of that type. Option 0 1 2 3 - 11 12 13 14 - 15 16 17 18 19 - 20 21 22 Data Format Empty IP mask Unsigned 4 byte integer IP address list String (up to 100 characters) Unsigned 2 byte integer String (up to 100 characters) Unsigned 4 byte integer String (up to 100 characters) String (up to 100 characters) Flag IP address & mask list Unsigned 2 byte integer Data Size
(bytes) 0 4 4 Multiples of 4 N 2 N 4 N N 1 Multiples of 8 2 Can Congure No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 249 Administrators Handbook Option 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 - 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 - 42 43 44 - 45 46 47 48 - 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 - 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 - 67 68 - 76 Data Format Unsigned 1 byte integer Unsigned 4 byte integer Unsigned 2 byte integer list Unsigned 2 byte integer Flag IP address Flag IP address IP address and mask list Flag Unsigned 4 byte integer Flag Unsigned 1 byte integer Unsigned 4 byte integer Flag String (up to 100 characters) IP address list Vendor-specic IP address list Unsigned 1 byte integer String (up to 100 characters) IP address list IP address Unsigned 4 byte integer Unsigned 1 byte integer Unsigned 1 byte integer IP address String (up to 100 characters) String (up to 100 characters) Unsigned 2 byte integer Unsigned 4 byte integer String (up to 100 characters) String (up to 100 characters) String (up to 100 characters) Complex String (up to 100 characters) IP address list String (up to 100 characters) IP address list Data Size
(bytes) 1 4 Multiples of 2 2 1 4 1 4 Multiples of 8 1 4 1 1 4 1 N Multiples of 4 String Multiples of 4 1 N Multiples of 4 4 4 1 1 4 N N 2 4 N N N N N Multiples of 4 N Multiples of 4 Can Congure Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No Yes Yes No Yes Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes 250 Option Data Format 77 78 - 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 - 87 88 89 90 91 - 97 98 99 - 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 - 125 126 - 127 128 129 - 223 224 - 254 249 (note) 255 Pascal string list (length byte + data) Complex Empty Complex Sub-option list Complex Undened IP address list Unicode String Encoded DN list IP address list Complex Undened/Weakly dened String (up to 100 characters) Undened/Weakly dened Flag Unsigned 2 byte integer list IP address Encoded DN list 2 Encoded DN list or IPAddress list Complex Undened IP address list Undened/Weakly dened Private Use Microsoft uses this instead of 121 Empty Data Size
(bytes) N N 0 N N N
Multiples of 4 Multiples of 2 N Multiples of 4 N
N
1 Multiples of 2 4 N N N N Multiples of 4
N N 0 Can Congure Yes No No No Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No set dhcp gen-option data-type [ ascii | hex | dotted-decimal ]
Species the DHCP gen-option data type: ascii, hex or dotted-decimal. set dhcp gen-option data data Species the gen-option data. If the data-type is ascii, then any printable character + octal representations (e.g.\0007) and hex representations (e.g. \xA4). If the data-type is hex, then an even number of hex characters (e.g. 0123456789AbcdEf If the data-type is dotted-decimal, then a series of numbers between 0 and 255, separated by a period (.). IP addresses are generally represented in this form. 251 Administrators Handbook DHCP Option Filtering Beginning with Firmware Version 7.7, support for DHCP option ltering is provided via the lterset settings. set dhcp lterset name "string" rule n type [ dhcp-option | hw-address |
requested-option ]
Species a DHCP lterset named string as one of three possible types:
The rule can either specify an option and option contents, dhcp-option; a client hardware address range, hw-address; or an option the client is requesting, requested-option. For hw-address, you will need to enter start-address and end-address values; for the others a dhcp-option parameter must be set. By default a rule is of type dhcp-option, for backwards compatibility. set dhcp lterset name "string" rule n dhcp-option [ 0... 255 ]
Creates a DHCP lterset named string, for example settopbox, with rule number n. Up to two ltersets can be added. Your Gateway supports a single LAN DHCP server instance, but an addi-
tional lterset is available for use when bridging, to block undesired DHCP trafc. Up to 8 rules can be cre-
ated in the lterset, which are evaluated in order. dhcp-option determines which DHCP option should be compared. A typical value would be to use option 60 data for comparison, but allowing this value to be congured permits more exibility. set dhcp lterset name "settopbox" rule 1 type dhcp-option set dhcp lterset name "string" rule n match-action
[ pass | discard | continue ]
Assigns a match action to the lterset. If set to pass the match-pool address is shown. set dhcp lterset name "string" rule n absent-action
[ pass | discard | continue ]
Assigns an absent action to the lterset. If set to pass the absent-pool address is hidden. set dhcp lterset name "string" rule n match-option-group "option_group*"
Assigns the option group named option_group to match. set dhcp lterset name "string" rule n match-str "match_string*"
Assigns a match string to the lterset. The match-str string will be compared against the DHCP DISCOVER option data. This string can contain multiple * and ? wildcard substitutions. 252 set dhcp lterset name "string" rule n match-pool ip_address Species the start IP address of the range within a DHCP pool where that range will be used to allocate an address if the wildcard matches. The value 0.0.0.0 means regular processing; 255.255.255.255 means discard. set dhcp lterset name "string" rule n absent-pool ip_address Species the start IP address of the range within a DHCP pool where that range will be used to allocate an address if the option in the DHCP packet is not present. The value 0.0.0.0 means regular processing; 255.255.255.255 means discard. Example Netopia-3000/9450000 (dhcp)>> sc set dhcp option server set dhcp start-address 192.168.1.33 set dhcp end-address 192.168.1.63 set dhcp lease-time 01:00:00:00 set dhcp filterset name "settopbox" rule 1 dhcp-option 60 set dhcp filterset name "settopbox" rule 1 match-str "STB*"
set dhcp filterset name "settopbox" rule 1 match-pool 192.168.6.100 set dhcp filterset name "settopbox" rule 1 absent-pool 0.0.0.0 Netopia-3000/9450000 (dhcp)>>
set dhcp assigned-lterset "string"
Assigns the lterset named string created above to the DHCP conguration. 253 Administrators Handbook DMT Settings DSL Commands set dmt dsl-annex-support [ off | on ]
This controls whether other annex support (just as Annex M) is enabled. Default is off. set dmt type [ lite | dmt | ansi | multi | adsl2 | adsl2+ | readsl2 |
adsl2anxm | adsl2+anxm ]
Selects the type of Discrete Multitone (DMT) asynchronous digital subscriber line (ADSL) protocol to use for the WAN interface. The type value also supports the following settings on certain model units: adsl2, adsl2+, readsl2, adsl2anxm, adsl2+anxm. NOTE:
Some dmt type settings are now supported for many Annex B (335xN) platforms. 2200 Series and 33xxN Series models are supported. Currently, adsl2anxm and adsl2+anxm are not sup-
ported in Annex B. set dmt autoCong [ off | on ]
Enables support for automatic VPI/VCI detection and conguration. When set to on (the default), a pre-
dened list of VPI/VCI pairs are searched to nd a valid conguration for your ADSL line. Entering a value for the VPI or VCI setting will disable this feature. set dmt dmt dying-gasp [ default | off | on ]
Enables or disables Gateway dying gasp behavior in cases of power failure. Default is off. set dmt wiringMode [ auto | tip_ring | A_A1 ]
(not supported on all models) This command congures the wiring mode setting for your ADSL line. Select-
ing auto (the default) causes the Gateway to detect which pair of wires (inner or outer pair) are in use on your phone line. Specifying tip_ring forces the inner pair to be used; and A_A1 the outer pair. set dmt metallic-termination [ auto | disabled | always_on ]
(not supported on all models) This command allows you to apply a sealing current to dry DSL lines so that the wiring doesnt corrode. auto - The device will scan for standard telephone service (POTS). If it nds POTS, it disables metallic termination. If it does not nd POTS during the search period, then metallic termination is enabled. disabled - There is no POTS detection, and metallic termination is disabled. always_on - The device will scan for POTS for information only. Metallic termination is always enabled. 254 Domain Name System Settings Domain Name System (DNS) is an information service for TCP/IP networks that uses a hierarchical naming system to identify network domains and the hosts associated with them. You can identify a primary DNS server and one secondary server. Common Commands set dns domain-name domain-name Species the default domain name for your network. When an application needs to resolve a host name, it appends the default domain name to the host name and asks the DNS server if it has an address for the fully qualied host name. set dns primary-address ip_address Species the IP address of the primary DNS name server. set dns proxy-enable This allows you to disable the default behavior of acting as a DNS proxy. The default is on. set dns secondary-address ip_address Species the IP address of the secondary DNS name server. Enter 0.0.0.0 if your network does not have a secondary DNS name server. set dns congured-dns-priority [ 0 - 255 ]
Sets the congured DNS priority relative to acquired DNS. These server addresses may be acquired via DHCP (client), PPP, or statically congured. A DNS learned-server-priority is assigned to each congured interface. By default, congured DNSes have the highest priority (lowest number), then PPP-acquired DNSes, and DHCP-acquired DNSes have lowest priority (highest number). The default priorities for each type are:
Congured DNSes: 10 PPP-acquired: 20 DHCP-acquired: 30 255 Administrators Handbook Dynamic DNS Settings Dynamic DNS support allows you to use the free services of www.dyndns.org. Dynamic DNS automatically directs any public Internet request for your computer's name to your current dynamically-assigned IP address. This allows you to get to the IP address assigned to your Gateway, even though your actual IP address may change as a result of a PPPoE connection to the Internet. set dynamic-dns option [ off | dyndns.org ]
set dynamic-dns ddns-host-name myhostname.dyndns.org set dynamic-dns ddns-user-name myusername set dynamic-dns ddns-user-password myuserpassword Enables or disables dynamic DNS services. The default is off. If you specify dyndns.org, you must supply your hostname, username for the service, and password. Because different dynamic DNS vendors use different proprietary protocols, currently only www.dyndns.org is supported. 256 IGMP Settings NOTE: IGMP Version 3 is supported beginning with Firmware Version 7.7. See IGMP (Internet Group Management Protocol) on page 100 for detailed explanation. You can set the following options:
IGMP Snooping enables the Motorola Netopia Gateway to listen in to IGMP trafc. The Gateway discovers multicast group membership for the purpose of restricting multicast transmissions to only those ports which have requested them. This helps to reduce overall network trafc from streaming media and other bandwidth-intensive IP multicast applications. Robustness a way of indicating how sensitive to lost packets the network is. IGMP can recover from robustness minus 1 lost IGMP packet. The default value is 2. Query Interval the amount of time in seconds between IGMP General Query messages sent by the querier gateway. The default query interval is 125 seconds. Query Response Interval the maximum amount of time in tenths of a second that the IGMP router waits to receive a response to a General Query message. The default query response interval is 10 sec-
onds and must be less than the query interval. Unsolicited Report Interval the amount of time in seconds between repetitions of a particular com-
puters initial report of membership in a group. The default unsolicited report interval is 10 seconds. Querier Version select a version of the IGMP Querier: version 1, version 2, or version 3. If you know you will be communicating with other hosts that are limited to v1 or v2, for backward compatibility, select accordingly; otherwise, allow the default v3. NOTE:
IGMP Querier version is relevant only if the router is congured for IGMP forwarding. If any IGMP v1 routers are present on the subnet, the querier must use IGMP v1. The use of IGMP v1 must be administratively congured, since there is no reliable way of dynamically determining whether IGMP v1 routers are present on a network. IGMP forwarding is enabled per IP Prole and WAN Connection Prole. Last Member Query Interval the amount of time in tenths of a second that the IGMP gateway waits to receive a response to a Group-Specic Query message. The last member query interval is also the amount of time in seconds between successive Group-Specic Query messages. The default last mem-
ber query interval is 1 second (10 deci-seconds). Last Member Query Count the number of Group-Specic Query messages sent before the gateway assumes that there are no members of the host group being queried on this interface. The default last member query count is 2. Fast Leave set to off by default, fast leave enables a non-standard expedited leave mechanism. The querier keeps track of which client is requesting which channel by IP address. When a leave message is received, the querier can check its internal table to see if there are any more clients on this group. If there are none, it immediately sends an IGMP leave message to the upstream querier. Log Enable If set to on, all IGMP messages on both the LAN and the WAN will be logged. Wireless Multicast to Unicast conversion Only available if IGMP Snooping is enabled. If set to on, the Gateway replaces the multicast MAC-address with the physical MAC-address of the wireless client. If there is more than one wireless client interested in the same multicast group, the router will revert to multicasting the stream immediately. When one or more wireless clients leave a group, and the router 257 Administrators Handbook determines that only a single wireless client is interested in the stream, it will once again unicast the stream. set igmp snooping [ off | on ]
Enables IGMP Snooping. set igmp robustness value Sets IGMP robustness range: from 2 255. The default is 2. set igmp query-intvl value Sets the query-interval range: from 10 seconds 600 seconds, The default is 125 seconds. set igmp query-response-intvl value Sets the query-response interval range: from 5 deci-seconds (tenths of a second) 255 deci-seconds. The default is 100 deci-seconds. set igmp unsol-report-intvl value Sets the unsolicited report interval: the amount of time in seconds between repetitions of a particular com-
puters initial report of membership in a group. The default is 10 seconds. set igmp version [ 1 | 2 | 3 ]
Sets the IGMP querier version: version 1, version 2, or version 3. If you know you will be communicating with other hosts that are limited to v1, for backward compatibility, select 1; otherwise, allow the default 3. set igmp last-member-query-intvl value Sets the last member query interval: the amount of time in tenths of a second that the IGMP gateway waits to receive a response to a Group-Specic Query message. The last member query interval is also the amount of time in seconds between successive Group-Specic Query messages. The default is 1 second
(10 deci-seconds). set igmp last-member-query-count value Sets the last member query count: the number of Group-Specic Query messages sent before the gateway assumes that there are no members of the host group being queried on this interface. The default is 2. set igmp fast-leave [ off | on ]
Sets fast leave on or off. Set to off by default, fast leave enables a non-standard expedited leave mecha-
nism. The querier keeps track of which client is requesting which channel by IP address. When a leave mes-
sage is received, the querier can check its internal table to see if there are any more clients on this group. If there are none, it immediately sends an IGMP leave message to the upstream querier. 258 set igmp wireless-m2u [ on | off ]
This command allows you enable or disable wireless multicast-to-unicast if igmp snooping is set to on. set igmp log-enable [ on | off ]
If set to on, all IGMP messages on both the LAN and the WAN will be logged. Default is off. IP Settings You can use the command line interface to specify whether TCP/IP is enabled, identify a default Gateway, and to enter TCP/IP settings for the Motorola Netopia Gateway LAN and WAN ports. NOTE:
For the DSL platform you must identify the virtual PPP interface [vccn], a number from 1 to 8. Common Settings set ip option { on | off }
Enables or disables TCP/IP services in the Motorola Netopia Gateway. You must enable TCP/IP services before you can enter other TCP/IP settings for the Motorola Netopia Gateway. If you turn off TCP/IP ser-
vices and save the new conguration, the Motorola Netopia Gateway clears its TCP/IP settings. ARP Timeout Settings set ip arp-timeout [ 60 ... 6000 ]
Sets the timeout value for ARP timeout. Default = 600 secs (10 mins); range = 60 secs - 6000 secs (1 100 mins). DSL Settings set ip dsl vccn address ip_address Assigns an IP address to the virtual circuit. Enter 0.0.0.0 if you want the virtual circuit to obtain its IP address from a remote DHCP server. set ip dsl vccn broadcast broadcast_address Species the broadcast address for the TCP/IP network connected to the virtual circuit. IP hosts use the broadcast address to send messages to every host on your network simultaneously. The broadcast address for most networks is the network number followed by 255. For example, the broad-
cast address for the 192.168.1.0 network would be 192.168.1.255. 259 Administrators Handbook set ip dsl vccn netmask netmask Species the subnet mask for the TCP/IP network connected to the virtual circuit. The subnet mask speci-
es which bits of the 32-bit binary IP address represents network information. The default subnet mask for most networks is 255.255.255.0 (Class C subnet mask). set ip dsl vccn restrictions { admin-disabled | none }
Species restrictions on the types of trafc the Motorola Netopia Gateway accepts over the DSL virtual circuit. The admin-disabled argument means that access to the device via telnet, web, and SNMP is disabled. RIP and ICMP trafc is still accepted. The none argument means that all trafc is accepted. set ip dsl vccn addr-mapping { on | off }
Species whether you want the Motorola Netopia Gateway to use network address translation (NAT) when communicating with remote routers. Address mapping lets you conceal details of your network from remote routers. It also permits all LAN devices to share a single IP address. By default, address mapping is turned On. set ip dsl vccn auto-sensing [ off | dhcp/pppoe | pppoe/pppoa ]
Enables or disables DHCP/PPPoE or PPPoE/PPPoA autosensing on the specied interface. Setting this to DHCP/PPPoE enables automatic sensing of your WAN connection type: PPPoE or DHCP. The gateway attempts to connect using PPPoE rst. If the Gateway fails to connect after 60 seconds, it switches to DHCP. As soon as it can connect via DHCP, the Gateway chooses and sets DHCP as its default. Otherwise, after attempting to connect via DHCP for 60 seconds, the Gateway switches back to PPPoE. The Gateway will continue to switch back and forth in this manner until it successfully connects. Similarly, selecting PPPoE/PPPoA causes the Gateway to attempt to connect by trying these protocols in parallel, and using the rst one that is successful. set ip dsl vccn mcast-fwd [ on | off }
Enables or disables multi-cast forwarding on the specied interface. If set to on, this interface acts as an IGMP proxy host, and IGMP packets are transmitted and received on this interface on behalf of IGMP hosts on the LAN interface. set ip dsl vccn igmp-null-source-addr { on | off }
Species whether you want the Motorola Netopia Gateway to identify the source IP address of every IGMP packet transmitted from this interface as 0.0.0.0 when mcast-fwd is set to on. This complies with the requirements of TR-101, and removes the need for a publicly advertised IP address on the WAN interface. set ip dsl vccn unnumbered [ on | off }
Species whether you want the Motorola Netopia Gateway to have its WAN interface unnumbered, i.e. set to 0. unnumbered option is only available if the address is set to 0 for the interface. Enables or disables unnumbered IP addressing (where an address of 0 is allowed AND the DHCP client is disabled) on the spec-
ied interface. This setting applies to native IP as well as PPP interfaces to support running an IPoE inter-
face without an address. 260 set ip dsl vccn rip-send { off | v1 | v2 | v1-compat | v2-MD5 }
Species whether the Motorola Netopia Gateway should use Routing Information Protocol (RIP) broad-
casts to advertise its routing tables to other routers. RIP Version 2 (RIP-2) is an extension of the original Routing Information Protocol (RIP-1) that expands the amount of useful information in the RIP packets. While RIP-1 and RIP-2 share the same basic algorithms, RIP-2 supports several additional features, includ-
ing inclusion of subnet masks in RIP packets and implementation of multicasting instead of broadcasting
(which reduces the load on hosts which do not support routing protocols. RIP-2 with MD5 authentication is an extension of RIP-2 that increases security by requiring an authentication key when routes are advertised. Depending on your network needs, you can congure your Motorola Netopia Gateway to support RIP-1, RIP-2, or RIP-2MD5. If you specify v2-MD5, you must also specify a rip-send-key. Keys are ASCII strings with a maximum of 31 characters, and must match the other router(s) keys for proper operation of MD5 support. set ip dsl vccn rip-receive
{ off | v1 | v2 | v1-compat | v2-MD5 }
Species whether the Motorola Netopia Gateway should use Routing Information Protocol (RIP) broad-
casts to update its routing tables with information received from other routers. If you specify v2-MD5, you must also specify a rip-receive-key. Keys are ASCII strings with a maximum of 31 characters, and must match the other router(s) keys for proper operation of MD5 support. Ethernet LAN Settings set ip ethernet A option { on | off }
Enables or disables communications through the designated Ethernet port in the Gateway. You must enable TCP/IP functions for an Ethernet port before you can congure its network settings. set ip ethernet A address ip_address Assigns an IP address to the Motorola Netopia Gateway on the local area network. The IP address you assign to the local Ethernet interface must be unique on your network. By default, the Motorola Netopia Gateway uses 192.168.1.254 as its LAN IP address. set ip ethernet A broadcast broadcast_address Species the broadcast address for the local Ethernet interface. IP hosts use the broadcast address to send messages to every host on your network simultaneously. The broadcast address for most networks is the network number followed by 255. For example, the broad-
cast address for the 192.168.1.0 network would be 192.168.1.255. 261 Administrators Handbook set ip ethernet A netmask netmask Species the subnet mask for the local Ethernet interface. The subnet mask species which bits of the 32-
bit binary IP address represent network information. The default subnet mask for most networks is 255.255.255.0 (Class C subnet mask). set ip ethernet A restrictions { none | admin-disabled }
Species whether an administrator can open a telnet connection to a Motorola Netopia Gateway over an Ethernet interface (A = the LAN) to monitor and congure the unit. The admin-disabled argument prevents access to the device via telnet, web, and SNMP. By default, administrative restrictions are none on the LAN, but admin-disabled is set on the WAN. This means that, by default, an administrator can open, for example, a telnet connection from the LAN, but not the WAN. set ip ethernet A rip-send
{ off | v1 | v2 | v1-compat | v2-MD5 }
Species whether the Motorola Netopia Gateway should use Routing Information Protocol (RIP) broad-
casts to advertise its routing tables to other routers on your network. RIP Version 2 (RIP-2) is an extension of the original Routing Information Protocol (RIP-1) that expands the amount of useful information in the RIP packets. While RIP-1 and RIP-2 share the same basic algorithms, RIP-2 supports several additional fea-
tures, including inclusion of subnet masks in RIP packets and implementation of multicasting instead of broadcasting (which reduces the load on hosts which do not support routing protocols. RIP-2 with MD5 authentication is an extension of RIP-2 that increases security by requiring an authentication key when routes are advertised. If you specify v2-MD5, you must also specify a rip-send-key. Keys are ASCII strings with a maximum of 31 characters, and must match the other router(s) keys for proper operation of MD5 support. Depending on your network needs, you can congure your Motorola Netopia Gateway to support RIP-1, RIP-2, or RIP-2MD5. set ip ethernet A rip-receive { off | v1 | v2 | v1-compat | v2-MD5 }
Species whether the Motorola Netopia Gateway should use Routing Information Protocol (RIP) broad-
casts to update its routing tables with information received from other routers on your network. If you specify v2-MD5, you must also specify a rip-receive-key. Keys are ASCII strings with a maximum of 31 characters, and must match the other router(s) keys for proper operation of MD5 support. Additional subnets See DHCP Settings on page 248 for subnet range conguration commands. set ip ethernet A subnet [ 2 ... 8 ] option [ on | off ]
Enables or disables additional LAN subnets. Up to seven additional subnets may be congured. 262 set ip ethernet A subnet n address ip_address Species an IP address for the subnet n, when subnet n option is on. set ip ethernet A subnet n netmask netmask Species the subnet mask for the subnet n, when subnet n option is on. Default IP Gateway Settings set ip gateway option { on | off }
Species whether the Motorola Netopia Gateway should send packets to a default Gateway if it does not know how to reach the destination host. set ip gateway interface { ip-address | ppp-vccn }
Species how the Motorola Netopia Gateway should route information to the default Gateway. If you select ip-address, you must enter the IP address of a host on a local or remote network. If you specify ppp, the Motorola Netopia unit uses the default gateway being used by the remote PPP peer. IP-over-PPP Settings. Use the following commands to congure settings for routing IP over a virtual PPP interface. NOTE:
For a DSL platform you must identify the virtual PPP interface [vccn], a number from 1 to 8. set ip ip-ppp [vccn] option { on | off }
Enables or disables IP routing through the virtual PPP interface. By default, IP routing is turned on. If you turn off IP routing and save the new conguration, the Motorola Netopia Gateway clears IP routing set-
tings set ip ip-ppp [vccn] address ip_address Assigns an IP address to the virtual PPP interface. If you specify an IP address other than 0.0.0.0, your Motorola Netopia Gateway will not negotiate its IP address with the remote peer. If the remote peer does not accept the IP address specied in the ip_address argument as valid, the link will not come up. The default value for the ip_address argument is 0.0.0.0, which indicates that the virtual PPP interface will use the IP address assigned to it by the remote peer. Note that the remote peer must be congured to supply an IP address to your Motorola Netopia Gateway if you enter 0.0.0.0 for the ip_address argu-
ment. 263 Administrators Handbook set ip ip-ppp [vccn] peer-address ip_address Species the IP address of the peer on the other end of the PPP link. If you specify an IP address other than 0.0.0.0, your Motorola Netopia Gateway will not negotiate the remote peer's IP address. If the remote peer does not accept the address in the ip_address argument as its IP address (typically because it has been congured with another IP address), the link will not come up. The default value for the ip_address argument is 0.0.0.0, which indicates that the virtual PPP interface will accept the IP address returned by the remote peer. If you enter 0.0.0.0, the peer system must be con-
gured to supply this address. set ip ip-ppp [vccn] restrictions { admin-disabled | none }
Species restrictions on the types of trafc the Motorola Netopia Gateway accepts over the PPP virtual circuit. The admin-disabled argument means that access to the device via telnet, web, and SNMP is disabled. RIP and ICMP trafc is still accepted. The none argument means that all trafc is accepted. set ip ip-ppp [vccn] addr-mapping [ on | off ]
Species whether you want the Motorola Netopia Gateway to use network address translation (NAT) when communicating with remote routers. Address mapping lets you conceal details of your network from remote routers. It also permits all LAN devices to share a single IP address. By default, address mapping is turned On. set ip ip-ppp [vccn] auto-sensing [ off | dhcp/pppoe | pppoe/pppoa ]
Enables or disables DHCP/PPPoE or PPPoE/PPPoA autosensing on the specied interface. Setting this to DHCP/PPPoE enables automatic sensing of your WAN connection type: PPPoE or DHCP. The gateway attempts to connect using PPPoE rst. If the Gateway fails to connect after 60 seconds, it switches to DHCP. As soon as it can connect via DHCP, the Gateway chooses and sets DHCP as its default. Otherwise, after attempting to connect via DHCP for 60 seconds, the Gateway switches back to PPPoE. The Gateway will continue to switch back and forth in this manner until it successfully connects. Similarly, selecting PPPoE/PPPoA causes the Gateway to attempt to connect by trying these protocols in parallel, and using the rst one that is successful. set ip ip-ppp [vccn] rip-send { off | v1 | v2 | v1-compat | v2-MD5 }
Species whether the Motorola Netopia Gateway unit should use Routing Information Protocol (RIP) broad-
casts to advertise its routing tables to routers on the other side of the PPP link. An extension of the original Routing Information Protocol (RIP-1), RIP Version 2 (RIP-2) expands the amount of useful information in the packets. While RIP-1 and RIP-2 share the same basic algorithms, RIP-2 supports several new features. For example, inclusion of subnet masks in RIP packets and implementation of multicasting instead of broad-
casting. This last feature reduces the load on hosts which do not support routing protocols. RIP-2 with MD5 authentication is an extension of RIP-2 that increases security by requiring an authentication key when routes are advertised. This command is only available when address mapping for the specied virtual circuit is turned off. If you specify v2-MD5, you must also specify a rip-send-key. Keys are ASCII strings with a maximum of 31 characters, and must match the other router(s) keys for proper operation of MD5 support. 264 set ip ip-ppp [vccn] rip-receive { off | v1 | v2 | v1-compat | v2-MD5 }
Species whether the Motorola Netopia Gateway should use Routing Information Protocol (RIP) broad-
casts to update its routing tables with information received from other routers on the other side of the PPP link. If you specify v2-MD5, you must also specify a rip-receive-key. Keys are ASCII strings with a maximum of 31 characters, and must match the other router(s) keys for proper operation of MD5 support. set ip ip-ppp vccn igmp-null-source-addr [ on | off ]
Species whether you want the Motorola Netopia Gateway to identify the source IP address of every IGMP packet transmitted from this interface as 0.0.0.0 when mcast-fwd is set to on. This complies with the requirements of TR-101, and removes the need for a publicly advertised IP address on the WAN interface. set ip ip-ppp vccn mcast-fwd [ on | off ]
Species whether you want the Motorola Netopia Gateway interface to act as an IGMP proxy host. set ip ip-ppp vccn unnumbered [ on | off ]
Species whether you want the Motorola Netopia Gateway to have its WAN interface unnumbered, i.e. set to 0. set ip ip-ppp vccn dns acquired-dns-priority [ 0 - 255 ]
Sets the priority for DNS acquired via PPP. See Domain Name System Settings on page 255 for more information. 265 Administrators Handbook Static ARP Settings Your Motorola Netopia Gateway maintains a dynamic Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) table to map IP addresses to Ethernet (MAC) addresses. Your Motorola Netopia Gateway populates this ARP table dynam-
ically, by retrieving IP address/MAC address pairs only when it needs them. Optionally, you can dene static ARP entries to map IP addresses to their corresponding Ethernet MAC addresses. Unlike dynamic ARP table entries, static ARP table entries do not time out. You can congure as many as 16 static ARP table entries for a Motorola Netopia Gateway. Use the follow-
ing commands to add static ARP entries to the Motorola Netopia Gateway static ARP table:
set ip static-arp ip-address ip_address Species the IP address for the static ARP entry. Enter an IP address in the ip_address argument in dot-
ted decimal format. The ip_address argument cannot be 0.0.0.0. set ip static-arp ip-address ip_address hardware-address MAC_address Species the Ethernet hardware address for the static ARP entry. Enter an Ethernet hardware address in the MAC_address argument in nn.nn.nn.nn.nn.nn (hexadecimal) format. IGMP Forwarding set ip igmp-forwarding [ off | on ]
Turns IP IGMP forwarding off or on. The default is off. IPsec Passthrough set ip ipsec-passthrough [ off | on ]
Turns IPsec client passthrough off or on. The default is on. IP Prioritization set ip prioritize [ off | on ]
Allows you to support trafc that has the TOS bit set. This defaults to off. 266 Differentiated Services (DiffServ) set diffserv option [ off | on ]
Turns the DiffServ option off (default) or on. on enables the service and IP TOS bits are used, even if no ows are dened. Consequently, if the end-point nodes provide TOS settings from an application that can be interpreted as one of the supported states, the Gateway will handle it as if it actively marked the TOS eld itself. NOTE:
The Gateway itself will not override TOS bit settings made by the endpoints. Support for source-provided IP TOS priorities within the Gateway is achieved simply by turning the Diff-
Serve option on and by setting the lohi-asymmetry to adjust the behavior of the Gateways internal queues. set diffserv lohi-ratio [ 60 - 100 percent ]
Sets a percentage between 60 and 100 used to regulate the level of packets allowed to be pending in the low priority queue. The default is 92. It can be used in some degree to adjust the relative throughput band-
width for low- versus high-priority trafc. NOTE:
diffserv lohi-ratio has been removed for VDSL, ADSL bonded units. 267 Administrators Handbook set diffserv custom-ows name name protocol [ TCP | UDP | ICMP | other ]
direction [ outbound | inbound | both ]
start-port [ 0 - 65535 ]
end-port [ 0 - 65535 ]
inside-ip inside-ip-addr inside-ip-mask inside-ip-netmask outside-ip outside-ip-addr outside-ip-mask outside-ip-netmask qos [ off | assure | expedite | network-control ]
Denes or edits a custom ow. Select a name for the custom-ow from the set command. The CLI will step into the newly-named or previously-dened ow for editing. protocol Allows you to choose the IP protocol for the stream: TCP, UDP, ICMP, or other. other is appropriate for setting up ows on protocols with non-standard port denitions, for example, IPSEC or PPTP. If you select other, an additional eld, numbered-protocol will appear with a range of 0255. Choose the protocol number from this eld. direction Allows you to choose whether to apply the marking and gateway queue behavior for inbound packets, outbound packets, or to both. If the Gateway is used as an edge gateway, its more important function is to mark the packets for high-priority streams in the outbound direction. start-port/end-port Allows you to specify a range of ports to check for a particular ow, if the protocol selection is TCP or UDP. inside-ip/mask If you want packets originating from a certain LAN IP address to be marked, enter the IP address and subnet mask here. If you leave the address equal to zero, this check is ignored for out-
bound packets. The check is always ignored for inbound packets. The DiffServe queuing function must be applied ahead of NAT; and, before NAT re-maps the inbound packets, all inbound packets are des-
tined for the Gateway's WAN IP address. outside-ip/mask If you want packets destined for and originating from a certain WAN IP address to be marked, enter this address and subnet mask here. If you leave the address equal to zero, the outside address check is ignored. For outbound ows, the outside address is the destination IP address for the packets. For inbound packets, the outside address is the source IP address for the packets. Note:
When setting the Inside/Outside IP Address/Netmask settings, note that a netmask value can be used to congure for a network rather than a single IP address. qos Allows you to specify the Quality of Service for the ow: off, assure, expedite or network-con-
trol. These are used both to mark the IP TOS byte and to distribute packets into the queues as if they were marked by the source. QoS Setting TOS Bit Value Off TOS=000 Assure TOS=001 Expedite Network Control TOS=101 TOS=111 268 Behavior This custom ow is disabled. You can activate it by selecting one of the two settings below. This setting allows you to pre-dene ows without actually activating them. Use normal queuing and throughput rules, but do not drop pack-
ets if possible. Appropriate for applications with no guaranteed delivery mechanism. Use minimum delay. Appropriate for VoIP and video applications. Use highest possible priority. Packet Mapping Conguration set diffserv qos [ network-control-queue | expedite-queue |
assured-queue | best-effort-queue ] queue_name Species the Diffserv QoS queue mapping associations. queue_name - the basic queue name to which classied packets are directed. By default the following mappings are created:
set diffserv qos network-control-queue basic_q0 set diffserv qos expedite-queue basic_q1 set diffserv qos assured-queue basic_q2 set diffserv qos best-effort-queue basic_q3 set diffserv qos dscp-map [ default | custom ]
default the default DSCP-queue mappings are used custom allows you to set up customized mappings between DSCP code points and queue types. If custom is selected, the following can be congured:
set diffserv qos dscp-map-0
[ best-effort | assured | expedite | network-control ]
set diffserv qos dscp-map-1
[ best-effort | assured | expedite | network-control ]
... set diffserv qos dscp-map-31
[ best-effort | assured | expedite | network-control ]
By default, the following settings are used in custom mode:
set diffserv qos dscp-map-0 best-effort set diffserv qos dscp-map-1 best-effort set diffserv qos dscp-map-2 best-effort set diffserv qos dscp-map-3 best-effort set diffserv qos dscp-map-4 best-effort set diffserv qos dscp-map-5 assured set diffserv qos dscp-map-6 best-effort set diffserv qos dscp-map-7 best-effort set diffserv qos dscp-map-8 best-effort set diffserv qos dscp-map-9 assured set diffserv qos dscp-map-10 best-effort set diffserv qos dscp-map-11 best-effort set diffserv qos dscp-map-12 best-effort set diffserv qos dscp-map-13 assured set diffserv qos dscp-map-14 best-effort set diffserv qos dscp-map-15 best-effort set diffserv qos dscp-map-16 best-effort set diffserv qos dscp-map-17 assured set diffserv qos dscp-map-18 best-effort set diffserv qos dscp-map-19 best-effort 269 Administrators Handbook set diffserv qos dscp-map-20 best-effort set diffserv qos dscp-map-21 best-effort set diffserv qos dscp-map-22 best-effort set diffserv qos dscp-map-23 expedite set diffserv qos dscp-map-24 network-control set diffserv qos dscp-map-25 network-control set diffserv qos dscp-map-26 network-control set diffserv qos dscp-map-27 network-control set diffserv qos dscp-map-28 network-control set diffserv qos dscp-map-29 network-control set diffserv qos dscp-map-30 network-control set diffserv qos dscp-map-31 network-control 270 Queue Conguration Beginning with Firmware Version 7.7.4, the queuing characteristics of all N and -02 model Gateways WAN interface can now be congured for:
strict priority queuing (as currently) weighted fair queuing rate-limiting funnel Note:
The conguration mechanism is designed to be exible enough to accommodate complex queuing requirements. Congurations not supported by the Gateway will be agged during con-
guration verication. You congure the WAN outbound queue as follows:
create and congure one or more queues, which can be a basic queue or a priority queue comprising a group of basic queues, a weighted fair queue comprising a group of basic queues, or a funnel compris-
ing a group of basic queues;
assign a queue instance to the Ethernet WAN interface;
map packet attributes to a queue. The same queue name can be assigned to multiple interfaces which require identical queue conguration, however currently the only interface available for queueing conguration is ethernet 1. To help you congure queues, and to maintain compatibility with previous rmware releases, several queues are set up automatically on upgrade to Version 7.7, or upon a factory reset. 271 Administrators Handbook set queue name queue_name option [ on | off ]
type [ basic | wfq | priority | funnel ]
Creates a queue named queue_name and assigns a type:
basic Basic Queue wfq Weighted Fair Queue priority Priority Queue funnel Funnel Queue Basic Queue set queue name basic_queue_name option [ on | off ]
set queue name basic_queue_name type basic Species the Basic Queue named basic_queue_name attributes. Basic queues have one input and one output. The basic queue is assigned an ID, with the following attribute: when the queue is full, discard. By default, the following Basic Queues are created:
basic_q0 basic_q1 basic_q2 basic_q3 272 Weighted Fair Queue set queue name wfq option [ on | off ]
set queue name wf_queue_name type wfq set queue name wf_queue_name weight-type [ relative | bps ]
set queue name wf_queue_name entry n input input_queue_name set queue name wf_queue_name entry n weight weight set queue name wf_queue_name entry n share-bw [ on | off ]
set queue name wf_queue_name entry n default-input queue_name Species the attributes of the Weighted Fair Queue named wf_queue_name. wf_queue_name name of weighted fair queue A weighted fair queue can contain up to 8 input queues. For each input queue, the following is congured:
weight-type the weighted fair queue conguration allows you to set the rate in bits per second (bps) or percentage of the line rate (relative). bps is the default. n entry number for this input queue input_queue_name name of input queue weight_value numeric relative weight of queue share-bw if enabled, the bandwidth for this queue can be shared between other queues when idle. default-input species the default input queue name. The default special queuing conguration shapes the rate of a custom ow toward the Remote Manage-
ment Server. By default, the following WFQ is created:
set queue name "wfq" option on set queue name "wfq" type wfq set queue name "wfq" weight-type bps set queue name "wfq" entry 1 input "basic_q0"
set queue name "wfq" entry 1 weight 10000 set queue name "wfq" entry 1 share-bw off set queue name "wfq" entry 2 input "basic_q1"
set queue name "wfq" entry 2 weight 20000 set queue name "wfq" entry 2 share-bw off set queue name "wfq" entry 3 input "basic_q2"
set queue name "wfq" entry 3 weight 30000 set queue name "wfq" entry 3 share-bw off set queue name "wfq" entry 4 input "basic_q3"
set queue name "wfq" entry 4 weight 40000 set queue name "wfq" entry 4 share-bw off set queue name "wfq" default-input "basic_q0"
273 Administrators Handbook Priority Queue set queue name priority_queue_name option [ off | on ]
set queue name priority_queue_name type priority set queue name priority_queue_name default-input queue_name A priority queue can contain up to 8 input queues. For each input queue, the following is congured:
set queue name priority_queue_name entry n input input_queue_name set queue name priority_queue_name entry n priority priority_value Species the Priority Queue named priority_queue_name attributes. priority_queue_name name of priority queue input_queue_name name of input queue priority_value numeric relative priority of queue. The higher the number, the higher the priority of the queue. default-input species the default input queue name. By default, the following priority queue is created:
set queue name "pq" option on set queue name "pq" type priority set queue name "pq" entry 1 input "basic_q0"
set queue name "pq" entry 1 priority 10 set queue name "pq" entry 2 input "basic_q1"
set queue name "pq" entry 2 priority 20 set queue name "pq" entry 3 input "basic_q2"
set queue name "pq" entry 3 priority 30 set queue name "pq" entry 4 input "basic_q3"
set queue name "pq" entry 4 priority 40 set queue name "pq" default-input "basic_q0"
274 Funnel Queue A funnel queue is used to limit the rate of the transmission below the actual line rate:
set queue name funnel_queue_name option [ on | off ]
set queue name funnel_queue_name type funnel set queue name funnel_queue_name input input_queue_name set queue name funnel_queue_name bps bps Species the Funnel Queue named funnel_queue_name attributes. funnel_queue_name name of funnel queue input_queue_name name of input queue bps max bits per second permitted through funnel queue By default, the following funnel queues are created:
Rate-limiting priority queue to 100Kbps:
set queue name pq-100kbps option on set queue name pq-100kbps type funnel set queue name pq-100kbps input pq set queue name pq-100kbps bps 100000 Rate-limiting weighted fair queue to 100Kbps:
set queue name wfq-100kbps option on set queue name wfq-100kbps type funnel set queue name wfq-100kbps input wfq set queue name wfq-100kbps bps 100000 Interface Queue Assignment The WAN ethernet queue is assigned as follows:
set [ ethernet ethernet | ip ethernet B | ip-ppp vccn ] tx-queue queue_name By default, the WAN ethernet interface is assigned the default priority queue:
set ethernet ethernet B tx-queue pq Other interfaces may likewise be assigned tx-queue values. 275 Administrators Handbook SIP Passthrough set ip sip-passthrough [ on | off ]
Turns Session Initiation Protocol application layer gateway client passthrough on or off. The default is on. Session Initiation Protocol, is a signaling protocol for Internet conferencing, telephony, presence, events notication and instant messaging. RTSP Passthrough set ip ethernet B rtsp-passthrough [ off | on ]
Turns Real Time Streaming Protocol application layer gateway client passthrough on or off. RTSP is a proto-
col used for streaming media. It allows a client remotely to control a streaming media server. A typical application is Video-on-Demand (VoD). The default is on. Static Route Settings A static route identies a manually congured pathway to a remote network. Unlike dynamic routes, which are acquired and conrmed periodically from other routers, static routes do not time out. Consequently, static routes are useful when working with PPP, since an intermittent PPP link may make maintenance of dynamic routes problematic. You can congure as many as 32 static IP routes for a Motorola Netopia Gateway. Use the following com-
mands to maintain static routes to the Motorola Netopia Gateway routing table:
set ip static-routes destination-network net_address Species the network address for the static route. Enter a network address in the net_address argu-
ment in dotted decimal format. The net_address argument cannot be 0.0.0.0. set ip static-routes destination-network net_address netmask netmask Species the subnet mask for the IP network at the other end of the static route. Enter the netmask argu-
ment in dotted decimal format. The subnet mask associated with the destination network must represent the same network class (A, B, or C) or a lower class (such as a class C subnet mask for class B network number) to be valid. 276 set ip static-routes destination-network net_address interface { ip-address | ppp-vccn }
Species the interface through which the static route is accessible. set ip static-routes destination-network net_address gateway-address gate_address Species the IP address of the Gateway for the static route. The default Gateway must be located on a net-
work connected to the Motorola Netopia Gateway congured interface. set ip static-routes destination-network net_address metric integer Species the metric (hop count) for the static route. The default metric is 1. Enter a number from 1 to 15 for the integer argument to indicate the number of routers (actual or best guess) a packet must traverse to reach the remote network. You can enter a metric of 1 to indicate either:
The remote network is one router away and the static route is the best way to reach it;
The remote network is more than one router away but the static route should not be replaced by a dynamic route, even if the dynamic route is more efcient. set ip static-routes destination-network net_address rip-advertise [ splitHorizon | always | never ]
Species whether the gateway should use Routing Information Protocol (RIP) broadcasts to advertise to other routers on your network and which mode to use. The default is splitHorizon. delete ip static-routes destination-network net_address Deletes a static route. Deleting a static route removes all information associated with that route. IPMaps Settings set ip-maps name <name> internal-ip <ip address>
Species the name and static ip address of the LAN device to be mapped. set ip-maps name <name> external-ip <ip address>
Species the name and static ip address of the WAN device to be mapped. Up to 8 mapped static IP addresses are supported. 277 Administrators Handbook Network Address Translation (NAT) Default Settings NAT default settings let you specify whether you want your Motorola Netopia Gateway to forward NAT traf-
c to a default server when it doesnt know what else to do with it. The NAT default host function is useful in situations where you cannot create a specic NAT pinhole for a trafc stream because you cannot antici-
pate what port number an application might use. For example, some network games select arbitrary port numbers when a connection is being opened. By identifying your computer (or another host on your network) as a NAT default server, you can specify that NAT trafc that would otherwise be discarded by the Motorola Netopia Gateway should be directed to a specic hosts. set nat-default mode [ off | default-server | ip-passthrough ]
Species whether you want your Motorola Netopia Gateway to forward unsolicited trafc from the WAN to a default server or an IP passthrough host when it doesnt know what else to do with it. See Default Server on page 89 for more information. set nat-default dhcp-enable [ on | off ]
Allows the IP passthrough host to acquire its IP address via DHCP, if ip-passthrough is enabled. set nat-default address ip_address Species the IP address of the NAT default server. set nat-default host-hardware-address MAC_address }
Species the hardware (MAC) address of the IP passthrough host. If the MAC address is specied as all-
zeroes, the rst DHCP client that requests an IP address gets the passthrough address. Network Address Translation (NAT) Pinhole Settings NAT pinholes let you pass specic types of network trafc through the NAT interfaces on the Motorola Neto-
pia Gateway. NAT pinholes allow you to route selected types of network trafc, such as FTP requests or HTTP (Web) connections, to a specic host behind the Motorola Netopia Gateway transparently. To set up NAT pinholes, you identify the type(s) of trafc you want to redirect by port number, and you spec-
ify the internal host to which each specied type of trafc should be directed. The following list identies protocol type and port number for common TCP/IP protocols:
FTP (TCP 21) telnet (TCP 23) SMTP (TCP 25), TFTP (UDP 69) SNMP (TCP 161, UDP 161) set pinhole name name Species the identier for the entry in the router's pinhole table. You can name pinhole table entries sequentially (1, 2, 3), by port number (21, 80, 23), by protocol, or by some other naming scheme. 278 set pinhole name name protocol-select { tcp | udp }
Species the type of protocol being redirected. set pinhole name name external-port-start [ 0 - 49151 ]
Species the rst port number in the range being translated. set pinhole name name external-port-end [ 0 - 49151 ]
Species the last port number in the range being translated. set pinhole name name internal-ip internal-ip Species the IP address of the internal host to which trafc of the specied type should be transferred. set pinhole name name internal-port [ 0 - 65535 ]
Species the port number your Motorola Netopia Gateway should use when forwarding trafc of the spec-
ied type. Under most circumstances, you would use the same number for the external and internal port. PPPoE /PPPoA Settings You can use the following commands to congure basic settings, port authentication settings, and peer authentication settings for PPP interfaces on your Motorola Netopia Gateway. Conguring Basic PPP Settings. NOTE:
For the DSL platform you must identify the virtual PPP interface [vccn], a number from 1 to 8. set ppp module [vccn] option { on | off }
Enables or disables PPP on the Motorola Netopia Gateway. set ppp module [vccn] auto-connect { on | off }
Supports manual mode required for some vendors. The default on is not normally changed. If auto-connect is disabled (off), you must manually start/stop a ppp connection. set ppp module [vccn] mru integer Species the Maximum Receive Unit (MRU) for the PPP interface. The integer argument can be any num-
ber between 128 and 1492 for PPPoE; 1500 otherwise. 279 Administrators Handbook set ppp module [vccn] magic-number { on | off }
Enables or disables LCP magic number negotiation. set ppp module [vccn] protocol-compression { on | off }
Species whether you want the Motorola Netopia Gateway to compress the PPP Protocol eld when it transmits datagrams over the PPP link. set ppp module [vccn] lcp-echo-requests { on | off }
Species whether you want your Motorola Netopia Gateway to send LCP echo requests. You should turn off LCP echoing if you do not want the Motorola Netopia Gateway to drop a PPP link to a nonresponsive peer. set ppp module [vccn] echo-period integer Species the number of seconds the Motorola Netopia Gateway should wait before sending another echo from an LCP echo request. The integer argument can be any number from between 5 and 300 (seconds). set ppp module [vccn] lost-echoes-max integer Species the maximum number of lost echoes the Motorola Netopia Gateway should tolerate before bringing down the PPP connection. The integer argument can be any number from between 1 and 20. set ppp module [vccn] failures-max integer Species the maximum number of Congure-NAK messages the PPP module can send without having sent a Congure-ACK message. The integer argument can be any number between 1 and 20. set ppp module [vccn] congure-max integer Species the maximum number of unacknowledged conguration requests that your Motorola Netopia Gateway will send. The integer argument can be any number between 1 and 20. set ppp module [vccn] terminate-max integer Species the maximum number of unacknowledged termination requests that your Motorola Netopia Gateway will send before terminating the PPP link. The integer argument can be any number between 1 and 10. set ppp module [vccn] restart-timer integer Species the number of seconds the Motorola Netopia Gateway should wait before retransmitting a con-
guration or termination request. The integer argument can be any number between 1 and 30. 280 set ppp module [vccn] connection-type
{ instant-on | always-on }
Species whether a PPP connection is maintained by the Motorola Netopia Gateway when it is unused for extended periods. If you specify always-on, the Motorola Netopia Gateway never shuts down the PPP link. If you specify instant-on, the Motorola Netopia Gateway shuts down the PPP link after the number of seconds specied in the time-out setting (below) if no trafc is moving over the circuit. set ppp module [vccn] time-out integer If you specied a connection type of instant-on, species the number of seconds, in the range 30 -
3600, with a default value of 300, the Motorola Netopia Gateway should wait for communication activity before terminating the PPP link. Conguring Port Authentication. You can use the following command to specify how your Motorola Neto-
pia Gateway should respond when it receives an authentication request from a remote peer. The settings for port authentication on the local Motorola Netopia Gateway must match the authentica-
tion that is expected by the remote peer. For example, if the remote peer requires CHAP authentication and has a name and CHAP secret for the Motorola Netopia Gateway, you must enable CHAP and specify the same name and secret on the Motorola Netopia Gateway before the link can be established. set ppp module [vccn] port-authentication option [ off | on | pap-only | chap-only ]
Specifying on turns both PAP and CHAP on, or you can select PAP or CHAP. Specify the username and password when port authentication is turned on (both CHAP and PAP, CHAP or PAP.) Authentication must be enabled before you can enter other information. set ppp module [vccn] port-authentication username username The username argument is 1 255 alphanumeric characters. The information you enter must match the username congured in the PPP peer's authentication database. set ppp module [vccn] port-authentication password password The password argument is 1 128 alphanumeric characters. The information you enter must match the password used by the PPP peer. 281 Administrators Handbook PPPoE with IPoE Settings Ethernet WAN platforms set wan-over-ether pppoe [ on | off ]
Enables or disables PPPoE on the Ethernet WAN interface. set wan-over-ether pppoe-with-ipoe [ on | off ]
Enables or disables the PPPoE with IPoE support on Ethernet WAN, including VDSL, platforms when pppoe option is set to on. When pppoe-with-ipoe is set to on, an additional interface, ethernet C, becomes available. set wan-over-ether ipoe-sessions [ 1 - 4 ]
Sets the number of IPoE sessions, up to four, on Ethernet WAN, including VDSL, platforms. NOTE:
Enabling pppoe-with-ipoe disables support for multiple PPPoE sessions. Example:
set ip ethernet C option on set ip ethernet C address 0.0.0.0 set ip ethernet C broadcast 0.0.0.255 set ip ethernet C netmask 255.255.255.0 set ip ethernet C restrictions admin-disabled set ip ethernet C addr-mapping on set ip ethernet C dns acquired-dns-priority 20 set ip ethernet C mcast-fwd on set ip ethernet C igmp-null-source-addr off set ip ethernet C tx-queue "none"
set ip ethernet C unnumbered off set ip ethernet C rip-receive off set ip ethernet C proxy-arp off set ip ip-ppp enet-B option on set ip ip-ppp enet-B address 0.0.0.0 set ip ip-ppp enet-B peer-address 0.0.0.0 set ip ip-ppp enet-B restrictions admin-disabled set ip ip-ppp enet-B addr-mapping on set ip ip-ppp enet-B dns acquired-dns-priority 20 set ip ip-ppp enet-B igmp-null-source-addr off set ip ip-ppp enet-B tx-queue "none"
set ip ip-ppp enet-B mcast-fwd on set ip ip-ppp enet-B unnumbered off set ip ip-ppp enet-B rip-receive off 282 ADSL platforms You must congure two VCCs with the same VPI/VCI to enable concurrent PPPoE and IPoE support, and you will need to congure the individual settings for each interface for proper operation. set atm vcc n encap pppoe-llc Species that the VCC will allow a second VCC with the same VPI/VCI values as the rst. pppoe-llc denotes this special case. Example:
set atm option on set atm vcc 1 option on set atm vcc 1 vpi 0 set atm vcc 1 vci 35 set atm vcc 1 encap pppoe-llc set atm vcc 2 option on set atm vcc 2 vpi 0 set atm vcc 2 vci 35 set atm vcc 2 encap ether-llc This will allow you to congure the second WAN interface. set atm vcc 2 vpi 0 set atm vcc 2 vci 35 set atm vcc 2 encap ether-llc
... set ip ip-ppp vcc1 mcast-fwd [ on | off }
Enables or disables multi-cast forwarding on the specied interface. If set to on, this interface acts as an IGMP proxy host, and IGMP packets are transmitted and received on this interface on behalf of IGMP hosts on the LAN interface. See IGMP (Internet Group Management Protocol) on page 100 for more informa-
tion. set ip ip-ppp vcc1 igmp-null-source-addr [ off | on ]
Enables or disables IGMP null source address, if mcast-fwd is set to on. If enabled, the source IP address of every IGMP packet transmitted from this interface is set to 0.0.0.0. This complies with the requirements of TR-101, and removes the need for a publicly advertised IP address on the WAN interface. Ethernet Port Settings set ethernet ethernet A mode { auto | 100M-full | 100M-full-xed |
100M-half-xed | 10M-full-xed | 10M-half-xed |
100M-half | 10M-full | 10M-half }
Allows mode setting for the ethernet port. Only supported on units without a LAN switch, or dual ethernet products (338x). In the dual ethernet case, ethernet B would be specied for the WAN port. The default is auto. 283 Administrators Handbook 802.3ah Ethernet OAM Settings 802.3ah Ethernet in the First Mile (EFM) Operations Administration and Maintenance (OAM) is a group of network management functions that provide network fault indication, performance information, and diagno-
sis using special-purpose Ethernet OAM frames. These are exchanged between your Gateway and service provider Access Node (AN) devices for network fault management, performance analysis and fault isolation. All VDSL and Ethernet WAN Motorola Netopia Gateways support Ethernet OAM options. More Ethernet Packet-Transfer-Mode (PTM) enabled xDSL Motorola Netopia Gateways will support 802.3ah Ethernet OAM options in future releases. 802.3ah Ethernet OAM exchanges periodic Ethernet OAM heartbeat frames between the endpoints of the physical link being monitored, and thus discovers and keeps-alive the Link connectivity and reports faults if the link goes down. Supported OAM request and response types are: remote loopback enable, remote loop-
back disable, variable request, variable response. set ethernet oam ah option [ off | on ]
Enables or disables Ethernet OAM. Default is off. set ethernet oam ah pass-through [ off | on ]
Enable or disable Ethernet OAM pass-through mode. Default is off. Warning: This is a DEBUG feature. Leave it off unless you know exactly what you are doing. set ethernet oam ah mode [ active | passive ]
Species the Ethernet OAM mode. Default is active. set ethernet oam ah pdu-size-max [ 64 - 1518 ]
Species the Maximum Protocol Data Unit (PDU) size. Default is 1518. set ethernet oam ah discovery-timer [ 1 - 300 ]
Species the discovery timer value for continuity check in seconds. Range is 1 300 seconds. Default is 1. set ethernet oam ah keepalive-timer [ 5 - 305 ]
Species the keep-alive timer value in seconds. Range is 5 305 seconds. Default is 5. etheroam ah ping Sends OAM remote loopback request in active mode. 284 Command Line Interface Preference Settings You can set command line interface preferences to customize your environment. set preference verbose { on | off }
Species whether you want command help and prompting information displayed. By default, the command line interface verbose preference is turned off. If you turn it on, the command line interface displays help for a node when you navigate to that node. set preference more lines Species how many lines of information you want the command line interface to display at one time. The lines argument species the number of lines you want to see at one time. The range is 1-65535. By default, the command line interface shows you 22 lines of text before displaying the prompt: More
[y|n] ?. If you enter 1000 for the lines argument, the command line interface displays information as an uninter-
rupted stream (which is useful for capturing information to a text le). 285 Administrators Handbook Port Renumbering Settings If you use NAT pinholes to forward HTTP or telnet trafc through your Motorola Netopia Gateway to an internal host, you must change the port numbers the Motorola Netopia Gateway uses for its own congu-
ration trafc. For example, if you set up a NAT pinhole to forward network trafc on Port 80 (HTTP) to another host, you would have to tell the Motorola Netopia Gateway to listen for conguration connection requests on a port number other than 80, such as 6080. After you have changed the port numbers the Motorola Netopia Gateway uses for its conguration trafc, you must use those port numbers instead of the standard numbers when conguring the Motorola Neto-
pia Gateway. For example, if you move the router's Web service to port 6080 on a box with a system
(DNS) name of superbox, you would enter the URL http://superbox:6080 in a Web browser to open the Motorola Netopia Gateway graphical user interface. Similarly, you would have to congure your telnet application to use the appropriate port when opening a conguration connection to your Motorola Netopia Gateway. set servers web-http [ 1 - 65534 ]
Species the port number for HTTP (web) communication with the Motorola Netopia Gateway. Because port numbers in the range 0-1024 are used by other protocols, you should use numbers in the range 1025-
65534 when assigning new port numbers to the Motorola Netopia Gateway web conguration interface. A setting of 0 (zero) will turn the server off. set servers telnet-tcp [ 1 - 65534 ]
Species the port number for telnet (CLI) communication with the Motorola Netopia Gateway. Because port numbers in the range 0-1024 are used by other protocols, you should use numbers in the range 1025-
65534 when assigning new port numbers to the Motorola Netopia Gateway telnet conguration interface. A setting of 0 (zero) will turn the server off. NOTE:
You cannot specify a port setting of 0 (zero) for both the web and telnet ports at the same time. This would prevent you from accessing the Gateway. 286 Security Settings Security settings include the Firewall, Packet Filtering, Stateful Inspection, and IPSec parameters. Some of the security functionality is keyed. Firewall Settings (for BreakWater Firewall) set security rewall option [ ClearSailing | SilentRunning |
LANdLocked ]
The 3 settings for BreakWater are discussed in detail on page page 142. SafeHarbour IPSec Settings SafeHarbour VPN is a tunnel between the local network and another geographically dispersed network that is interconnected over the Internet. This VPN tunnel provides a secure, cost-effective alternative to dedi-
cated leased lines. Internet Protocol Security (IPsec) is a series of services including encryption, authenti-
cation, integrity, and replay protection. Internet Key Exchange (IKE) is the key management protocol of IPsec that establishes keys for encryption and decryption. Because this VPN software implementation is built to these standards, the other side of the tunnel can be either another Motorola Netopia unit or another IPsec/IKE based security product. For VPN you can choose to have trafc authenticated, encrypted, or both. When connecting the Motorola Netopia unit in a telecommuting scenario, the corporate VPN settings will dictate the settings to be used in the Motorola Netopia unit. If a parameter has not been specied from the other end of the tunnel, choose the default unless you fully understand the ramications of your param-
eter choice. set security ipsec option (off) {on | off}
Turns on the SafeHarbour IPsec tunnel capability. Default is off. See IPSec on page 146 for more informa-
tion. set security ipsec tunnels name "123"
The name of the tunnel can be quoted to allow special characters and embedded spaces. set security ipsec tunnels name "123" tun-enable
(on) {on | off}
This enables this particular tunnel. Currently, one tunnel is supported. set security ipsec tunnels name "123" dest-ext-address ip-address Species the IP address of the destination gateway. 287 Administrators Handbook set security ipsec tunnels name "123" dest-int-network ip-address Species the IP address of the destination computer or internal network. set security ipsec tunnels name "123" dest-int-netmask netmask Species the subnet mask of the destination computer or internal network. The subnet mask species which bits of the 32-bit IP address represents network information. The default subnet mask for most net-
works is 255.255.255.0 (class C subnet mask). set security ipsec tunnels name "123" encrypt-protocol
(ESP) { ESP | none }
See page 146 for details about SafeHarbour IPsec tunnel capability. set security ipsec tunnels name "123" auth-protocol
(ESP) {AH | ESP | none}
See page 146 for details about SafeHarbour IPsec tunnel capability. set security ipsec tunnels name "123" IKE-mode pre-shared-key-type (hex) {ascii | hex}
See page 146 for details about SafeHarbour IPsec tunnel capability. set security ipsec tunnels name "123" IKE-mode pre-shared-key ("") {hex string}
See page 146 for details about SafeHarbour IPsec tunnel capability. Example: 0x1234 set security ipsec tunnels name "123" IKE-mode neg-method {main | aggressive}
See page 146 for details about SafeHarbour IPsec tunnel capability. Note: Aggressive Mode is a little faster, but it does not provide identity protection for negotiations nodes. set security ipsec tunnels name "123" IKE-mode DH-group (1) { 1 | 2 | 5}
See page 146 for details about SafeHarbour IPsec tunnel capability. 288 set security ipsec tunnels name "123" IKE-mode isakmp-SA-encrypt (DES) { DES | 3DES }
See page 146 for details about SafeHarbour IPsec tunnel capability. set security ipsec tunnels name "123" IKE-mode ipsec-mtu mtu_value The Maximum Transmission Unit is a link layer restriction on the maximum number of bytes of data in a sin-
gle transmission. The maximum allowable value (also the default) is 1500, and the minimum is 100. set security ipsec tunnels name "123" IKE-mode isakmp-SA-hash
(MD5) {MD5 | SHA1}
See page 146 for details about SafeHarbour IPsec tunnel capability. set security ipsec tunnels name "123" IKE-mode PFS-enable
{ off | on }
See page 146 for details about SafeHarbour IPsec tunnel capability. set security ipsec tunnels name "123" IKE-mode invalid-spi-recovery
{ off | on }
Enables the Gateway to re-establish the tunnel if either the Motorola Netopia Gateway or the peer gateway is rebooted. set security ipsec tunnels name "123" xauth enable {off | on }
Enables or disables Xauth extensions to IPsec, when IKE-mode neg-method is set to aggressive. Default is off. set security ipsec tunnels name "123" xauth username username Sets the Xauth username, if Xauth is enabled. set security ipsec tunnels name "123" xauth password password Sets the Xauth password, if Xauth is enabled. set security ipsec tunnels name "123" nat-enable { on | off }
Enables or disables NAT on the specied IPsec tunnel. The default is off. set security ipsec tunnels name "123" nat-pat-address ip-address Species the NAT port address translation IP address for the specied IPsec tunnel. 289 Administrators Handbook set security ipsec tunnels name "123" local-id-type
{ IP-address | Subnet | Hostname | ASCII }
Species the NAT local ID type for the specied IPsec tunnel, when Aggressive Mode is set. set security ipsec tunnels name "123" local-id id_value Species the NAT local ID value as specied in the local-id-type for the specied IPsec tunnel, when Aggressive Mode is set. Note: If subnet is selected, the following two values are used instead:
set security ipsec tunnels name "123" local-id-addr ip-address set security ipsec tunnels name "123" local-id-mask ip-mask set security ipsec tunnels name "123" remote-id-type
{ IP-address | Subnet | Hostname | ASCII }
Species the NAT remote ID type for the specied IPsec tunnel, when Aggressive Mode is set. set security ipsec tunnels name "123" remote-id id_value Species the NAT remote ID value as specied in the remote-id-type for the specied IPsec tunnel, when Aggressive Mode is set. Note: If subnet is selected, the following two values are used instead:
set security ipsec tunnels name "123" remote-id-addr ip-address set security ipsec tunnels name "123" remote-id-mask ip-mask 290 Internet Key Exchange (IKE) Settings The following four IPsec parameters congure the rekeying event. set security ipsec tunnels name "123" IKE-mode ipsec-soft-mbytes (1000) {1-1000000}
set security ipsec tunnels name "123" IKE-mode ipsec-soft-seconds (82800) {60-1000000}
set security ipsec tunnels name "123" IKE-mode ipsec-hard-mbytes (1200) {1-1000000}
set security ipsec tunnels name "123" IKE-mode ipsec-hard-seconds (86400) {60-1000000}
The soft parameters designate when the system begins to negotiate a new key. For example, after 82800 seconds (23 hours) or 1 Gbyte has been transferred (whichever comes rst) the key will begin to be renegotiated. The hard parameters indicate that the renegotiation must be complete or the tunnel will be disabled. For example, 86400 seconds (24 hours) means that the renegotiation must be complete within one day. Both ends of the tunnel set parameters, and typically they will be the same. If they are not the same, the rekey event will happen when the longest time period expires or when the largest amount of data has been sent. 291 Administrators Handbook Stateful Inspection Stateful inspection options are accessed by the security state-insp tag. set security state-insp [ ip-ppp | dsl ] vccn option [ off | on ]
set security state-insp ethernet [ A | B ] option [ off | on ]
Sets the stateful inspection option off or on on the specied interface. This option is disabled by default. Stateful inspection prevents unsolicited inbound access when NAT is disabled. set security state-insp [ ip-ppp | dsl ] vccn default-mapping [ off | on ]
set security state-insp ethernet [ A | B ]
default-mapping [ off | on ]
Sets stateful inspection default mapping to router option off or on on the specied interface. set security state-insp [ ip-ppp | dsl ] vccn tcp-seq-diff
[ 0 - 65535 ]
set security state-insp ethernet [ A | B ] tcp-seq-diff
[ 0 - 65535 ]
Sets the acceptable TCP sequence difference on the specied interface. The TCP sequence number differ-
ence maximum allowed value is 65535. If the value of tcp-seq-diff is 0, it means that this check is dis-
abled. set security state-insp [ ip-ppp | dsl ] vccn deny-fragments [ off | on ]
set security state-insp ethernet [ A | B ]
deny-fragments [ off | on ]
Sets whether fragmented packets are allowed to be received or not on the specied interface. set security state-insp tcp-timeout [ 30 - 65535 ]
Sets the stateful inspection TCP timeout interval, in seconds. set security state-insp udp-timeout [ 30 - 65535 ]
Sets the stateful inspection UDP timeout interval, in seconds. set security state-insp dos-detect [ off | on ]
Enables or disables the stateful inspection Denial of Service detection feature. If set to on, the device will monitor packets for Denial of Service (DoS) attack. Offending packets may be discarded if it is determined to be a DoS attack. 292 set security state-insp xposed-addr exposed-address# "n"
Allows you to add an entry to the specied list, or, if the list does not exist, creates the list for the stateful inspection feature. xposed-addr settings only apply if NAT is off. Example:
set security state-insp xposed-addr exposed-address# (?): 32 32 has been added to the xposed-addr list. Sets the exposed list address number. set security state-insp xposed-addr exposed-address# "n" start-ip ip_address Sets the exposed list range starting IP address, in dotted quad format. set security state-insp xposed-addr exposed-address# "n" end-ip ip_address Sets the exposed list range ending IP address, in dotted quad format. 32 exposed addresses can be created. The range for exposed address numbers are from 1 through 32. set security state-insp xposed-addr exposed-address# "n" protocol [ tcp | udp | both | any ]
Sets the protocol for the stateful inspection feature for the exposed address list. Accepted values for proto-
col are tcp, udp, both, or any. If protocol is not any, you can set port ranges:
set security state-insp xposed-addr exposed-address# "n" start-port [ 1 - 65535 ]
set security state-insp xposed-addr exposed-address# "n" end-port [ 1 - 65535 ]
293 Administrators Handbook Packet Filtering Settings Packet Filtering has two parts:
Create/Edit/Delete Filter Sets, create/edit/delete rules to a Filter Set. Associate a created Filter Set with a WAN or LAN interface See Packet Filter on page 163 for more information. set security pkt-lter lterset lterset-name [ input_lter | output_lter ] index forward [ on | off ]
Creates or edits a lter rule, specifying whether packets will be forwarded or not. NOTE:
If this is the rst rule, it will create the lter-set called lterset-name, otherwise it will edit the lterset. If the index is not consecutive, the system will select the next consecutive index. If the index does not exist, a rule will be created. If a rule exists, the rule will be edited. set security pkt-lter lterset lterset-name [ input_lter | output_lter ] index idle-reset [ on | off ]
Turns idle reset on or off for the specied lter rule. A match on this rule resets idle-timeout status and keeps the WAN connection alive. The default is off. For idle-reset to be displayed, forward must be enabled on a lter rule. set security pkt-lter lterset lterset-name [ input_lter | output_lter ] index frc-rte [ on | off ]
Turns forced routing on or off for the specied lter rule. A match on this rule will force a route for packets. The default is off. For frc-rte to be displayed, forward must be enabled on a lter rule. set security pkt-lter lterset lterset-name [ input_lter | output_lter ] index gateway ip_addr Species the gateway IP address for forced routed packets, if forced routing is enabled. set security pkt-lter lterset lterset-name [ input_lter | output_lter ] index src-ip ip_addr Species the source IP address to match packets (where the packet was sent from). set security pkt-lter lterset lterset-name [ input_lter | output_lter ] index src-mask mask Species the source IP mask to match packets (where the packet was sent from). 294 set security pkt-lter lterset lterset-name [ input_lter | output_lter ] index dest-ip ip_addr Species the destination IP address to match packets (where the packet is going). set security pkt-lter lterset lterset-name [ input_lter | output_lter ] index dest-mask mask Species the destination IP mask to match packets (where the packet is going). set security pkt-lter lterset lterset-name [ input_lter | output_lter ] index tos value Species the TOS (Type Of Service) value to match packets. The value for tos can be from 0 255. set security pkt-lter lterset lterset-name [ input_lter | output_lter ] index tos-mask value Species the TOS (Type Of Service) mask to match packets. The value for tos-mask can be from 0 255. set security pkt-lter lterset lterset-name [ input_lter | output_lter ] index protocol value Species the protocol value to match packets, the type of higher-layer Internet protocol the packet is carry-
ing, such as TCP or UDP. The value for protocol can be from 0 255. set security pkt-lter lterset lterset-name [ input_lter | output_lter ] index src-compare [ nc | ne | lt | le | eq | gt | ge ]
Sets the source compare operator action for the specied lter rule. src-compare only displays when the protocol is TCP or UDP. Operator Action nc ne lt le eq ge gt No compare Not equal to Less than Less than or equal to Equal to Greater than or equal to Greater than 295 Administrators Handbook set security pkt-lter lterset lterset-name [ input_lter | output_lter ] index dst-compare [ nc | ne | lt | le | eq | gt | ge ]
Sets the destination compare operator action for the specied lter rule. dst-compare only displays when the protocol is TCP or UDP. Operator Action nc ne lt le eq ge gt No compare Not equal to Less than Less than or equal to Equal to Greater than or equal to Greater than set security pkt-lter lterset lterset-name [ input_lter | output_lter ] index src-port value Species the source IP port to match packets (the port on the sending host that originated the packet, if the underlying protocol is TCP or UDP). src-port does not display if nc is set for src-compare or dst-com-
pare. set security pkt-lter lterset lterset-name [ input_lter | output_lter ] index dst-port value Species the destination IP port to match packets (the port on the receiving host that the packet is des-
tined for, if the underlying protocol is TCP or UDP). dst-port does not display if nc is set for src-compare or dst-compare. set security pkt-lter interface assigned-lterset lterset-name Associates a lterset with a LAN or WAN interface. Example:
set security pkt-filter ethernet A assigned-filterset set1 296 SNMP Settings The Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) lets a network administrator monitor problems on a net-
work by retrieving settings on remote network devices. The network administrator typically runs an SNMP management station program on a local host to obtain information from an SNMP agent such as the Motor-
ola Netopia Gateway. set snmp community read name Adds the specied name to the list of communities associated with the Motorola Netopia Gateway. By default, the Motorola Netopia Gateway is associated with the public community. set snmp community write name Adds the specied name to the list of communities associated with the Motorola Netopia Gateway. set snmp community trap name Adds the specied name to the list of communities associated with the Motorola Netopia Gateway. set snmp trap ip-traps ip-address Identies the destination for SNMP trap messages. The ip-address argument is the IP address of the host acting as an SNMP console. set snmp sysgroup contact contact_info Identies the system contact, such as the name, phone number, beeper number, or email address of the person responsible for the Motorola Netopia Gateway. You can enter up to 255 characters for the contact_info argument. You must put the contact_info argument in double-quotes if it contains embedded spaces. set snmp sysgroup location location_info Identies the location, such as the building, oor, or room number, of the Motorola Netopia Gateway. You can enter up to 255 characters for the location_info argument. You must put the location_info argument in double-quotes if it contains embedded spaces. SNMP Notify Type Settings set snmp notify type [ v1-trap | v2-trap | inform ]
Sets the type of SNMP notications that the system will generate:
v1-trap This selection will generate notications containing an SNMPv1 Trap Protocol Data Unit (PDU) v2-trap This selection will generate notications containing an SNMPv2 Trap PDU inform This selection will generate notications containing an SNMPv2 InformRequest PDU. 297 Administrators Handbook System Settings You can congure system settings to assign a name to your Motorola Netopia Gateway and to specify what types of messages you want the diagnostic log to record. set system name name Species the name of your Motorola Netopia Gateway. Each Motorola Netopia Gateway is assigned a name as part of its factory initialization. The default name for a Motorola Netopia Gateway consists of the word Netopia-3000/XXX where XXX is the serial number of the device; for example, Netopia-3000/
9437188. A system name can be 1 255 characters long. Once you have assigned a name to your Motor-
ola Netopia Gateway, you can enter that name in the Address text eld of your browser to open a connec-
tion to your Motorola Netopia Gateway. NOTE:
Some broadband cable-oriented Service Providers use the System Name as an important identication and support parameter. If your Gateway is part of this type of network, do NOT alter the System Name unless specically instructed by your Service Provider. set system diagnostic-level
{ off | low | medium | high | alerts | failures }
Species the types of log messages you want the Motorola Netopia Gateway to record. All messages with a level equal to or greater than the level you specify are recorded. For example, if you specify set system diagnostic-level medium, the diagnostic log will retain medium-level informational messages, alerts, and failure messages. Specifying off turns off logging. Use the following guidelines:
low - Low-level informational messages or greater; includes trivial status messages. medium - Medium-level informational messages or greater; includes status messages that can help monitor network trafc. high - High-level informational messages or greater; includes status messages that may be signicant but do not constitute errors. The default. alerts - Warnings or greater; includes recoverable error conditions and useful operator information. failures - Failures; includes messages describing error conditions that may not be recoverable. 298 set system ftp-server option [ off | on ]
Enables or disables a simple FTP server in the Gateway. If enabled, the Gateway will accept binary embed-
ded software images (.bin) les or command line conguration les. Supported FTP commands MODE NOOP PORT QUIT STOR SYST TYPE USER
(data transfer mode (only Streaming supported)
(send back ok)
(specify client address:port for data)
(quit)
(send le to FTP server)
(get system info about FTP server)
(set data representation type, ASCII and IMAGE (BIN) only supported)
(send username for authentication) set system log-size [ 10240... 65536 ]
Species a size for the system log. The most recent entries are posted to the beginning of the log. When the log becomes full, the oldest entries are dropped. The default is 30000. set system persistent-log [ off | on ]
When set to on, causes the log information to be kept in ash memory. set system idle-timeout { telnet [ 1...120 ] | http [ 1... 120 ] }
Species a timeout period of inactivity for telnet or HTTP access to the Gateway, after which a user must re-
login to the Gateway. Defaults are 5 minutes for HTTP and 15 minutes for telnet. set system username { administrator name | user name }
Species the usernames for the administrative user the default is admin; and a non-administrative user the default is user. set system password { admin | user }
Species the administrator or user password for a Motorola Netopia Gateway. When you enter the set system password command, you are prompted to enter the old password (if any) and new password. You are prompted to repeat the new password to verify that you entered it correctly the rst time. To prevent anyone from observing the password you enter, characters in the old and new passwords are not displayed as you type them. For security, you cannot use the step method to set the system password. A password can be as many as 8 characters. Passwords are case-sensitive. Passwords go into effect immediately. You do not have to restart the Motorola Netopia Gateway for the password to take effect. Assigning an administrator or user password to a Motorola Netopia Gateway does not affect communications through the device. 299 Administrators Handbook set system heartbeat option { on | off }
protocol [ udp | tcp ]
port-client [ 1 - 65535 ]
ip-server [ ip_address | dns_name ]
port-server [ 1 - 65535 ]
url-server ("server_name") number [ 1 1073741823 ]
interval (00:00:00:20) sleep (00:00:30:00) contact-email ("string@domain_name") location ("string"):
The heartbeat setting is used in conjunction with the conguration server to broadcast contact and location information about your Gateway. You can specify the protocol, port, IP-, port-, and URL-server. The interval setting species the broadcast update frequency. Part of sequence control. The interval is the spacing between heartbeats, in d:h:m:s. The contact-email setting is a quote-enclosed text string giving an email address for the Gateways administrator. The location setting is a text string allowing you to specify your geographical or other location, such as Secaucus, NJ. The number setting is part of the sequence control. This is the number of heartbeats to send, at each interval, before sleeping. For example, if this is 20, in the above layout, each heartbeat sequence will send out a total 20 heartbeats, spaced at 30 second intervals, and then sleep for 30 minutes. So to have the Gateway send out packets forever, this number can be set very high. If it is 1440 and the interval is 1 minute, say, the heartbeat will go out every minute for 1440 minutes, or one day, before sleeping. The sleep setting is part of sequence control. This is the time to sleep before starting another heart-
beat sequence, in d:h:m:s. set system ntp option [ off | on ]:
server-address (north-america.pool.ntp.org) alt-server-address (pool.ntp.org):
time-zone [ -12 - 12 ]
update-period (60) [ 1 - 65535 ]:
daylight-savings [ off | on ]
Species the NTP server address, time zone, and how often the Gateway should check the time from the NTP server. The NTP server-address and alt-server-address can be entered as DNS names as well as IP addresses. NTP time-zone of 0 is GMT time; options are -12 through 12 (+/- 1 hour increments from GMT time). update-period species how often, in minutes, the Gateway should update the clock. daylight-sav-
ings species whether daylight savings time is in effect; it defaults to off. set system zerotouch option [ on | off ]
Enables or disables the Zero Touch option. 300 Zero Touch refers to automatic conguration of your Motorola Netopia Gateway. The Motorola Netopia Gateway has default settings such that initial connection to the Internet will succeed. If the zerotouch option is set to on, HTTP requests to any destination IP address except the IP address(es) of the congured redirection URL(s) will access a redirection server. DNS trafc will not be blocked. Other trafc from the LAN to all destinations will be dropped. set system zerotouch redirect-url redirection-URL Species the URL(s) of the desired redirection server(s) when the zerotouch option is set to on. URLs may be a maximum of 192 characters long, and may be in any of the following forms:
http://<domain-name OR IP address>/optionalPath:port http://<domain-name OR IP address>/optionalPath https://<domain-name OR IP address>/optionalPath:port https://<domain-name OR IP address>/optionalPath
<domain-name OR IP address>/optionalPath:port
<domain-name OR IP address>/optionalPath If the port number is omitted, port 80 will be assumed. Syslog set system syslog option [ off | on ]
Enables or disables system syslog feature. If syslog option is on, the following commands are available:
set system syslog host-nameip [ ip_address | hostname ]
Species the syslog servers address either in dotted decimal format or as a DNS name up to 64 charac-
ters. set system syslog log-facility [ local0 ... local7 ]
Sets the UNIX syslog Facility. Acceptable values are local0 through local7. set system syslog log-violations [ off | on ]
Species whether violations are logged or ignored. set system syslog log-accepted [ off | on ]
Species whether acceptances are logged or ignored. set system syslog log-attempts [ off | on ]
Species whether connection attempts are logged or ignored. 301 Administrators Handbook Default syslog installation procedure 1. Access the router via telnet from the private LAN. DHCP server is enabled on the LAN by default. 2. The products stateful inspection feature must be enabled in order to examine TCP, UDP and ICMP packets destined for the router or the private hosts. This can be done by entering the CONFIG interface. Type config Type the command to enable stateful inspection set security state-insp ip-ppp vcc1 option on Type the command to enable the router to drop fragmented packets set security state-insp ip-ppp vcc1 deny-fragments on 3. Enabling syslog:
Type config Type the command to enable syslog set system syslog option on Set the IP Address of the syslog host set system syslog host-nameip <ip-addr>
(example: set system syslog host-nameip 10.3.1.1) Enable/change the options you require set system syslog log-facility local1 set system syslog log-violations on set system syslog log-accepted on set system syslog log-attempts on 4. Set NTP parameters Type config Set the time-zone Default is 0 or GMT set system ntp time-zone <zone>
(example: set system ntp time-zone 8) Set NTP server-address if necessary (default is 204.152.184.72) set system ntp server-address <ip-addr>
(example:
set system ntp server-address 204.152.184.73) Set alternate server address set system ntp alt-server-address <ip-addr>
5. Type the command to save the conguration Type save Exit the conguration interface by typing exit Restart the router by typing restart The router will reboot with the new conguration in effect. 302 Wireless Settings (supported models) set wireless option ( on | off ) Administratively enables or disables the wireless interface. set wireless network-id ssid { network_name }
Species the wireless network id for the Gateway. A unique ssid is generated for each Gateway. You must set your wireless clients to connect to this exact id, which can be changed to any 32-character string. set wireless auto-channel mode { off | at-startup | continuous }
Species the wireless AutoChannel Setting for 802.11G models. AutoChannel is a feature that allows the Motorola Netopia Gateway to determine the best channel to broadcast automatically. For details, see Advanced on page 56. set wireless default-channel { 1...14 }
Species the wireless 2.4GHz sub channel on which the wireless Gateway will operate. For US operation, this is limited to channels 111. Other countries vary; for example, Japan is channel 14 only. The default channel in the US is 6. Channel selection can have a signicant impact on performance, depending on other wireless activity in proximity to this AP. Channel selection is not necessary at the clients; clients will scan the available channels and look for APs using the same ssid as the client. set wireless network-id closed-system { on | off }
When this setting is enabled, a client must know the ssid in order to connect or even see the wireless access point. When disabled, a client may scan for available wireless access points and will see this one. Enable this setting for greater security. The default is on. set wireless mode { both-b-and-g | b-only | g-only }
Species the wireless operating mode for connecting wireless clients: both-b-and-g, b-only, or g-only, and locks the Gateway in that mode. NOTE:
If you choose to limit the operating mode to B or G only, clients using the mode you excluded will not be able to connect. set wireless multi-ssid option { on | off }
Enables or disables the multi-ssid feature which allows you to add additional network identiers (SSIDs or Network Names) for your wireless network. When enabled, you can specify up to three additional SSIDs with separate privacy settings for each. See below. 303 Administrators Handbook set wireless multi-ssid {second-ssid | third-ssid | fourth-ssid } name Species a descriptive name for each SSID. when multi-ssid option is set to on. set wireless multi-ssid second-ssid-privacy { off | WEP | WPA-PSK |
WPA-802.1x }
set wireless multi-ssid third-ssid-privacy { off | WEP | WPA-PSK |
WPA-802.1x }
set wireless multi-ssid fourth-ssid-privacy { off | WEP | WPA-PSK |
WPA-802.1x }
Species the type of privacy enabled on multiple SSIDs when multi-ssid option is set to on. off = no pri-
vacy; WEP = WEP encryption; WPA-PSK = Wireless Protected Access/Pre-Shared Key; WPA-802.1x = Wire-
less Protected Access/802.1x authentication. See Wireless Privacy Settings on page 308 for more information. NOTE:
WEP is supported on only one SSID at a time, and will not be available if another SSID already has it congured. set wireless multi-ssid second-ssid-wpa-ver { all | WPA1-only |
WPA2-only }
set wireless multi-ssid third-ssid-wpa-ver { all | WPA1-only |
WPA2-only }
set wireless multi-ssid fourth-ssid-wpa-ver { all | WPA1-only |
WPA2-only }
Species the type of WPA version enabled on multiple SSIDs when multi-ssid option is set to on and pri-
vacy is set tp WPA-PSK. See Wireless Privacy Settings on page 308 for more information. set wireless multi-ssid second-ssid-psk { string }
set wireless multi-ssid third-ssid-psk { string }
set wireless multi-ssid fourth-ssid-psk { string }
Species a WPA passphrase for the multiple SSIDs, when second-, third-, or fourth-ssid-privacy is set to WPA-PSK. The Pre Shared Key is a passphrase shared between the Gateway and the clients and is used to generate dynamically changing keys. The passphrase can be 8 63 characters. It is recommended to use at least 20 characters for best security. set wireless multi-ssid second-ssid-weplen [ 40/64bit | 128bit | 256bit ]
set wireless multi-ssid third-ssid-weplen [ 40/64bit | 128bit | 256bit ]
set wireless multi-ssid fourth-ssid-weplen [ 40/64bit | 128bit | 256bit ]
Species the WEP key length for the multiple SSIDs, when second-, third-, or fourth-ssid-privacy is set to WEP. 40bit encryption is equivalent to 64bit encryption. The longer the key, the stronger the encryption and the more difcult it is to break the encryption. 304 set wireless multi-ssid second-ssid-wepkey { hexadecimal digits }
set wireless multi-ssid third-ssid-wepkey { hexadecimal digits }
set wireless multi-ssid fourth-ssid-wepkey { hexadecimal digits }
Species a WEP key for the multiple SSIDs, when second-, third-, or fourth-ssid-privacy is set to WEP. For 40/64bit encryption, you need 10 digits; 26 digits for 128bit, and 58 digits for 256bit WEP. Valid hexa-
decimal characters are 0 9, a f. set wireless no-bridging [ off | on ]
When set to on, this will block wireless clients from communicating with other wireless clients on the LAN side of the Gateway. set wireless tx-power [ full | medium | fair | low | minimal ]
Sets the wireless transmit power, scaling down the router's wireless transmit coverage by lowering its radio power output. Default is full power. Transmit power settings are useful in large venues with multiple wire-
less routers where you want to reuse channels. Since there are only three non-overlapping channels in the 802.11 spectrum, it helps to size the Gateways cell to match the location. This allows you to install a router to cover a small hole without conicting with other routers nearby. 305 Administrators Handbook Wireless Multi-media (WMM) Settings Router EDCA Parameters (Enhanced Distributed Channel Access) govern wireless data from your Gate-
way to the client; Client EDCA Parameters govern wireless data from the client to your Gateway. set wireless wmm option [ off | on ]
Enables or disables wireless multi-media settings option, which allows you to ne tune WiFi Multimedia Quality of Service (QoS) by transmitting data depending on Diffserv priority settings. These priorities are mapped into four Access Categories (AC), in increasing order of priority: Background (BK), Best Effort (BE), Video (VI), and Voice (VO). It requires WiFi Multimedia-capable clients, usually a separate feature enabled at the client. aifs: (Arbitration Interframe Spacing) the wait time in milliseconds for data frames. Valid values are: 1 255 cwmin: (Minimum Contention Window) upper limit in milliseconds of the range for determining initial random backoff. The value you choose must be lower than cwmax. Valid values are: 1, 3, 7, 15, 31, 63, 127, 255, or 511. cwmax: (Maximum Contention Window) upper limit in milliseconds of the range of determining nal ran-
dom backoff. The value you choose must be higher than cwmin. Valid values are: 3, 7, 15, 31, 63, 127, 255, 511, or 1023. txoplimit: Time interval in microseconds that clients may initiate transmissions. Valid values are: 0 9999. NOTE:
It is not recommended that you modify these settings without direct knowledge or instructions to do so. Modifying these settings inappropriately could seriously degrade network perfor-
mance. set wireless wmm router-edca voice { aifs 1... 255 }
set wireless wmm router-edca voice { cwmin value }
set wireless wmm router-edca voice { cwmax value }
Sets values for Gateway WMM voice parameters. set wireless wmm router-edca video { aifs 1... 255 }
set wireless wmm router-edca video { cwmin value }
set wireless wmm router-edca video { cwmax value }
Sets values for Gateway WMM video parameters. set wireless wmm router-edca best-effort { aifs 1... 255 }
set wireless wmm router-edca best-effort { cwmin value }
set wireless wmm router-edca best-effort { cwmax value }
Sets values for Gateway WMM best effort parameters. 306 set wireless wmm router-edca background { aifs 1... 255 }
set wireless wmm router-edca background { cwmin value }
set wireless wmm router-edca background { cwmax value }
Sets values for Gateway WMM background parameters. set wireless wmm client-edca voice { aifs 1... 255 }
set wireless wmm client-edca voice { cwmin value }
set wireless wmm client-edca voice { cwmax value }
set wireless wmm client-edca voice { txoplimit 0... 9999 }
Sets values for client WMM voice parameters. set wireless wmm client-edca video { aifs 1... 255 }
set wireless wmm client-edca video { cwmin value }
set wireless wmm client-edca video { cwmax value }
set wireless wmm client-edca video { txoplimit 0... 9999 }
Sets values for client WMM video parameters. set wireless wmm client-edca best-effort { aifs 1... 255 }
set wireless wmm client-edca best-effort { cwmin value }
set wireless wmm client-edca best-effort { cwmax value }
set wireless wmm client-edca best-effort { txoplimit 0... 9999 }
Sets values for client WMM best effort parameters. set wireless wmm client-edca background { aifs 1... 255 }
set wireless wmm client-edca background { cwmin value }
set wireless wmm client-edca background { cwmax value }
set wireless wmm client-edca background { txoplimit 0... 9999 }
Sets values for client WMM background parameters. 307 Administrators Handbook Wireless Privacy Settings set wireless network-id privacy option { off | WEP | WPA-PSK |
WPA-802.1x }
Species the type of privacy enabled on the wireless LAN. off = no privacy; WEP = WEP encryption; WPA-
PSK = Wireless Protected Access/Pre-Shared Key; WPA-802.1x = Wireless Protected Access/802.1x authentication. See Wireless on page 53 for a discussion of these options. WPA provides Wireless Protected Access, the most secure option for your wireless network. This mecha-
nism provides the best data protection and access control. PSK requires a Pre-Shared Key; 802.1x requires a RADIUS server for authentication. WEP is Wired Equivalent Privacy, a method of encrypting data between the wireless Gateway and its clients. It is strongly recommended to turn this on as it is the primary way to protect your network and data from intruders. Note that 40bit is the same as 64bit and will work with either type of wireless client. The default is off. A single key is selected (see default-key) for encryption of outbound/transmitted packets. The WEP-
enabled client must have the identical key, of the same length, in the identical slot (1..4) as the wireless Gateway, in order to successfully receive and decrypt the packet. Similarly, the client also has a default key that it uses to encrypt its transmissions. In order for the wireless Gateway to receive the clients data, it must likewise have the identical key, of the same length, in the same slot. For simplicity, a wireless Gate-
way and its clients need only enter, share, and use the rst key. set wireless network-id privacy pre-shared-key string The Pre Shared Key is a passphrase shared between the Router and the clients and is used to generate dynamically changing keys, when WPA-PSK is selected or enabled. The passphrase can be 8 63 charac-
ters. It is recommended to use at least 20 characters for best security. set wireless network-id privacy default-keyid { 1...4 }
Species which WEP encryption key (of 4) the wireless Gateway will use to transmit data. The client must have an identical matching key, in the same numeric slot, in order to successfully decode. Note that a client allows you to choose which of its keys it will use to transmit. Therefore, you must have an identical key in the same numeric slot on the Gateway. For simplicity, it is easiest to have both the Gateway and the client transmit with the same key. The default is 1. set wireless network-id privacy encryption-key1-length
{40/64bit, 128bit, 256bit}
set wireless network-id privacy encryption-key2-length
{40/64bit, 128bit, 256bit}
set wireless network-id privacy encryption-key3-length
{40/64bit, 128bit, 256bit}
set wireless network-id privacy encryption-key4-length
{40/64bit, 128bit, 256bit}
Selects the length of each encryption key. 40bit encryption is equivalent to 64bit encryption. The longer the key, the stronger the encryption and the more difcult it is to break the encryption. 308 set wireless network-id privacy encryption-key1 { hexadecimal digits }
set wireless network-id privacy encryption-key2 { hexadecimal digits }
set wireless network-id privacy encryption-key3 { hexadecimal digits }
set wireless network-id privacy encryption-key4 { hexadecimal digits }
The encryption keys. Enter keys using hexadecimal digits. For 40/64bit encryption, you need 10 digits; 26 digits for 128bit, and 58 digits for 256bit WEP. Valid hexadecimal characters are 0 9, a f. Example 40bit key: 02468ACE02. Example 128bit key: 0123456789ABCDEF0123456789. Example 256bit key: 592CA140F0A238B0C61AE162F592CA140F0A238B0C61AE162F21A09C. You must set at least one of these keys, indicated by the default-keyid. Wireless MAC Address Authorization Settings set wireless mac-auth option { on | off }
Enabling this feature limits the MAC addresses that are allowed to access the LAN as well as the WAN to specied MAC (hardware) addresses. set wireless mac-auth wrlss-MAC-list mac-address MAC-address_string Enters a new MAC address into the MAC address authorization table. The format for an Ethernet MAC address is six hexadecimal values between 00 and FF inclusive separated by colons or dashes (e.g., 00:00:C5:70:00:04). set wireless mac-auth wrlss-MAC-list mac-address MAC-address_string allow-access { on | off }
Designates whether the MAC address is enabled or not for wireless network access. Disabled MAC addresses cannot be used for access until enabled. 309 Administrators Handbook RADIUS Server Settings set radius radius-name "server_name_string"
Species the default RADIUS server name or IP address. set radius radius-secret "shared_secret"
Species the RADIUS secret key used by this server. The shared secret should have the same characteris-
tics as a normal password. set radius alt-radius-name "server_name_string"
Species an alternate RADIUS server name or IP address to be used if the primary server is unreachable. set radius alt-radius-secret "shared_secret"
Species the secret key used by the alternate RADIUS server. set radius radius-port port_number Species the port on which the RADIUS server is listening. The default value is 1812. 310 VLAN Settings You can create up to 8 VLANs, and you can also restrict any VLAN, and the computers on it, from adminis-
tering the Gateway. See VLAN on page 107 for more information. set vlan name name Sets the descriptive name for the VLAN. If no name is specied, displays a selection list of node names to select for editing. Once a new VLAN name is specied, presents the list of VLAN characteristics to dene. set vlan name name type [ by-port | global ]
Species VLAN type: by-port or global. Default is by-port. set vlan name name id VID Species VLAN id (VID), when type is set to global. The numerical range of possible VIDs is 1 - 4094. (A VID of zero (0) is permitted on the Ethernet WAN port only.) set vlan name name admin-restricted [ off | on ]
Turns admin-restricted off or on. Default is off. If you select on, administrative access to the Gateway is blocked from the specied VLAN. set vlan name name seg-pbits [ 0 - 7 ]
Species the 802.1p priority bit. If you set this to a value greater than 0, all packets of this VLAN with unmarked priority bits (pbits) will be re-marked to this priority. set vlan name name ports port option [ off | on ]
Enables or disables the Gateways physical Ethernet, USB or VCC port or wireless SSID for the specied VLAN. set vlan name name ports port tag [ off | on ]
If set to on, packets transmitted from this port through this VLAN must be tagged with the VLAN VID. Pack-
ets received through this port destined for this VLAN must be tagged with the VLAN VID by the source. The tag option is only available on global type ports. set vlan name name ports port priority [ off | on ]
Enables or disables the priority for the port assigned to the specied VLAN allowing packet prioritization based on any 802.1p priority bits in the VLAN header to prioritize packets within the Gateways internal queues, according to DiffServ priority mapping rules. set vlan name name ports port promote [ off | on ]
Enables or disables the promote setting allowing writing any 802.1p priority bits into the IP-TOS header bit eld for received IP packets on this port destined for this VLAN. Write any IP-TOS priority bits into the 311 Administrators Handbook 802.1p priority bit eld for tagged IP packets transmitted from this port for this VLAN. All mappings between Ethernet 802.1p and IP-TOS are made via diffserv dscp-map settings. set vlan name name ports port port-pbits [ 0 - 7 ]
Species the 802.1p priority bit for this port associated with the specied VLAN. If you set this to a value greater than 0, all packets of this port with unmarked priority bits (pbits) will be re-marked to this priority. set vlan name name ip-interface ip_interface Associates this VLAN with the specied IP interface. By default the ip-vcc1 and ip-eth-a interfaces are available, but others may be dened. set vlan name name inter-vlan-routing [ group-1... group-8 ] [ off | on ]
When set to on, inter-vlan-routing allows VLANs in the specied group to route trafc to the others;
ungrouped VLANs cannot route trafc to each other. You must save the changes, exit out of conguration mode, and restart the Gateway for the changes to take effect. Example 1:
A simple example using the Step method Navigate to the VLAN item:
Netopia-3000/9437188 (top)>> vlan Netopia-3000/9437188 (vlan)>> set vlan
(vlan) node list ... Select (name) node to modify from list, or enter new (name) to create. vlan name (?): vlan1
(vlan1) has been added to the (vlan) list name "vlan1"
type (by-port) [ by-port | global ]: by-port admin-restricted (off) [ off | on ]: off seg-pbits (0) [ 0 - 7 ]: 0 ports At this point you have created a VLAN. It is called vlan1, without any admin restrictions. Next, add the port eth0.1 port to this VLAN:
ports eth0.1 option (off) [ off | on ]: on priority (off) [ off | on ]: on promote (off) [ off | on ]: on port-pbits (0) [ 0 - 7 ]: 1 eth0.2 option (off) [ off | on ]:
eth0.3 option (off) [ off | on ]:
eth0.4 option (off) [ off | on ]:
ssid1 312 option (off) [ off | on ]:
vcc1 option (off) [ off | on ]:
Assign an IP interface:
ip-vcc1 option (off) [ off | on ]:
ip-eth-a option (off) [ off | on ]: on ipsec-mgmt1 option (off) [ off | on ]:
Netopia-3000/9437188 (vlan)>>
Example 2:
An example of a Triple-Play setup:
set vlan name "LanPorts" type by-port set vlan name "LanPorts" admin-restricted off set vlan name "LanPorts" seg-pbits 0 set vlan name "LanPorts" ports eth0.1 option off set vlan name "LanPorts" ports eth0.2 option on set vlan name "LanPorts" ports eth0.2 priority off set vlan name "LanPorts" ports eth0.2 promote off set vlan name "LanPorts" ports eth0.2 port-pbits 0 set vlan name "LanPorts" ports eth0.3 option on set vlan name "LanPorts" ports eth0.3 priority off set vlan name "LanPorts" ports eth0.3 promote off set vlan name "LanPorts" ports eth0.3 port-pbits 0 set vlan name "LanPorts" ports eth0.4 option on set vlan name "LanPorts" ports eth0.4 priority off set vlan name "LanPorts" ports eth0.4 promote off set vlan name "LanPorts" ports eth0.4 port-pbits 0 set vlan name "LanPorts" ports ssid1 option on set vlan name "LanPorts" ports ssid1 priority off set vlan name "LanPorts" ports ssid1 promote off set vlan name "LanPorts" ports ssid1 port-pbits 0 set vlan name "LanPorts" ports eth1 option off set vlan name "LanPorts" ip-interfaces ip-ppp-a option off set vlan name "LanPorts" ip-interfaces ip-eth-b option off set vlan name "LanPorts" ip-interfaces ip-eth-c option off set vlan name "LanPorts" ip-interfaces ip-eth-a option on set vlan name "LanPorts" inter-vlan-routing group-1 on set vlan name "LanPorts" inter-vlan-routing group-2 off set vlan name "LanPorts" inter-vlan-routing group-3 off set vlan name "LanPorts" inter-vlan-routing group-4 off set vlan name "Voip_217" type global set vlan name "Voip_217" id 217 set vlan name "Voip_217" admin-restricted off set vlan name "Voip_217" seg-pbits 7 set vlan name "Voip_217" ports eth0.1 option off set vlan name "Voip_217" ports eth0.2 option off set vlan name "Voip_217" ports eth0.3 option off set vlan name "Voip_217" ports eth0.4 option off set vlan name "Voip_217" ports ssid1 option off set vlan name "Voip_217" ports eth1 option on set vlan name "Voip_217" ports eth1 tag on set vlan name "Voip_217" ports eth1 priority off set vlan name "Voip_217" ports eth1 promote off set vlan name "Voip_217" ports eth1 port-pbits 0 set vlan name "Voip_217" ip-interfaces ip-ppp-a option off set vlan name "Voip_217" ip-interfaces ip-eth-b option on set vlan name "Voip_217" ip-interfaces ip-eth-c option off 313 Administrators Handbook set vlan name "Voip_217" ip-interfaces ip-eth-a option off set vlan name "Voip_217" inter-vlan-routing group-1 on set vlan name "Voip_217" inter-vlan-routing group-2 off set vlan name "Voip_217" inter-vlan-routing group-3 off set vlan name "Voip_217" inter-vlan-routing group-4 off set vlan name "PPPoE_11" type global set vlan name "PPPoE_11" id 11 set vlan name "PPPoE_11" admin-restricted off set vlan name "PPPoE_11" seg-pbits 0 set vlan name "PPPoE_11" ports eth0.1 option off set vlan name "PPPoE_11" ports eth0.2 option off set vlan name "PPPoE_11" ports eth0.3 option off set vlan name "PPPoE_11" ports eth0.4 option off set vlan name "PPPoE_11" ports ssid1 option off set vlan name "PPPoE_11" ports eth1 option on set vlan name "PPPoE_11" ports eth1 tag on set vlan name "PPPoE_11" ports eth1 priority off set vlan name "PPPoE_11" ports eth1 promote off set vlan name "PPPoE_11" ports eth1 port-pbits 0 set vlan name "PPPoE_11" ip-interfaces ip-ppp-a option on set vlan name "PPPoE_11" ip-interfaces ip-eth-b option off set vlan name "PPPoE_11" ip-interfaces ip-eth-c option off set vlan name "PPPoE_11" ip-interfaces ip-eth-a option off set vlan name "PPPoE_11" inter-vlan-routing group-1 on set vlan name "PPPoE_11" inter-vlan-routing group-2 off set vlan name "PPPoE_11" inter-vlan-routing group-3 off set vlan name "PPPoE_11" inter-vlan-routing group-4 off set vlan name "Mgmt_2017" type global set vlan name "Mgmt_2017" id 2017 set vlan name "Mgmt_2017" admin-restricted off set vlan name "Mgmt_2017" seg-pbits 3 set vlan name "Mgmt_2017" ports eth0.1 option off set vlan name "Mgmt_2017" ports eth0.2 option off set vlan name "Mgmt_2017" ports eth0.3 option off set vlan name "Mgmt_2017" ports eth0.4 option off set vlan name "Mgmt_2017" ports ssid1 option off set vlan name "Mgmt_2017" ports eth1 option on set vlan name "Mgmt_2017" ports eth1 tag on set vlan name "Mgmt_2017" ports eth1 priority off set vlan name "Mgmt_2017" ports eth1 promote off set vlan name "Mgmt_2017" ports eth1 port-pbits 0 set vlan name "Mgmt_2017" ip-interfaces ip-ppp-a option off set vlan name "Mgmt_2017" ip-interfaces ip-eth-b option off set vlan name "Mgmt_2017" ip-interfaces ip-eth-c option on set vlan name "Mgmt_2017" ip-interfaces ip-eth-a option off set vlan name "Mgmt_2017" inter-vlan-routing group-1 off set vlan name "Mgmt_2017" inter-vlan-routing group-2 off set vlan name "Mgmt_2017" inter-vlan-routing group-3 off set vlan name "Mgmt_2017" inter-vlan-routing group-4 off set vlan name "Video_31" type global set vlan name "Video_31" id 31 set vlan name "Video_31" admin-restricted off set vlan name "Video_31" seg-pbits 5 set vlan name "Video_31" ports eth0.1 option on set vlan name "Video_31" ports eth0.1 tag off set vlan name "Video_31" ports eth0.1 priority off set vlan name "Video_31" ports eth0.1 promote off set vlan name "Video_31" ports eth0.1 port-pbits 0 set vlan name "Video_31" ports eth0.2 option off set vlan name "Video_31" ports eth0.3 option off set vlan name "Video_31" ports eth0.4 option off set vlan name "Video_31" ports ssid1 option off set vlan name "Video_31" ports eth1 option on 314 set vlan name "Video_31" ports eth1 tag on set vlan name "Video_31" ports eth1 priority off set vlan name "Video_31" ports eth1 promote off set vlan name "Video_31" ports eth1 port-pbits 0 set vlan name "Video_31" ip-interfaces ip-ppp-a option off set vlan name "Video_31" ip-interfaces ip-eth-b option off set vlan name "Video_31" ip-interfaces ip-eth-c option off set vlan name "Video_31" ip-interfaces ip-eth-a option off set vlan name "Video_31" inter-vlan-routing group-1 off set vlan name "Video_31" inter-vlan-routing group-2 off set vlan name "Video_31" inter-vlan-routing group-3 off set vlan name "Video_31" inter-vlan-routing group-4 off You must save the changes, exit out of conguration mode, and restart the Gateway for the changes to take effect. 315 Administrators Handbook VoIP settings
(supported models only) Voice-over-IP (VoIP) refers to the ability to make voice telephone calls over the Internet. This differs from tra-
ditional phone calls that use the Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN). VoIP calls use an Internet pro-
tocol, Session Initiation Protocol (SIP), to transmit sound over a network or the Internet in the form of data packets. Certain Motorola Netopia Gateway models have two separate voice ports for connecting tele-
phone handsets. These models support VoIP. If your Gateway is a VoIP model, you can congure the VoIP features. set voip phone [ 0 | 1 ] sip-option [ off | on ]
Turns SIP on or off for the specied phone. Default is off. set voip phone [ 0 | 1 ] sip-proxy-server [ server_name | ip_address ]
Species the SIP proxy server for the specied phone by fully qualied server name or IP address. set voip phone [ 0 | 1 ] sip-proxy-server-domain domain_name Species the SIP proxy server domain name or IP address for the specied phone. set voip phone [ 0 | 1 ] sip-proxy-server-transport [ UDP | TCP | TLS ]
Species the SIP proxy server transport protocol for the specied phone. Default is UDP. set voip phone [ 0 | 1 ] sip-registrar-setting sip-registrar-server
[ server_name | ip_address ]
Species the SIP registration server for the specied phone by fully qualied server name or IP address. set voip phone [ 0 | 1 ] sip-registrar-setting sip-registrar-server-transport [ UDP | TCP | TLS ]
Species the SIP registration server transport protocol for the specied phone . Default is UDP. set voip phone [ 0 | 1 ] sip-registrar-setting sip-expires-time
[ 0 - 65535 ]
Species the SIP registration server time-out duration from 0 65535 seconds for the specied phone. Default is 3600 (1 hour). set voip phone [ 0 | 1 ] sip-out-proxy-server
[ server_name | ip_address ]
Species the SIP outbound proxy server for the specied phone by fully qualied server name or IP address. 316 set voip phone [ 0 | 1 ] sip-user-display-name name Species the user name that is displayed on the web UI Home page, or other caller-id displays for the spec-
ied phone. set voip phone [ 0 | 1 ] sip-user-name username Species the user name that authenticates the user to SIP for the specied phone. set voip phone [ 0 | 1 ] sip-user-password password Species the password that authenticates the user to SIP for the specied phone. set voip phone [ 0 | 1 ] auth-id string Species the authorization ID that authenticates the user to SIP for the specied phone. Most SIP Servers expect this to be the username itself but some may use auth-id. set voip phone [ 0 | 1 ] codec G711A priority
[ 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | none ]
Assigns a priority to the alaw codec, the common analog voice encoding method used outside North Amer-
ica. set voip phone [ 0 | 1 ] codec G711U priority
[ 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | none ]
Assigns a priority to the ulaw codec, the common analog voice encoding method used in North America. set voip phone [ 0 | 1 ] codec G729A priority
[ 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | none ]
Assigns a priority to the G729 annex A codec, the common analog voice compression implementation used in North America. set voip phone [ 0 | 1 ] codec G726_16 priority
[ 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | none ]
Assigns a priority to the G726-16 codec, a common audio media type implementation at 16 kbit/s. set voip phone [ 0 | 1 ] codec G726_24 priority
[ 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | none ]
Assigns a priority to the G726-24 codec, a common audio media type implementation at 24 kbit/s. set voip phone [ 0 | 1 ] codec G726_32 priority
[ 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | none ]
Assigns a priority to the G726-32 codec, a common audio media type implementation at 32 kbit/s. 317 Administrators Handbook set voip phone [ 0 | 1 ] codec G726_40 priority
[ 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | none ]
Assigns a priority to the G726-40 codec, a common audio media type implementation at 40 kbit/s. set voip phone [ 0 | 1 ] sip-advanced-setting sip-dtmf-mode
[ inband | rfc2833 | info ]
sip-dtmf-mode sets the Dual Tone Multi-Frequency Mode:
inband: sends the DTMF digits as a normal inband tone. rfc2833: sends the DTMF digits as an event as part of the RTP packet header information. info: sends the DTMF digits in the SIP INFO message. set voip phone [ 0 | 1 ] sip-advanced-setting sip-end-of-dial-marker
[ off | on ]
sip-end-of-dial-marker turns an end of dial (#) signal that indicates that the dialed number is com-
plete on or off. set voip phone [ 0 | 1 ] sip-advanced-setting call-feature call-forwarding-all-option [ off | on ]
call-forwarding-all-option turns unconditional call forwarding on or off. set voip phone [ 0 | 1 ] sip-advanced-setting call-feature call-forwarding-all-number phone_number call-forwarding-all-number species the number to which calls are to be forwarded when call-forward-
ing-all-option is on. set voip phone [ 0 | 1 ] sip-advanced-setting call-feature call-forwarding-on-busy-option [ off | on ]
call-forwarding-on-busy-option turns call forwarding when the line is busy on or off. set voip phone [ 0 | 1 ] sip-advanced-setting call-feature call-forwarding-on-no-answer-option [ off | on ]
call-forwarding-on-no-answer-option turns call forwarding when there is no answer on or off. set voip phone [ 0 | 1 ] sip-advanced-setting call-feature call-forwarding-on-no-answer-number phone_number call-forwarding-on-no-answer-number species the number to which calls are to be forwarded when call-forwarding-on-no-answer-option is on. 318 set voip phone [ 0 | 1 ] sip-advanced-setting call-feature call-waiting-option [ off | on ]
call-waiting-option enables or disables call waiting. set voip phone [ 0 | 1 ] sip-advanced-setting call-feature call-conferencing-option [ off | on ]
call-conferencing-option enables or disables 3-way call conferencing. set voip phone [ 0 | 1 ] sip-advanced-setting call-feature subscribe-do-not-disturb-option [ off | on ]
subscribe-do-not-disturb-option enables or disables option to prevent the phone from ringing. set voip phone [ 0 | 1 ] sip-advanced-setting call-feature subscribe-mwi-option [ off | on ]
subscribe-mwi-option if set to on, the Message Waiting Indicator is enabled when new voice mail is received. set voip phone [ 0 | 1 ] sip-advanced-setting dsp-settings echo-option
[ echo-off | echo-on | echo-on-nlp | echo-on-cng-nlp ]
echo-option species under what conditions the system invokes or disables echo cancellation. Default is echo-on-cng-nlp (Comfort Noise Generation with non-linear processor). set voip phone [ 0 | 1 ] sip-advanced-setting dsp-settings echo-start-attenuation [ 0 - 65535 ]
echo-start-attenuation species the minimum attenuation level at which to invoke echo cancellation. Default is 8192. set voip phone [ 0 | 1 ] sip-advanced-setting dsp-settings echo-max-attenuation [ 0 - 65535 ]
echo-max-attenuation species the maximum attenuation level at which to invoke echo cancellation. Default is 16384. set voip phone [ 0 | 1 ] sip-advanced-setting dsp-settings echo-tail-length [ 0 - 65535 ]
echo-tail-length species the duration of an echo tail required to invoke cancellation. Default is 0. set voip phone [ 0 | 1 ] sip-advanced-setting dsp-settings vad-option [ off | on ]
vad-option turns Voice Activity Detection on or off. Default is off. 319 Administrators Handbook set voip phone [ 0 | 1 ] sip-advanced-setting dsp-settings vad-setting [ vad-cn | vad-std-sid | vad-suppress-sid ]
When vad-option is set to on:
vad-cn enables Voice Activity Detection/Comfort Noise Generation. When speech is not present, the CNG algorithm generates a noise signal at the level sent from the transmit side. vad-std-sid enables Voice Activity Detection with standard Silence Insertion Descriptor support. vad-suppress-sid enables Voice Activity Detection but suppresses standard Silence Insertion Descriptor support. Example set voip phone: 0 sip-option on set voip phone: 0 sip-proxy-server "10.3.1.129"
set voip phone: 0 sip-proxy-server-domain ""
set voip phone: 0 sip-proxy-server-transport UDP set voip phone: 0 sip-registrar-setting sip-registrar-server "10.3.1.129"
set voip phone: 0 sip-registrar-setting sip-registrar-server-transport UDP set voip phone: 0 sip-registrar-setting sip-expires-time 3600 set voip phone: 0 sip-out-proxy-server "10.3.1.129"
set voip phone: 0 sip-user-display-name "4004"
set voip phone: 0 sip-user-name "4004"
set voip phone: 0 sip-user-password "4004"
set voip phone: 0 auth-id "4004"
set voip phone: 0 codec G711A priority 1 set voip phone: 0 codec G711U priority 2 set voip phone: 0 codec G729A priority 3 set voip phone: 0 codec G726_16 priority 4 set voip phone: 0 codec G726_24 priority 5 set voip phone: 0 codec G726_32 priority 6 set voip phone: 0 codec G726_40 priority 7 set voip phone: 0 sip-advanced-setting sip-dtmf-mode rfc2833 set voip phone: 0 sip-advanced-setting sip-end-of-dial-marker off set voip phone: 0 sip-advanced-setting call-feature call-forwarding-all-option off set voip phone: 0 sip-advanced-setting call-feature call-forwarding-on-busy-option off set voip phone: 0 sip-advanced-setting call-feature call-forwarding-on-no-answer-option off set voip phone: 0 sip-advanced-setting call-feature call-waiting-option off set voip phone: 0 sip-advanced-setting call-feature call-conferencing-option off set voip phone: 0 sip-advanced-setting call-feature subscribe-do-not-disturb-option off set voip phone: 0 sip-advanced-setting call-feature subscribe-mwi-option off set voip phone: 0 sip-advanced-setting dsp-settings echo-option echo-on-cng-nlp set voip phone: 0 sip-advanced-setting dsp-settings echo-start-attenuation 8192 set voip phone: 0 sip-advanced-setting dsp-settings echo-max-attenuation 16384 set voip phone: 0 sip-advanced-setting dsp-settings echo-tail-length 0 set voip phone: 0 sip-advanced-setting dsp-settings vad-option off set voip phone: 1 sip-option on set voip phone: 1 sip-proxy-server "10.3.1.129"
set voip phone: 1 sip-proxy-server-domain ""
set voip phone: 1 sip-proxy-server-transport UDP set voip phone: 1 sip-registrar-setting sip-registrar-server "10.3.1.129"
set voip phone: 1 sip-registrar-setting sip-registrar-server-transport UDP set voip phone: 1 sip-registrar-setting sip-expires-time 3600 set voip phone: 1 sip-out-proxy-server "10.3.1.129"
set voip phone: 1 sip-user-display-name "4005"
set voip phone: 1 sip-user-name "4005"
set voip phone: 1 sip-user-password "4005"
set voip phone: 1 auth-id "4005"
set voip phone: 1 codec G711A priority 1 320 set voip phone: 1 codec G711U priority 2 set voip phone: 1 codec G729A priority 3 set voip phone: 1 codec G726_16 priority 4 set voip phone: 1 codec G726_24 priority 5 set voip phone: 1 codec G726_32 priority 6 set voip phone: 1 codec G726_40 priority 7 set voip phone: 1 sip-advanced-setting sip-dtmf-mode rfc2833 set voip phone: 1 sip-advanced-setting sip-end-of-dial-marker off set voip phone: 1 sip-advanced-setting call-feature call-forwarding-all-option off set voip phone: 1 sip-advanced-setting call-feature call-forwarding-on-busy-option off set voip phone: 1 sip-advanced-setting call-feature call-forwarding-on-no-answer-option off set voip phone: 1 sip-advanced-setting call-feature call-waiting-option off set voip phone: 1 sip-advanced-setting call-feature call-conferencing-option off set voip phone: 1 sip-advanced-setting call-feature subscribe-do-not-disturb-option off set voip phone: 1 sip-advanced-setting call-feature subscribe-mwi-option off set voip phone: 1 sip-advanced-setting dsp-settings echo-option echo-on-cng-nlp set voip phone: 1 sip-advanced-setting dsp-settings echo-start-attenuation 8192 set voip phone: 1 sip-advanced-setting dsp-settings echo-max-attenuation 16384 set voip phone: 1 sip-advanced-setting dsp-settings echo-tail-length 0 set voip phone: 1 sip-advanced-setting dsp-settings vad-option off UPnP settings set upnp option [ on | off ]
PCs using UPnP can retrieve the Gateways WAN IP address, and automatically create NAT port maps. This means that applications that support UPnP, and are used with a UPnP-enabled Motorola Netopia Gateway, will not need application layer gateway support on the Motorola Netopia Gateway to work through NAT. The default is on. You can disable UPnP, if you are not using any UPnP devices or applications. set upnp log [ off | on ]
Enables or disables UPnP logging. set upnp read-only [ off | on ]
Enables or disables DSL Forum settings TR-064 is a LAN-side DSL CPE conguration specication and TR-069 is a WAN-side DSL CPE Management specication. TR-064 DSL Forum LAN Side CPE Conguration (TR-064) is an extension of UPnP. It denes more services to locally manage the Motorola Netopia Gateway. While UPnP allows open access to congure the Gateway's fea-
tures, TR-064 requires a password to execute any command that changes the Gateway's conguration. set dslf-lanmgmt option [ off | on ]
Turns TR-064 LAN side management services on or off. The default is on. 321 Administrators Handbook TR-069 DSL Forum CPE WAN Management Protocol (TR-069) provides services similar to UPnP and TR-064. The communication between the Motorola Netopia Gateway and management agent in UPnP and TR-064 is strictly over the LAN, whereas the communication in TR-069 is over the WAN link for some features and over the LAN for others. TR-069 allows a remote Auto-Cong Server (ACS) to provision and manage the Motorola Netopia Gateway. TR-069 protects sensitive data on the Gateway by not advertising its presence, and by password protection. set dslf-cpewan option [ off | on ]
set dslf-cpewan acs-url "acs_url:port_number"
set dslf-cpewan acs-user-name acs_username set dslf-cpewan acs-user-password acs_password Turns TR-069 WAN side management services on or off. For 3300-Series Gateways, the default is off; for 2200-Series Gateways, the default is on. If TR-069 WAN side management services are enabled, species the auto-cong server URL and port number. A username and password must also be supplied, if TR-069 is enabled. The auto-cong server is specied by URL and port number. The format for the ACS URL is as follows:
http://some_url.com:port_number or http://123.45.678.910:port_number On units that support SSL, the format for the ACS URL can also be:
https://some_url.com:port_number https://123.45.678.910:port_number or 322 Backup IP Gateway Settings The purpose of Backup is to provide a recovery mechanism in the event that the primary connection fails. Should the primary WAN connection fail, trafc would be automatically redirected through your alternate gateway device to maintain Internet connectivity. See Backup on page 133 for more information. set backup option [ disabled | manual | automatic ]
Species whether backup to an IP gateway is disabled or enabled as manual or automatic. Default is dis-
abled. set backup failure-timeout [ 1 - 10 ]
Species the number of minutes you want the system to wait before the backup port becomes enabled in the event of primary line failure, when backup option is set to automatic. Sets the Default is 1. set backup ping-host [ 1 | 2 ] [ name | address ]
Species whether the Gateway will ping an IP address or resolvable DNS name, when backup option is set to automatic. These are optional items that are particularly useful for testing if the remote end of a VPN connection has gone down. The Gateway will ping both addresses simultaneously at ve-second intervals, recording the ping responses from each host. The Gateway will proceed into backup mode only if neither of the congured remote hosts responds. set backup ping-host [ 1 | 2 ] [ name hostname | ip-address ip_address ]
Species an IP address or resolvable DNS name for the Gateway to ping. set backup auto-recovery [ off | on ]
Turns automatic recovery off or on. Default is off. set backup recovery-timeout [ 1 - 10 ]
If auto-recovery is set to on, species the number of minutes for the system to wait before attempting to switch back to the WAN connection. This allows you to be sure that the WAN connection is well re-estab-
lished before the gateway switches back to it from the backup mode. Default is 1. set ip backup-gateway option [ on | off ]
Turns the backup gateway option on or off. Default is off. set ip backup-gateway interface ip-address Species the backup gateway interface ip address to which you want to direct the backup connection. 323 Administrators Handbook set ip backup-gateway default ip_address Species the ip address of the default gateway. 324 VDSL Settings CAUTION!
These settings are for very advanced users and lab technicians. Exercise extreme caution when modifying any of these settings. set vdsl sys-option [ 0x00 - 0xff ]
sys-bandplan [ 0x00 - 0xff ]
psd-mask-level [ 0x00 - 0xff ]
pbo-k1_1 [ 0x00000000 - 0xffffffff ]
pbo-k1_2 [ 0x00000000 - 0xffffffff ]
pbo-k1_3 [ 0x00000000 - 0xffffffff ]
pbo-k2_1 [ 0x00000000 - 0xffffffff ]
pbo-k2_2 [ 0x00000000 - 0xffffffff ]
pbo-k2_3 [ 0x00000000 - 0xffffffff ]
line-type [ 0x00 - 0xff ]
us-max-inter-delay [ 0x00 - 0xff ]
ds-max-inter-delay [ 0x00 - 0xff ]
us-target-noise-margin [ 0x0000 - 0xffff ]
ds-target-noise-margin [ 0x0000 - 0xffff ]
min-noise-margin [ 0x0000 - 0xffff ]
port-bandplan [ 0x00 - xff ]
framing-mode [ 0x00 - 0xff ]
band-mod [ 0x00 - 0xff ]
port-option [ 0x00 - 0xff ]
power-mode [ 0x00 - 0xff ]
tx-lter [ 0x00 - 0xff ]
rx-lter [ 0x00 - 0xff ]
dying-gasp [ off | on ]
VDSL Parameter Defaults Parameter Default Meaning sys-option sys-bandplan psd-mask-level pbo-k1_1 pbo-k1_2 pbo-k1_3 pbo-k2_1 pbo-k2_2 0x00 0x02 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 VDSL system option(bit0=ntr, 1=margin, 2=ini, 3=pbo, 4=tlan, 5=pbo) VDSL system bandplan(bp_3_998_4=2, bp4_997_3=3, bp5_997_3=4) VDSL system psd mask(def=0, 1=ansim1cab, 2=ansim2cab, 3=etsim1cab, 4=etsim2cab) VDSL system power back-off k1_1 VDSL system power back-off k1_2 VDSL system power back-off k1_3 VDSL system power back-off k2_1 VDSL system power back-off k2_2 325 Administrators Handbook VDSL Parameter Defaults Parameter Default Meaning pbo-k2_3 line-type us-max-inter-delay ds-max-inter-delay us-target-noise-margin ds-target-noise-margin min-noise-margin port-bandplan framing-mode 0x00 0x81 0x04 0x04 0x0C 0x0C 0x0A 0x02 0x90 band-mod port-option power-mode tx-lter rx-lter dying-gasp 0x11 0x0A - Annex B 0x06 - Annex A 0x01 0x02 0x02 off VDSL system power back-off k2_3 VDSL port line type(auto=0x80, vdsl=0x81, vdsl_etsi=0x82) VDSL port upstream max inter delay VDSL port downstream max inter delay VDSL port upstream target noise margin VDSL port downstream target noise margin VDSL port minimum noise margin VDSL port bandplan DSL port frame mode(0-ATM; 0x80-PTM;
0x90-Auto(EFM/PTM) VDSL port band mod VDSL port portoption(bit0=I43, bit1=v43, bit2=a43, bit3=b43) VDSL port power mode VDSL port txPathFilterMode VDSL port rxPathFilterMode Dying Gasp On/Off 326 VDSL Parameters Accepted Values Parameter sys-option sys-bandplan Accepted Values Bit[0]: NTR_DISABLE Bit[1]: ALW_MARGIN_ADJUST. 1: the SNR margin for the optional band is reduced by up to 2.5 dB, but never below a minimum of 4 dB. Bit[2]: SUPPORT_INI Bit[4]: TLAN Enable Bit[5]: PBO Weak mode Enable (Applicable only when PBO Bit[3]=0. Bit[6]: ADSL_SAFE_MODE Enable Bit[7]: TLAN_SAFE_MODE Enable (Applicable only when TLAN Enable Bit[4] is set. If TLAN_SAFE_MODE not set, line will attempt to retrain at higher rates, but less stable line) BP1_998_3 (0x00) BP2_998_3 (0x01) BP998_3B_8_5M (0x01) BP3_998_4 (0x02) BP998_4B_12M (0x02) BP4_997_3 (0x03) BP997_3B_7_1M (0x03) BP5_997_3 (0x04) BP6_997_4 (0x05) BP997_4B_7_1M (0x05) BP7_MXU_3 (0x06) FLEX_3B_8_5M (0x06) BP8_MXU_2 (0x07) BP9_998_2 (0x08) BP10_998_2 (0x09) BP998_2B_3_8M (0x09) BP11_998_2 (0x0A) BP12_998_2 (0x0B) BP13_MXU_3 (0x0C) BP14_MXU_3 (0x0D) BP15_MXU_3 (0x0E) BP16_997_4B_4P (0x0F) BP17_998_138_4400 (0x10) BP18_997_138_4400(0x11) BP19_997_32_4400(0x12) BP20_998_138_4400_opBand (0x15) BP21_997_138_4400_opBand (0x16) BP22_998_138_4400_opBand(0x16) BP23_998_138_16000 (0x17) BP24_998_3B_8KHZ (0x18) BP25_998_138_17600 (0x19) BP26_CH1_3 (0x1A) BP27_CH1_4 (0x1B) 327 Administrators Handbook VDSL Parameters Accepted Values Parameter psd-mask-level pbo-k1_1 pbo-k1_2 pbo-k1_3 pbo-k2_1 pbo-k2_2 pbo-k2_3 line-type us-max-inter-delay ds-max-inter-delay us-target-noise-margin ds-target-noise-margin min-noise-margin Accepted Values 0x00 -- default mask (old gains from before) 0x01 -- ANSI M1 CAB 0x02 -- ANSI M2 CAB 0x03 -- ETSI M1 CAB 0x04 -- ETSI M2 CAB 0x05 -- ITU-T Annex F (Japan) 0x06 - ANSI M1 Ex 0x07 - ANSI M2 Ex 0x08 -- ETSI M1 Ex 0x09 - ETSI M2 Ex 0x0A - RESERVED 0x0B - PSD_K (Korean M1 FTTCab -59dBm/Hz) K1 and K2 parameters allow the user more exibility in using Upstream Power Back-Off (UPBO) on CPE modem. Changing K1 and K2 values will affect the CPE TX PSD. Refer to VDSL standards for exact relation between K1, K2 parameters and TX PSD. There is an individual set of K1/K2 parameters associated with each upstream band in the PSD: Upstream Band 0 or Optional band, Upstream band 1, Upstream band 2 and Upstream Band 3. Setting all K2 parameters to 0 and all K1 to a high power level(ie low number) will essentially disable UPBO. VDSL_AUTO_DETECT (0x80) VDSL (0x81) VDSL_ETSI (0x82) Maximum upstream interleave delay. Provisioned in steps of 0.5 ms. User dened. Maximum downstream interleave delay. Provisioned in steps of 0.5 ms. User dened. Range 0-31.0dB, increments of 0.5dB (e.g., 0 =
0dB, 1 = 0.5dB, ...) Range 0-31.0dB, increments of 0.5dB (e.g., 0 =
0dB, 1 = 0.5dB, ...) Range 0-31.0dB, increments of 0.5dB (e.g., 0 =
0dB, 1 = 0.5dB, ...) 328 VDSL Parameters Accepted Values Parameter port-bandplan framing-mode Accepted Values BP1_998_3 (0x00) BP2_998_3 (0x01) BP998_3B_8_5M (0x01) BP3_998_4 (0x02) BP998_4B_12M (0x02) BP4_997_3 (0x03) BP997_3B_7_1M (0x03) BP5_997_3 (0x04) BP6_997_4 (0x05) BP997_4B_7_1M (0x05) BP7_MXU_3 (0x06) FLEX_3B_8_5M (0x06) BP8_MXU_2 (0x07) BP9_998_2 (0x08) BP10_998_2 (0x09) BP998_2B_3_8M (0x09) BP11_998_2 (0x0A) BP12_998_2 (0x0B) BP13_MXU_3 (0x0C) BP14_MXU_3 (0x0D) BP15_MXU_3 (0x0E) BP16_997_4B_4P (0x0F) BP17_998_138_4400 (0x10) BP18_997_138_4400(0x11) BP19_997_32_4400(0x12) BP20_998_138_4400_opBand (0x15) BP21_997_138_4400_opBand (0x16) BP22_998_138_4400_opBand(0x16) BP23_998_138_16000 (0x17) BP24_998_3B_8KHZ (0x18) BP25_998_138_17600 (0x19) BP26_CH1_3 (0x1A) BP27_CH1_4 (0x1B) HDLC 0x80 AUTO 0x90 ATM 0x00 329 Administrators Handbook VDSL Parameters Accepted Values Parameter band-mod port-option power-mode tx-lter rx-lter dying-gasp Accepted Values Bit 0, 1: Tx Cfg band 1- All tones on 2- All tones below 640 Khz are turned off 3- All tones below 1.1 Mhz are turned off Bit 2,3: Not used Bit 4,5: Rx Cfg band 1- All tones on 2- All tones below 640 Khz are turned off 3- All tones below 1.1 Mhz are turned off Bit 6, 7:Optional band 0- No Optional band 1- ANNEX_A_6_32 ( ie. 25KHz to 138 KHz) 2- ANNEX_B_32_64 (ie. 138 KHz to 276 KHz) 3- ANNEX_B_6_64 (ie. 25KHz to 276 KHz) Bit [0]: I 43 G.hs carrier set. Bit [1]: V 43 G.hs carrier set. Bit [2]. A 43 G.hs carrier set. Bit [3]: B 43 G.hs carrier set. Bit[4:7]: shall be set to 0. 0: 8.5dBm power output 1: 11.5 dBm power output 0: using internal lter in Tx path 1: using K1 external lter in Tx path
(for Korea VLR Application) 2: using U1 external lter in Tx path
(for US / Korea VLR Application) 3: using H1 external lter in Tx path
(for 100/100 Application) 0: using internal lter in Rx path 1: using K1 external lter in Rx path
(for Korea VLR Application) 2: using U1 external lter in Rx path
(for US / Korea VLR Application) 3: using H1 external lter in Rx path
(for 100/100 Application) Dying Gasp is a message sent from CPE to CO using the indica-
tor bit. It indicates that the CPE is experiencing an impending loss of power. Off: Dying Gasp off (don't send a message to CO). On: Dying Gasp on. 330 CHAPTER 7 Glossary 10Base-T. IEEE 802.3 specication for Ethernet that uses unshielded twisted pair (UTP) wiring with RJ-45 eight-conductor plugs at each end. Runs at 10 Mbps. 100Base-T. IEEE 802.3 specication for Ethernet that uses unshielded twisted pair (UTP) wiring with RJ-45 eight-conductor plugs at each end. Runs at 100 Mbps.
-----A-----
ACK. Acknowledgment. Message sent from one network device to another to indicate that some event has occurred. See NAK. access rate. Transmission speed, in bits per second, of the circuit between the end user and the network. adapter. Board installed in a computer system to provide network communication capability to and from that computer system. address mask. See subnet mask. ADSL. Asymmetric Digital Subscriber Line. Modems attached to twisted pair copper wiring that transmit 1.5-9 Mbps downstream (to the subscriber) and 16 -640 kbps upstream, depending on line distance.
(Downstream rates are usually lower that 1.5Mbps in practice.) AH. The Authentication Header provides data origin authentication, connectionless integrity, and anti-replay protection services. It protects all data in a datagram from tampering, including the elds in the header that do not change in transit. Does not provide condentiality. ANSI. American National Standards Institute. ASCII. American Standard Code for Information Interchange (pronounced ASK-ee). Code in which numbers from 0 to 255 represent individual characters, such as letters, numbers, and punctuation marks; used in text representation and communication protocols. 331 Administrators Handbook asynchronous communication. Network system that allows data to be sent at irregular intervals by pre-
ceding each octet with a start bit and following it with a stop bit. Compare synchronous communication. Auth Protocol. Authentication Protocol for IP packet header. The three parameter values are None, Encap-
sulating Security Payload (ESP) and Authentication Header (AH).
-----B-----
backbone. The segment of the network used as the primary path for transporting trafc between network segments. baud rate. Unit of signaling speed equal to the number of number of times per second a signal in a com-
munications channel varies between states. Baud is synonymous with bits per second (bps) if each signal represents one bit. binary. Numbering system that uses only zeros and ones. bps. Bits per second. A measure of data transmission speed. BRI. Basic Rate Interface. ISDN standard for provision of low-speed ISDN services (two B channels (64 kbps each) and one D channel (16 kbps)) over a single wire pair. bridge. Device that passes packets between two network segments according to the packets' destination address. broadcast. Message sent to all nodes on a network. broadcast address. Special IP address reserved for simultaneous broadcast to all network nodes. buffer. Storage area used to hold data until it can be forwarded.
-----C-----
carrier. Signal suitable for transmission of information. CCITT. Comit Consultatif International Tlgraphique et Tlphonique or Consultative Committee for Inter-
national Telegraph and Telephone. An international organization responsible for developing telecommunica-
tion standards. CD. Carrier Detect. CHAP. Challenge-Handshake Authentication Protocol. Security protocol in PPP that prevents unauthorized access to network services. See RFC 1334 for PAP specications Compare PAP. client. Network node that requests services from a server. CPE. Customer Premises Equipment. Terminating equipment such as terminals, telephones and modems that connects a customer site to the telephone company network. CO. Central Ofce. Typically a local telephone company facility responsible for connecting all lines in an area. 332 compression. Operation performed on a data set that reduces its size to improve storage or transmission rate. CPIP. Carrier Pigeon Internet Protocol. RFC 1149 - Standard for the transmission of IP datagrams on avian carriers. The IP datagram is printed, on a small scroll of paper, in hexadecimal, with each octet separated by whitestuff and blackstuff. The scroll of paper is wrapped around one leg of the avian carrier. A band of duct tape is used to secure the datagram's edges. The bandwidth is limited to the leg length. The MTU is variable, and paradoxically, generally increases with increased carrier age. A typical MTU is 256 milligrams. Some datagram padding may be needed. Upon receipt, the duct tape is removed and the paper copy of the datagram is optically scanned into an electronically transmittable form. crossover cable. Cable that lets you connect a port on one Ethernet hub to a port on another Ethernet hub. You can order an Ethernet crossover cable from Netopia, if needed. CSU/DSU. Channel Service Unit/Data Service Unit. Device responsible for connecting a digital circuit, such as a T1 link, with a terminal or data communications device.
-----D-----
data bits. Number of bits used to make up a character. datagram. Logical grouping of information sent as a network-layer unit. Compare frame, packet. DCE. Digital Communication Equipment. Device that connects the communication circuit to the network end node (DTE). A modem and a CSU/DSU are examples of a DCE. dedicated line. Communication circuit that is used exclusively to connect two network devices. Compare dial on demand. DES. Data Encryption Standard is a 56-bit encryption algorithm developed by the U.S. National Bureau of Standards (now the National Institute of Standards and Technology). 3DES. Triple DES, with a 168 bit encryption key, is the most accepted variant of DES. DH Group. Dife-Hellman is a public key algorithm used between two systems to determine and deliver secret keys used for encryption. Groups 1, 2 and 5 are supported. Also, see Dife-Hellman listing. DHCP. Dynamic Host Conguration Protocol. A network conguration protocol that lets a router or other device assign IP addresses and supply other network conguration information to computers on your net-
work. dial on demand. Communication circuit opened over standard telephone lines when a network connection is needed. Dife-Hellman. A group of key-agreement algorithms that let two computers compute a key independently without exchanging the actual key. It can generate an unbiased secret key over an insecure medium. diffserv. Differentiated Services. A method for controlling Quality of Service (QoS) queue priority settings. It allows a Gateway to make Quality of Service (QoS) decisions about what path Internet trafc, such as Voice over IP (VoIP), should travel across your network. 333 Administrators Handbook domain name. Name identifying an organization on the Internet. Domain names consists of sets of charac-
ters separated by periods (dots). The last set of characters identies the type of organization (.GOV, .COM,
.EDU) or geographical location (.US, .SE). domain name server. Network computer that matches host names to IP addresses in response to Domain Name System (DNS) requests. Domain Name System (DNS). Standard method of identifying computers by name rather than by numeric IP address. DSL. Digital Subscriber Line. Modems on either end of a single twisted pair wire that delivers ISDN Basic Rate Access. DTE. Data Terminal Equipment. Network node that passes information to a DCE (modem) for transmission. A computer or router communicating through a modem is an example of a DTE device. DTR. Data Terminal Ready. Circuit activated to indicate to a modem (or other DCE) that the computer (or other DTE) is ready to send and receive data. dynamic DNS. Allows you to use the free services of www.dyndns.org. Dynamic DNS automatically directs any public Internet request for your computer's name to your current dynamically-assigned IP address.
-----E-----
echo interval. Frequency with which the router sends out echo requests. encapsulation. Technique used to enclose information formatted for one protocol, such as AppleTalk, within a packet formatted for a different protocol, such as TCP/IP. Encrypt Protocol. Encryption protocol for the tunnel session. Parameter values supported include NONE or ESP. encryption. The application of a specic algorithm to a data set so that anyone without the encryption key cannot understand the information. ESP. Encapsulation Security Payload (ESP) header provides condentiality, data origin authentication, con-
nectionless integrity, anti-replay protection, and limited trafc ow condentiality. It encrypts the contents of the datagram as specied by the Security Association. The ESP transformations encrypt and decrypt por-
tions of datagrams, wrapping or unwrapping the datagram within another IP datagram. Optionally, ESP trans-
formations may perform data integrity validation and compute an Integrity Check Value for the datagram being sent. The complete IP datagram is enclosed within the ESP payload. Ethernet crossover cable. See crossover cable. Ethernet OAM 802.3ah. 802.3ah Ethernet in the First Mile (EFM) Operations Administration and Mainte-
nance (OAM) is a group of network management functions that provide network fault indication, perfor-
mance information, and diagnosis using special-purpose Ethernet OAM frames. These are exchanged between your Gateway and service provider Access Node (AN) devices for network fault management, per-
formance analysis and fault isolation. 334
-----F-----
FCS. Frame Check Sequence. Data included in frames for error control. ow control. Technique using hardware circuits or control characters to regulate the transmission of data between a computer (or other DTE) and a modem (or other DCE). Typically, the modem has buffers to hold data; if the buffers approach capacity, the modem signals the computer to stop while it catches up on pro-
cessing the data in the buffer. See CTS, RTS, xon/xoff. fragmentation. Process of breaking a packet into smaller units so that they can be sent over a network medium that cannot transmit the complete packet as a unit. frame. Logical grouping of information sent as a link-layer unit. Compare datagram, packet. FTP. File Transfer Protocol. Application protocol that lets one IP node transfer les to and from another node. FTP server. Host on network from which clients can transfer les.
-----H-----
Hard MBytes. Setting the Hard MBytes parameter forces the renegotiation of the IPSec Security Associa-
tions (SAs) at the congured Hard MByte value. The value can be congured between 1 and 1,000,000 MB and refers to data trafc passed. Hard Seconds. Setting the Hard Seconds parameter forces the renegotiation of the IPSec Security Associ-
ations (SAs) at the congured Hard Seconds value. The value can be congured between 60 and 1,000,000 seconds. A tunnel will start the process of renegotiation at the soft threshold and renegotiation must happen by the hard limit or trafc over the tunnel is terminated. hardware handshake. Method of ow control using two control lines, usually Request to Send (RTS) and Clear to Send (CTS). header. The portion of a packet, preceding the actual data, containing source and destination addresses and error-checking elds. HMAC. Hash-based Message Authentication Code hop. A unit for measuring the number of routers a packet has passed through when traveling from one net-
work to another. hop count. Distance, measured in the number of routers to be traversed, from a local router to a remote network. See metric. hub. Another name for a repeater. The hub is a critical network element that connects everything to one centralized point. A hub is simply a box with multiple ports for network connections. Each device on the net-
work is attached to the hub via an Ethernet cable. 335 Administrators Handbook
-----I-----
IGMP. Internet Group Management Protocol allows a router to determine which host groups have members on a given network segment. IKE. Internet Key Exchange protocol provides automated key management and is a preferred alternative to manual key management as it provides better security. Manual key management is practical in a small, static environment of two or three sites. Exchanging the key is done through manual means. Because IKE provides automated key exchange, it is good for larger, more dynamic environments. INSPECTION. The best option for Internet communications security is to have an SMLI rewall constantly inspecting the ow of trafc: determining direction, limiting or eliminating inbound access, and verifying down to the packet level that the network trafc is only what the customer chooses. The Netopia Gateway works like a network super trafc cop, inspecting and ltering out undesired trafc based on your security policy and resulting conguration. interface. A connection between two devices or networks. internet address. IP address. A 32-bit address used to route packets on a TCP/IP network. In dotted deci-
mal notation, each eight bits of the 32-bit number are presented as a decimal number, with the four octets separated by periods. IPCP. Internet Protocol Control Protocol. A network control protocol in PPP specifying how IP communica-
tions will be congured and operated over a PPP link. IPSEC. A protocol suite dened by the Internet Engineering Task Force to protect IP trafc at packet level. It can be used for protecting the data transmitted by any service or application that is based on IP, but is com-
monly used for VPNs. ISAKMP. Internet Security Association and Key Management Protocol is a framework for creating connec-
tion specic parameters. It is a protocol for establishing, negotiating, modifying, and deleting SAs and pro-
vides a framework for authentication and key exchange. ISAKMP is a part of the IKE protocol.
-----K-----
Key Management . The Key Management algorithm manages the exchange of security keys in the IPSec protocol architecture. SafeHarbour supports the standard Internet Key Exchange (IKE)
-----L-----
LCP. Link Control Protocol. Protocol responsible for negotiating connection conguration parameters, authenticating peers on the link, determining whether a link is functioning properly, and terminating the link. Documented in RFC 1331. loopback test. Diagnostic procedure in which data is sent from a devices's output channel and directed back to its input channel so that what was sent can be compared to what was received. 336
-----M-----
magic number. Random number generated by a router and included in packets it sends to other routers. If the router receives a packet with the same magic number it is using, the router sends and receives packets with new random numbers to determine if it is talking to itself. MD5. A 128-bit, message-digest, authentication algorithm used to create digital signatures. It computes a secure, irreversible, cryptographically strong hash value for a document. Less secure than variant SHA-1. metric. Distance, measured in the number of routers a packet must traverse, that a packet must travel to go from a router to a remote network. A route with a low metric is considered more efcient, and therefore preferable, to a route with a high metric. See hop count. modem. Modulator/demodulator. Device used to convert a digital signal to an analog signal for transmis-
sion over standard telephone lines. A modem at the other end of the connection converts the analog signal back to a digital signal. MRU. Maximum Receive Unit. The maximum packet size, in bytes, that a network interface will accept. MSSID. Multiple Service Set IDentier. Unique identiers of data sent over a wireless connection that act as passwords when wireless devices try to join wireless networks. An SSID differentiates one wireless net-
work from another, so all access points and all devices attempting to connect to a specic network must use the same SSID. Netopia Gateways support up to four SSIDs. SSIDs are also sometimes referred to as Network Names because they are names that identify wireless networks. MTU. Maximum Transmission Unit. The maximum packet size, in bytes, that can be sent over a network interface. MULTI-LAYER. The Open System Interconnection (OSI) model divides network trafc into seven distinct levels, from the Physical (hardware) layer to the Application (software) layer. Those in between are the Pre-
sentation, Session, Transport, Network, and Data Link layers. Simple rst and second generation rewall technologies inspect between 1 and 3 layers of the 7 layer model, while our SMLI engine inspects layers 2 through 7.
-----N-----
NAK. Negative acknowledgment. See ACK. NCP. Network Control Protocol. Negotiation Method. This parameter refers to the method used during the Phase I key exchange, or IKE process. SafeHarbour supports Main or Aggressive Mode. Main mode requires 3 two-way message exchanges while Aggressive mode only requires 3 total message exchanges. null modem. Cable or connection device used to connect two computing devices directly rather than over a network. 337 Administrators Handbook
-----P-----
packet. Logical grouping of information that includes a header and data. Compare frame, datagram. PAP. Password Authentication Protocol. Security protocol within the PPP protocol suite that prevents unau-
thorized access to network services. See RFC 1334 for PAP specications. Compare CHAP. parity. Method of checking the integrity of each character received over a communication channel. Peer External IP Address. The Peer External IP Address is the public, or routable IP address of the remote gateway or VPN server you are establishing the tunnel with. Peer Internal IP Network. The Peer Internal IP Network is the private, or Local Area Network (LAN) address of the remote gateway or VPN Server you are communicating with. Peer Internal IP Netmask. The Peer Internal IP Netmask is the subnet mask of the Peer Internal IP Net-
work. PFS Enable. Enable Perfect Forward Secrecy. PFS forces a DH negotiation during Phase II of IKE-IPSec SA exchange. You can disable this or select a DH group 1, 2, or 5. PFS is a security principle that ensures that any single key being compromised will permit access to only data protected by that single key. In PFS, the key used to protect transmission of data must not be used to derive any additional keys. If the key was derived from some other keying material, that material must not be used to derive any more keys. PING. Packet INternet Groper. Utility program that uses an ICMP echo message and its reply to verify that one network node can reach another. Often used to verify that two hosts can communicate over a network. PPP. Point-to-Point Protocol. Provides a method for transmitting datagrams over serial router-to-router or host-to-network connections using synchronous or asynchronous circuits. Pre-Shared Key. The Pre-Shared Key is a parameter used for authenticating each side. The value can be an ASCII or Hex and a maximum of 64 characters. Pre-Shared Key Type. The Pre-Shared Key Type classies the Pre-Shared Key. SafeHarbour supports ASCII or HEX types Priority queueing. Priority queueing (PQ) manages bandwidth resources on a network Gateway. It makes sure that prioritized data packets, such as streaming video or Voice-over-IP, are forwarded with the least possible delay. All other trafc is handled when the highest priority queue is empty. protocol. Formal set of rules and conventions that specify how information can be exchanged over a net-
work. PSTN. Public Switched Telephone Network.
-----Q-----
QoS. Quality of Service. The ability of a network to prioritize certain kinds of network trafc to provide reserved bandwidth and reduced latency needed by some real-time and interactive trafc such as voice and video over IP. QoS also provides priority for one or more ows, such that one ow does not make other ows fail. 338
-----R-----
repeater. Device that regenerates and propagates electrical signals between two network segments. Also known as a hub. RFC. Request for Comment. Set of documents that specify the conventions and standards for TCP/IP net-
working. RIP. Routing Information Protocol. Protocol responsible for distributing information about available routes and networks from one router to another. RJ-11. Four-pin connector used for telephones. RJ-45. Eight-pin connector used for 10BaseT (twisted pair Ethernet) networks. route. Path through a network from one node to another. A large internetwork can have several alternate routes from a source to a destination. routing table. Table stored in a router or other networking device that records available routes and dis-
tances for remote network destinations.
-----S-----
SA Encrypt Type. SA Encryption Type refers to the symmetric encryption type. This encryption algorithm will be used to encrypt each data packet. SA Encryption Type values supported include DES and 3DES. SA Hash Type. SA Hash Type refers to the Authentication Hash algorithm used during SA negotiation. Val-
ues supported include MD5 SHA1. N/A will display if NONE is chose for Auth Protocol. Security Association. From the IPSEC point of view, an SA is a data structure that describes which trans-
formation is to be applied to a datagram and how. The SA species:
The authentication algorithm for AH and ESP The encryption algorithm for ESP The encryption and authentication keys Lifetime of encryption keys The lifetime of the SA Replay prevention sequence number and the replay bit table An arbitrary 32-bit number called a Security Parameters Index (SPI), as well as the destination hosts address and the IPSEC protocol identier, identify each SA. An SPI is assigned to an SA when the SA is negotiated. The SA can be referred to by using an SPI in AH and ESP transformations. SA is unidirectional. SAs are commonly setup as bundles, because typically two SAs are required for communications. SA man-
agement is always done on bundles (setup, delete, relay). serial communication. Method of data transmission in which data bits are transmitted sequentially over a communication channel SHA-1. An implementation of the U.S. Government Secure Hash Algorithm; a 160-bit authentication algo-
rithm. 339 Administrators Handbook Soft MBytes. Setting the Soft MBytes parameter forces the renegotiation of the IPSec Security Associa-
tions (SAs) at the congured Soft MByte value. The value can be congured between 1 and 1,000,000 MB and refers to data trafc passed. If this value is not achieved, the Hard MBytes parameter is enforced. Soft Seconds. Setting the Soft Seconds parameter forces the renegotiation of the IPSec Security Associa-
tions (SAs) at the congured Soft Seconds value. The value can be congured between 60 and 1,000,000 seconds. SPI . The Security Parameter Index is an identier for the encryption and authentication algorithm and key. The SPI indicates to the remote rewall the algorithm and key being used to encrypt and authenticate a packet. It should be a unique number greater than 255. SSL. Secure Sockets Layer. A protocol developed by Netscape for transmitting private documents via the Internet. SSL uses a cryptographic system that uses two keys to encrypt data: a public key known to every-
one and a private or secret key known only to the recipient of the message. STATEFUL. The Netopia Gateway monitors and maintains the state of any network transaction. In terms of network request-and-reply, state consists of the source IP address, destination IP address, communication ports, and data sequence. The Netopia Gateway processes the stream of a network conversation, rather than just individual packets. It veries that packets are sent from and received by the proper IP addresses along the proper communication ports in the correct order and that no imposter packets interrupt the packet ow. Packet ltering monitors only the ports involved, while the Netopia Gateway analyzes the con-
tinuous conversation stream, preventing session hijacking and denial of service attacks. static route. Route entered manually in a routing table. subnet mask. A 32-bit address mask that identies which bits of an IP address represent network address information and which bits represent node identier information. synchronous communication. Method of data communication requiring the transmission of timing sig-
nals to keep peers synchronized in sending and receiving blocks of data.
-----T-----
telnet. IP protocol that lets a user on one host establish and use a virtual terminal connection to a remote host. TR-064. TR-064 is a LAN-side DSL Gateway conguration specication; an extension of UPnP. It denes more services to locally manage a Gateway. TR-069. TR-069 is a WAN-side DSL Gateway Management specication; provides services similar to UPnP and TR-064. The communication between a Gateway and management agent in UPnP and TR-064 is strictly over the LAN, whereas the communication in TR-069 is over the WAN link for some features and over the LAN for others. TR-069 allows a remote Auto-Cong Server to provision and manage a Gateway. TR-101. Standard for a network architecture where the aggregation network is Ethernet-based while the DSL access network is still ATM-over-DSL-based. This facilitates multiplay service delivery over a range of scaleable broadband access technologies. Ratied by the DSL Forum in late April 2006, TR-101 enables service providers to evolve their DSL access networks to better support faster access rates and to intro-
duce new multiplay services across IP-based broadband networks, all through a single gateway. These stan-
dards are particularly important for widespread delivery of Internet Protocol Television (IPTV). TR-101 outlines the specic features necessary for IP-based network equipment to deliver multiple services with 340 the same levels of Quality of Service, authentication, and service segmentation previously provided by tra-
ditional DSL networks. twisted pair. Cable consisting of two copper strands twisted around each other. The twisting provides pro-
tection against electromagnetic interference.
-----U-----
UTP. Unshielded twisted pair cable.
-----V-----
VDSL. Very high rate Digital Subscriber Line. VDSL transmits high speed data over short reaches of twisted-pair copper telephone lines, with a range of speeds depending upon actual line length. Both data channels will be separated in frequency from bands used for POTS and ISDN, enabling service providers to overlay VDSL on existing services. At present the two high speed channels will also be separated in fre-
quency. VLAN. Virtual Local Area Network. A network of computers that behave as if they are connected to the same wire even though they may be physically located on different segments of a LAN. VLANs are cong-
ured in software rather than hardware. VoIP. Voice-over-IP (VoIP) refers to the ability to make voice telephone calls over the Internet. This differs from traditional phone calls that use the Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN). VoIP calls use an Inter-
net protocol, Session Initiation Protocol (SIP), to transmit sound over a network or the Internet in the form of data packets.
-----W-----
WAN. Wide Area Network. Private network facilities, usually offered by public telephone companies but increasingly available from alternative access providers (sometimes called Competitive Access Providers, or CAPs), that link business network nodes. WFQ. Weighted Fair Queueing. A packet scheduling technique allowing guaranteed bandwidth services in order to let multiple sessions share the same link. It regulates the ow of data in networks by sorting pack-
ets to minimize latency. WFQ passes along narrowband signals rst, and buffers broadband signals. WMM. WiFi MultiMedia. WiFi Multimedia allows you to prioritize various types of data travelling over the wireless network. Certain types of data that are sensitive to delays, such as voice or video, must be priori-
tized ahead of other, less delay-sensitive types, such as email. It currently implements wireless Quality of Service (QoS) by transmitting data depending on Diffserv priority settings. WWW. World Wide Web.
-----X-----
XAuth. Extended Authentication. An extension to the Internet Key Exchange (IKE) protocol, for IPSec tunnel-
ling. Requires SafeHarbour IPsec tunneling feature key. 341 Administrators Handbook 342 CHAPTER 8 Technical Specifications and Safety Information Description Dimensions:
Smart Modems: 13.5 cm (w) x 13.5 cm (d) x 3.5 cm (h); 5.25 (w) x 5.25 (d) x 1.375 (h) Wireless Models: 19.5 cm (w) x 17.0 cm (d) x 4.0 cm (h); 7.6 (w) x 6.75 (d) x 1.5 (h) 3342/3342N/3352/3352N: 8.5 cm (w) x 4.5 cm (d) x 2 cm (h); 3.375 (w) x 1.75 (d) x .875 (h) 2200-Series Modems: 1.06"(2.69 cm) H, 4.36" (11.07 cm) W, 5.71"(14.50 cm) L 2200-Series Wireless Models: 1.2"(3.0cm) H, 8.7" (22.0 cm) W, 5.2"(13.2cm) L Communications interfaces: The Motorola Netopia Gateways have an RJ-11 jack for DSL line connections or an RJ-45 jack for cable/DSL modem connections and 1 or 4port 10/100Base-T Ethernet switch for your LAN connections. Some models have a USB port that can be used to connect to your PC; in some cases, the USB port also serves as the power source. Some models contain an 802.11b or 802.11g wireless LAN transmitter. Power requirements 12 VDC input USB-powered models only: For Use with Listed I.T.E. Only Environment Operating temperature: 0 to +40 C Storage temperature: 0 to +70 C Relative storage humidity: 20 to 80% noncondensing Software and protocols Software media: Software preloaded on internal ash memory; eld upgrades done via download to internal ash memory via TFTP or web upload. (does not apply to 3342/3352) Routing: TCP/IP Internet Protocol Suite, RIP WAN support: PPPoA, PPPoE, DHCP, static IP address Security: PAP, CHAP, UI password security, IPsec, SSL certicate 343 Administrators Handbook Management/conguration methods: HTTP (Web server), Telnet, SNMP, TR-069 DSL Forum CPE WAN Management Protocol Diagnostics: Ping, event logging, routing table displays, statistics counters, web-based management, traceroute, nslookup, and diagnostic commands. Agency approvals North America Safety Approvals:
United States UL 60950, Third Edition Canada CSA: CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 60950-00 EMC:
United States FCC Part 15 Class B Canada ICES-003 Telecom:
United States 47 CFR Part 68 Canada CS-03 International Safety Approvals:
Low Voltage (European directive) 73/23 EN60950 (Europe) EMI Compatibility:
89/336/EEC (European directive) EN55022:1994 CISPR22 Class B EN300 386 V1.2.1 (non-wireless products) EN 301-489 (wireless products) Regulatory notices European Community. This Motorola Netopia product conforms to the European Community CE Mark standard for the design and manufacturing of information technology equipment. This standard covers a broad area of product design, including RF emissions and immunity from electrical disturbances. The Netopia Embedded Software Version 7.7.4 complies with the following EU directives:
Low Voltage, 73/23/EEC EMC Compatibility, 89/336/EEC, conforming to EN 55 022 Manufacturers Declaration of Conformance Warnings:
This is a Class B product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference, in which 344 case the user may be required to take adequate measures. Adequate measures include increasing the physical distance between this product and other electrical devices. Changes or modications to this unit not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment. United States. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help. Service requirements. In the event of equipment malfunction, all repairs should be performed by our Company or an authorized agent. Under FCC rules, no customer is authorized to repair this equipment. This restriction applies regardless of whether the equipment is in or our of warranty. It is the responsibility of users requiring service to report the need for service to our Company or to one of our authorized agents. Service can be obtained at Motorola, Inc., 6001 Shellmound Street, Emeryville, California, 94608. Telephone: 510-597-5400. Important This product was tested for FCC compliance under conditions that included the use of shielded cables and connectors between system components. Changes or modications to this product not authorized by the manufacturer could void your authority to operate the equipment. Canada. This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference -Causing Equipment Regulations. Cet appareil numrique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du Rglement sur le matriel brouilleur du Canada. Declaration for Canadian users NOTICE: The Canadian Industry Canada label identies certied equipment. This certication means that the equipment meets certain telecommunications network protective, operation, and safety requirements. The Department does not guarantee the equipment will operate to the users satisfaction. Before installing this equipment, users should ensure that it is permissible to be connected to the facilities of the local telecommunications company. The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection. In some cases, the companys inside wiring associated with a single line individual service may be extended by means of a certied connector assembly (telephone extension cord). The customer should be aware that compliance with the above conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some situations. Repairs to the certied equipment should be made by an authorized Canadian maintenance facility designated by the supplier. Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment, or equipment malfunctions, may give the telecommunications company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment. 345 Administrators Handbook Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of the power utility, telephone lines, and internal metallic water pipe system, if present, are connected together. This precaution may be particularly important in rural areas. Caution Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves, but should contact the appropriate electric inspection authority, or electrician, as appropriate. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) assigned to each terminal device provides an indication of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the Ringer Equivalence Numbers of all the devices does not exceed 5. Important Safety Instructions Australian Safety Information The following safety information is provided in conformance with Australian safety requirements:
Caution DO NOT USE BEFORE READING THE INSTRUCTIONS: Do not connect the Ethernet ports to a carrier or carriage service providers telecommunications network or facility unless: a) you have the written consent of the network or facility manager, or b) the connection is in accordance with a connection permit or connection rules. Connection of the Ethernet ports may cause a hazard or damage to the telecommunication network or facility, or persons, with consequential liability for substantial compensation. Caution The direct plug-in power supply serves as the main power disconnect; locate the direct plug-in power supply near the product for easy access. For use only with CSA Certied Class 2 power supply, rated 12VDC. Telecommunication installation cautions Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm. Never install telephone jacks in wet locations unless the jack is specically designed for wet locations. Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone line has been disconnected at the network interface. Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines. Avoid using a telephone (other than a cordless type) during an electrical storm. There may be a remote risk of electric shock from lightning. Do not use the telephone to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak. 346 47 CFR Part 68 Information FCC Requirements 1. 2. 3. 4. The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) has established Rules which permit this device to be directly connected to the telephone network. Standardized jacks are used for these connections. This equipment should not be used on party lines or coin phones. If this device is malfunctioning, it may also be causing harm to the telephone network; this device should be disconnected until the source of the problem can be determined and until repair has been made. If this is not done, the telephone company may temporarily disconnect service. The telephone company may make changes in its technical operations and procedures; if such changes affect the compatibility or use of this device, the telephone company is required to give adequate notice of the changes. You will be advised of your right to le a complaint with the FCC. If the telephone company requests information on what equipment is connected to their lines, inform them of:
a. The telephone number to which this unit is connected. b. The ringer equivalence number. [0.XB]
c. The USOC jack required. [RJ11C]
d. The FCC Registration Number. [XXXUSA-XXXXX-XX-E]
Items (b) and (d) are indicated on the label. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) is used to determine how many devices can be connected to your telephone line. In most areas, the sum of the REN's of all devices on any one line should not exceed ve (5.0). If too many devices are attached, they may not ring properly. FCC Statements a) This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements adopted by the ACTA. On the bottom of this equipment is a label that contains, among other information, a product identier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. If requested, this number must be provided to the telephone company. b) List all applicable certication jack Universal Service Order Codes (USOC) for the equipment: RJ11. c) A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises wiring and telephone network must comply with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA. A compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this product. It is designed to be connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant. See installation instructions for details. d) The REN is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone line. Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most but not all areas, the sum of RENs should not exceed ve (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact the local telephone company. For products approved after July 23, 2002, the REN for this product is part of the product identier that has the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. The digits represented by
## are the REN without a decimal point (e.g., 03 is a REN of 0.3). For earlier products, the REN is separately shown on the label. e) If this equipment, the Motorola Netopia 2200-, 3300- or 7000-series router, causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. But if advance notice isnt practical, the telephone company will notify the customer as soon as possible. Also, you will be advised of your right to le a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary. f) The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations or procedures that could affect the operation of the equipment. If this happens the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary modications to maintain uninterrupted service. g) If trouble is experienced with this equipment, the Motorola Netopia 2200-, 3300- or 7000-series router, for repair or warranty information, please contact:
Motorola Technical Support 510-597-5400 www.netopia.com. If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved. 347 Administrators Handbook h) This equipment not intended to be repaired by the end user. In case of any problems, please refer to the trouble-
shooting section of the Product User Manual before calling Motorola Technical Support. i) Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. Contact the state public utility commission, public service commission or corporation commission for information. j) If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line, ensure the installation of this Motorola Netopia 2200-, 3300- or 7000-series router does not disable your alarm equipment. If you have questions about what will disable alarm equipment, consult your telephone company or qualied installer. RF Exposure Statement:
NOTE: Installation of the wireless models must maintain at least 20 cm between the wireless router and any body part of the user to be in compliance with FCC RF exposure guidelines. Electrical Safety Advisory Telephone companies report that electrical surges, typically lightning transients, are very destructive to customer terminal equipment connected to AC power sources. This has been identied as a major nationwide problem. Therefore it is advised that this equipment be connected to AC power through the use of a surge arrestor or similar protection device. Copyright Acknowledgments Because Motorola has included certain software source code in this product, Motorola includes the following text required by the respective copyright holders:
Portions of this software are based in part on the work of the following:
Copyright (c) 1998-2005 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modication, are permitted provided that the fol-
lowing conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following dis-
claimer. 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment:
This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit.
(http://www.openssl.org/) 4. The names OpenSSL Toolkit and OpenSSL Project must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior written permission. For written permission, please contact openssl-
core@openssl.org. 5. Products derived from this software may not be called OpenSSL nor may OpenSSL appear in their names without prior written permission of the OpenSSL Project. 6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment:
This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/) THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICU-
LAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFT-
WARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com). This product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com). 348 Original SSLeay License
/Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com) All rights reserved. This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com). The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL. This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as the following conditions are adhered to. The following conditions apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA, lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. The SSL documentation included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com). Copyright remains Eric Young's, and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed. If this pack-
age is used in a product, Eric Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library used. This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in documentation (online or textual) provided with the package. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modication, are permitted provided that the fol-
lowing conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following dis-
claimer. 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledge-
ment:
This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com) The word 'cryptographic' can be left out if the routines from the library being used are not cryptographic related :-
). 4. If you include any Windows specic code (or a derivative thereof) from the apps directory (application code) you must include an acknowledgement:
This product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com) THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCURE-
MENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. The licence and distribution terms for any publicly available version or derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e. this code cannot simply be copied and put under another distribution licence [including the GNU Public Licence.]
Portions of this software are based in part on the work of the following:
Copyright (C) 1995, 1996, 1997, and 1998 WIDE Project. All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modication, are permitted provided that the fol-
lowing conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. 3. Neither the name of the project nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specic prior written permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE PROJECT AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE PROJECT OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT 349 Administrators Handbook LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFT-
WARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. Portions of this software are based in part on the work of the following:
Copyright (C) 1990, RSA Data Security, Inc. All rights reserved.
<<RSA Data Security, Inc. MD5 Message-Digest Algorithm>>
License to copy and use this software is granted provided that it is identied as the RSA Data Security, Inc. MD5 Message Digest Algorithm in all material mentioning or referencing this software or this function. License is also granted to make and use derivative works provided that such works are identied as derived from the RSA Data Security, Inc. MD5 Message-Digest Algorithm in all material mentioning or referencing the derived work.
<<RSA Data Security, Inc. MD4 Message-Digest Algorithm>>
License to copy and use this software is granted provided that it is identied as the RSA Data Security, Inc. MD4 Message Digest Algorithm in all material mentioning or referencing this software or this function. License is also granted to make and use derivative works provided that such works are identied as derived from the RSA Data Security, Inc. MD4 Message-Digest Algorithm in all material mentioning or referencing the derived work. RSA Data Security, Inc. makes no representations concerning either the merchantability of this software or the suit-
ability of this software for any particular purpose. It is provided as is without express or implied warranty of any kind. These notices must be retained in any copies of any part of this documentation and/or software. Portions of this software are based in part on the work of the following:
Copyright (c) 1989 Carnegie Mellon University. All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms are permitted provided that the above copyright notice and this paragraph are duplicated in all such forms and that any documentation, advertising materials, and other materials related to such distribution and use acknowledge that the software was developed by Carnegie Mellon University. The name of the University may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without spe-
cic prior written permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED ``AS IS'' AND WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, WITH-
OUT LIMITATION, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Portions of this software are based in part on the work of the following:
Copyright 2000, 2001 Shane Kerr. All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modication, are permitted provided that the fol-
lowing conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR(S) ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUD-
ING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PUR-
POSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUP-
TION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. 350 CHAPTER 9 Overview of Major Capabilities The Motorola Netopia Gateway offers simplied setup and management features as well as advanced broadband router capabilities. The following are some of the main features of the Motorola Netopia Gate-
way:
Wide Area Network Termination on page 351 The Gateway combines an ADSL modem with an Internet router. It translates protocols used on the Inter-
net to protocols used by home personal computers and eliminates the need for special desktop soft-
ware (i.e. PPPoE). Simplied Local Area Network Setup on page 352 Built-in DHCP and DNS proxy features minimize or eliminate the need to program any network congura-
tion into your home personal computer. Management on page 353 A Web server built into the Motorola Netopia Operating System makes setup and maintenance easy using standard browsers. Diagnostic tools facilitate troubleshooting. Security on page 354 Network Address Translation (NAT), password protection, Stateful Inspection rewall and other built-in security features prevent unauthorized remote access to your network. Pinholes, default server, and other features permit access to computers on your home network that you can specify. Wide Area Network Termination PPPoE/PPPoA (Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet/ATM) The PPPoE specication, incorporating the PPP and Ethernet standards, allows your computer(s) to connect to your Service Providers network through your Ethernet WAN connection. The Motorola Netopia-series Gateway supports PPPoE, eliminating the need to install PPPoE client software on any LAN computers. Service Providers may require the use of PPP authentication protocols such as Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol (CHAP) or Password Authentication Protocol (PAP). CHAP and PAP use a username and password pair to authenticate users with a PPP server. A CHAP authentication process works as follows:
1. The password is used to scramble a challenge string. 2. The password is a shared secret, known by both peers. 351 Administrators Handbook 3. The unit sends the scrambled challenge back to the peer. PAP, a less robust method of authentication, sends a username and password to a PPP server to be authenticated. PAPs username and password pair are not encrypted, and are therefore sent unscram-
bled. Instant-On PPP You can congure your Gateway for one of two types of Internet connections:
Always On Instant On These selections provide either an uninterrupted Internet connection or an as-needed connection. While an Always On connection is convenient, it does leave your network permanently connected to the Internet, and therefore potentially vulnerable to attacks. Motorola Netopia's Instant On technology furnishes almost all the benets of an Always-On connection while providing two additional security benets:
Your network cannot be attacked when it is not connected. Your network may change address with each connection making it more difcult to attack. When you congure Instant On access, you can also congure an idle time-out value. Your Gateway moni-
tors trafc over the Internet link and when there has been no trafc for the congured number of seconds, it disconnects the link. When new trafc that is destined for the Internet arrives at the Gateway, the Gateway will instantly re-estab-
lish the link. Your service provider may be using a system that assigns the Internet address of your Gateway out of a pool of many possible Internet addresses. The address assigned varies with each connection attempt, which makes your network a moving target for any attacker. Simplied Local Area Network Setup DHCP (Dynamic Host Conguration Protocol) Server DHCP Server functionality enables the Gateway to assign to your LAN computer(s) a private IP address and other parameters that allow network communication. The default DHCP Server conguration of the Gateway supports up to 253 LAN IP addresses. This feature simplies network administration because the Gateway maintains a list of IP address assign-
ments. Additional computers can be added to your LAN without the hassle of conguring an IP address. 352 DNS Proxy Domain Name System (DNS) provides end users with the ability to look for devices or web sites by typing their names, rather than IP addresses. For web surfers, this technology allows you to enter the URL (Univer-
sal Resource Locator) as text to surf to a desired website. The Motorola Netopia DNS Proxy feature allows the LAN-side IP address of the Gateway to be used for proxying DNS requests from hosts on the LAN to the DNS Servers congured in the gateway. This is accom-
plished by having the Gateway's LAN address handed out as the DNS Server to the DHCP clients on the LAN. NOTE:
The Motorola Netopia DNS Proxy only proxies UDP DNS queries, not TCP DNS queries. Management Embedded Web Server There is no specialized software to install on your PC to congure, manage, or maintain your Motorola Neto-
pia Gateway. Web pages embedded in the operating system provide access to the following Gateway oper-
ations:
Setup System and security logs Diagnostics functions Once you have removed your Motorola Netopia Gateway from its packing container and powered the unit up, use any LAN attached PC or workstation running a common web browser application to congure and monitor the Gateway. Diagnostics In addition to the Gateways visual LED indicator lights, you can run an extensive set of diagnostic tools from your Web browser. Two of the facilities are:
Automated Multi-Layer Test The Run Diagnostics link initiates a sequence of tests. They examine the entire functionality of the Gateway, from the physical connections to the data trafc. Network Test Tools Three test tools to determine network reachability are available:
Ping - tests the reachability of a particular network destination by sending an ICMP echo request and waiting for a reply. NSLookup - converts a domain name to its IP address and vice versa. 353 Administrators Handbook TraceRoute - displays the path to a destination by showing the number of hops and the router addresses of these hops. The system log also provides diagnostic information. NOTE:
Your Service Provider may request information that you acquire from these various diagnostic tools. Individual tests may be performed at the command line. (See Command Line Interface on page 223.). Security Remote Access Control You can determine whether or not an administrator or other authorized person has access to conguring your Gateway. This access can be turned on or off in the Web interface. Password Protection Access to your Motorola Netopia device can be controlled through two access control accounts, Admin or User. The Admin, or administrative user, performs all conguration, management or maintenance operations on the Gateway. The User account provides monitor capability only. A user may NOT change the conguration, perform upgrades or invoke maintenance functions. Account usernames can now be changed for the Admin and User accounts. Network Address Translation (NAT) The Motorola Netopia Gateway Network Address Translation (NAT) security feature lets you conceal the topology of a hard-wired Ethernet or wireless network connected to its LAN interface from routers on net-
works connected to its WAN interface. In other words, the end computer stations on your LAN are invisible from the Internet. Only a single WAN IP address is required to provide this security support for your entire LAN. LAN sites that communicate through an Internet Service Provider typically enable NAT, since they usually purchase only one IP address from the ISP. When NAT is ON, the Motorola Netopia Gateway proxies for the end computer stations on your net-
work by pretending to be the originating host for network communications from non-originating networks. The WAN interface address is the only IP address exposed. The Motorola Netopia Gateway tracks which local hosts are communicating with which remote hosts. It routes packets received from remote networks to the correct computer on the LAN (Ethernet) interface. 354 When NAT is OFF, a Motorola Netopia Gateway acts as a traditional TCP/IP router, all LAN computers/
devices are exposed to the Internet. A diagram of a typical NAT-enabled LAN follows:
Internet WAN Ethernet Interface Motorola Netopia Gateway LAN Ethernet Interface NAT NAT-protected LAN stations Embedded Admin Services:
HTTP-Web Server and Telnet Server Port NOTE:
1. The default setting for NAT is ON. 2. Motorola Netopia uses Port Address Translation (PAT) to implement the NAT facility. 3. NAT Pinhole trafc (discussed below) is always initiated from the WAN side. Motorola Netopia Advanced Features for NAT Using the NAT facility provides effective LAN security. However, there are user applications that require methods to selectively by-pass this security function for certain types of Internet trafc. Motorola Netopia Gateways provide special pinhole conguration rules that enable users to establish NAT-protected LAN layouts that still provide exible by-pass capabilities. Some of these rules require coordination with the units embedded administration services: the internal Web (HTTP) Port (TCP 80) and the internal Telnet Server Port (TCP 23). Internal Servers The internal servers are the embedded Web and Telnet servers of the Gateway. You would change the inter-
nal server ports for Web and Telnet of the Gateway if you wanted to have these services on the LAN using pinholes or the Default server. 355 Administrators Handbook Pinholes This feature allows you to:
Transparently route selected types of network trafc using the port forwarding facility. FTP requests or HTTP (Web) connections are directed to a specic host on your LAN. Setup multiple pinhole paths. Up to 32 paths are supported Identify the type(s) of trafc you want to redirect by port number. Common TCP/IP protocols and ports are:
FTP (TCP 21) SMTP (TCP 25) SNMP (TCP 161, UDP 161) telnet (TCP 23) HTTP (TCP 80) See page 82 for How To instructions. Default Server This feature allows you to:
Direct your Gateway to forward all externally initiated IP trafc (TCP and UDP protocols only) to a default host on the LAN. Enable it for certain situations:
Where you cannot anticipate what port number or packet protocol an in-bound application might use. For example, some network games select arbitrary port numbers when a connection is opened. When you want all unsolicited trafc to go to a specic LAN host. Combination NAT Bypass Conguration Specic pinholes and Default Server settings, each directed to different LAN devices, can be used together. WARNING:
Creating a pinhole or enabling a Default Server allows inbound access to the specied LAN sta-
tion. Contact your Network Administrator for LAN security questions. IP-Passthrough Motorola Netopia OS now offers an IP passthrough feature. The IP passthrough feature allows a single PC on the LAN to have the Gateways public address assigned to it. It also provides PAT (NAPT) via the same public IP address for all other hosts on the private LAN subnet. 356 VPN IPSec Pass Through This Motorola Netopia service supports your independent VPN client software in a transparent manner. Motorola Netopia has implemented an Application Layer Gateway (ALG) to support multiple PCs running IP Security protocols. This feature has three elements:
1. On power up or reset, the address mapping function (NAT) of the Gateways WAN con-
guration is turned on by default. 2. When you use your third-party VPN application, the Gateway recognizes the trafc from your client and your unit. It allows the packets to pass through the NAT protection layer via the encrypted IPSec tunnel. 3. The encrypted IPSec tunnel is established through the Gateway. A typical VPN IPSec Tunnel pass through is diagrammed below:
Motorola Netopia Gateway NOTE:
Typically, no special conguration is necessary to use the IPSec pass through feature. In the diagram, VPN PC clients are shown behind the Motorola Netopia Gateway and the secure server is at Corporate Headquarters across the WAN. You cannot have your secure server behind the Motorola Netopia Gateway. When multiple PCs are starting IPSec sessions, they must be started one at a time to allow the associations to be created and mapped. VPN IPSec Tunnel Termination This Motorola Netopia service supports termination of VPN IPsec tunnels at the Gateway. This permits tunnelling from the Gateway without the use of third-party VPN client software on your client PCs. 357 Administrators Handbook Stateful Inspection Firewall Stateful inspection is a security feature that prevents unsolicited inbound access when NAT is disabled. You can congure UDP and TCP no-activity periods that will also apply to NAT time-outs if stateful inspection is enabled on the interface. Technical details are discussed in Expert Mode on page 39. SSL Certicate Support On selected models, you can also install a Secure Sockets Layer (SSL V3.0) certicate from a trusted Cer-
tication Authority (CA) for authentication purposes. If this feature is available on your Gateway, an addi-
tional link will appear in the Install page. Netopia Embedded Software Version 7.7.4 uses SSL certicates for TR-069 support. See Install Certicate on page 190. VLANs Motorola Netopia's VGx technology allows a single Motorola Netopia VGx-enabled broadband gate-
way to act as separate virtual gateways, treating each individual service as a single service "channel." The VGx-enabled gateway applies specic policies, routing, and prioritization parameters to each service chan-
nel, ensuring delivery of that service to the appropriate peripheral device with the requisite level of QoS and correct feature sets making it ideal for delivery of triple play voice, video, and data services. VGx was developed to ensure that subscribers receive the quality of voice, video, and data services they expect to prevent a large data download from causing jittery video or poor voice quality. VGx achieves this goal by providing superior service segmentation and QoS features obtained by mapping multiple local virtual local area networks (VLANs) to one or more specic permanent virtual circuits (PVCs) for DSL, or wide area network VLANs for a ber network. Trafc prioritization is determined through the Institute of Electrical Engineering (IEEE) standard 802.1p, which species QoS algorithms to prioritize trafc based on protocol and source. This insures that each service receives the QoS treatment it requires; for example, video is free from latency, VoIP service is prioritized to insure aural quality, and data is securely and efciently routed. 358 Index Symbols
!! command 227 A Access the GUI 39 Address resolution table 234 Administrative restrictions 264 Administrator password 39, 140, 226 Arguments, CLI 241 ARP Command 228, 239 ATA configuration 243 Authentication 281 Authentication trap 297 auto-channel mode 303 AutoChannel Setting 57, 303 B Backup 133 Bridging 246 Broadcast address 259, 261 C CLI 223
!! command 227 Arguments 241 Command shortcuts 227 Command truncation 240 Configuration mode 240 Keywords 241 Navigating 240 Prompt 227, 240 Restart command 227 SHELL mode 227 View command 242 Command ARP 228, 239 Ping 230 Telnet 238 Command line interface (see CLI) 359 Administrators Handbook Community 297 Compression, protocol 280 Concurrent Bridging/Routing 105, 247 CONFIG Command List 225 Configuration mode 240 D D. port 167 Default IP address 39 denial of service 340 designing a new filter set 169 DHCP 248 DHCP filtering 252 DHCP lease table 231 DHCP option filtering 252 DHCP/PPPoE/PPPoA Autosensing 68 Diagnostic log 231, 235 Level 298 Diagnostics 353 DNS 255 DNS Proxy 353 Documentation conventions 15 Domain Name System (DNS) 255 DSL Forum settings 321 E Echo request 280 echo-period 280 Embedded Web Server 353 Ethernet address 246 Ethernet statistics 231 F Feature Keys Obtaining 187 filter parts 165 parts of 165 filter priority 164 filter set adding 171 display 167 360 filter sets adding 171 defined 163 deleting 175 disadvantages 163 using 171 filtering example #1 167 filters actions a filter can take 165 adding to a filter set 172 defined 163 deleting 175 input 172 modifying 175 output 172 using 170, 171 viewing 175 firewall 235 FTP 278 H Hardware address 246 hijacking 340 Hop count 277 HTTP traffic 286 I ICMP Echo 230 IGMP 100 IGMP Snooping 101, 257 Install 182 Install Certificate 190 IP address 259, 261 Default 39 IP interfaces 234 IP routes 235 IP Subnets 50 IPMap table 235 IPSec Tunnel 234 K Keywords, CLI 241 361 Administrators Handbook L LAN Host Discovery Table 235 latency 177 LCP echo request 280 Link Install Software 182 Quickstart 47, 49, 67 Local Area Network 352 Location, SNMP 297 Log 235 Logging in 226 lost echoes 280 M Magic number 280 Memory 235 Metric 277 multi-cast forwarding 260, 283 Multiple SSIDs 59 multiple subnets 50 Multiple Wireless SSIDs Wireless 59, 303 N Nameserver 255 NAT 264, 278, 354 Traffic rules 90 NAT Default Server 356 Netmask 262 Network Address Translation 354 Network Test Tools 353 NSLookup 353 O set upnp option 321 Operating Mode Wireless 56, 303 P PAP 351 Password 140 Administrator 39, 140, 226 User 39, 140, 226 362 persistent-log 299 Ping 353 Ping command 230 Pinholes 278, 356 Planning 82 policy-based routing 177 Port authentication 281 port number comparisons 166 port numbers 165 Port renumbering 286 PPP 240 PPPoE 351 PPPoE with IPoE 71, 73 Primary nameserver 255 Prompt, CLI 227, 240 Protocol compression 280 Q qos max-burst-size 245 qos peak-cell-rate 245 qos service-class 245 qos sustained-cell-rate 245 quality of service 165, 177 R Restart 232 Restart command 227 Restart timer 280 Restrictions 264 RIP 261, 262 Routing Information Protocol (RIP) 261, 262 rtsp-passthrough 276 S Secondary nameserver 255 Secure Sockets Layer 190 Security filters 163 Security log 180 Session Initiation Protocol 120, 316 Set bncp command 245, 246 Set bridge commands 247 363 Administrators Handbook Set DMT commands 254 Set dns commands 255 Set ip static-routes commands 276 Set ppp module port authentication command 281 Set preference more command 285 Set preference verbose command 285 set security state-insp 292 Set servers command 286 Set servers telnet-tcp command 286 Set snmp sysgroup location command 297 Set snmp traps authentification-traps ip-address command 297 Set system diagnostic-level command 298 Set system heartbeat command 300 Set system name command 298 Set system NTP command 300 Set system password command 299 set system syslog 301 Set wireless option command 303 Set wireless user-auth option command 309 SHELL Command Shortcuts 227 Commands 227 Prompt 227 SHELL level 240 SHELL mode 227 show config 232 Show ppp 240 Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) 297 SIP 120, 316 sip-passthrough 276 SMTP 278 SNMP 98, 278, 297 SNMP Notify Type settings 297 src. port 167 SSL certificates 190 Stateful Inspection 154 stateful inspection 235 Static route 276 Step mode 242 Subnet mask 262 Subnets 50 subnets multiple 50 Syslog 125 364 System contact, SNMP 297 System diagnostics 298 system idle-timeout 299 T Telnet 226, 278 Telnet command 238 Telnet traffic 286 TFTP 278 TFTP server 229 Toolbar 43 TOS bit 165, 177 TraceRoute 218, 354 Trap 297 Trivial File Transfer Protocol 229 Truncation 240 U UPnP 102 User name 226 User password 39, 140, 226 V set atm 245 View command 242 view config 238 VLAN ID 111 VLAN Settings 311 VLANs 107 Voice-over-IP 120, 316 VoIP 120, 316 VPN IPSec Pass Through 357 IPSec Tunnel Termination 357 W Weighted Fair Queue 273 weighted fair queuing 271 Wide Area Network 351 WiFi Multimedia 62 Wireless 53 365 Administrators Handbook Z Zero Touch 301 366 Motorola Netopia 2200-, 3300- or 7000-series Motorola, Inc. 6001 Shellmound Street Emeryville, CA 94608 August 2, 2007 367 Administrators Handbook 368
frequency | equipment class | purpose | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
1 | 2008-02-05 | 2412 ~ 2462 | DTS - Digital Transmission System | Original Equipment |
app s | Applicant Information | |||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
1 | Effective |
2008-02-05
|
||||
1 | Applicant's complete, legal business name |
ARRIS
|
||||
1 | FCC Registration Number (FRN) |
0023147978
|
||||
1 | Physical Address |
2500 Walsh Ave.
|
||||
1 |
Santa Clara, California 95051
|
|||||
1 |
United States
|
|||||
app s | TCB Information | |||||
1 | TCB Application Email Address |
b******@baclcorp.com
|
||||
1 | TCB Scope |
A4: UNII devices & low power transmitters using spread spectrum techniques
|
||||
app s | FCC ID | |||||
1 | Grantee Code |
GZ5
|
||||
1 | Equipment Product Code |
224742
|
||||
app s | Person at the applicant's address to receive grant or for contact | |||||
1 | Name |
W******** W********
|
||||
1 | Title |
Hardware Engineer
|
||||
1 | Telephone Number |
(408)********
|
||||
1 | Fax Number |
(408)********
|
||||
1 |
w******@arris.com
|
|||||
app s | Technical Contact | |||||
n/a | ||||||
app s | Non Technical Contact | |||||
n/a | ||||||
app s | Confidentiality (long or short term) | |||||
1 | Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | Yes | ||||
1 | Long-Term Confidentiality Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | No | ||||
if no date is supplied, the release date will be set to 45 calendar days past the date of grant. | ||||||
app s | Cognitive Radio & Software Defined Radio, Class, etc | |||||
1 | Is this application for software defined/cognitive radio authorization? | No | ||||
1 | Equipment Class | DTS - Digital Transmission System | ||||
1 | Description of product as it is marketed: (NOTE: This text will appear below the equipment class on the grant) | ADSL2+ 802.11b/g Ethernet Modem | ||||
1 | Related OET KnowledgeDataBase Inquiry: Is there a KDB inquiry associated with this application? | No | ||||
1 | Modular Equipment Type | Does not apply | ||||
1 | Purpose / Application is for | Original Equipment | ||||
1 | Composite Equipment: Is the equipment in this application a composite device subject to an additional equipment authorization? | No | ||||
1 | Related Equipment: Is the equipment in this application part of a system that operates with, or is marketed with, another device that requires an equipment authorization? | No | ||||
1 | Grant Comments | Output is conducted. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must be installed to provide a separation distance of at least 20 cm from all persons and must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. End-users and installers must be provided with antenna installation instructions and transmitter operating conditions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. | ||||
1 | Is there an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application? | No | ||||
1 | If there is an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application, has the associated waiver been approved and all information uploaded? | No | ||||
app s | Test Firm Name and Contact Information | |||||
1 | Firm Name |
Bay Area Compliance Laboratory
|
||||
1 | Name |
J**** C******
|
||||
1 | Telephone Number |
408-7********
|
||||
1 | Fax Number |
408-7********
|
||||
1 |
b******@baclcorp.com
|
|||||
Equipment Specifications | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 1 | 15C | 2412 | 2462 | 0.1202 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 2 | 15C | 2412 | 2462 | 0.1097 |
some individual PII (Personally Identifiable Information) available on the public forms may be redacted, original source may include additional details
This product uses the FCC Data API but is not endorsed or certified by the FCC